JP7174002B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine capable of playing games.

As a gaming machine, game balls, which are game media, are shot into a game area by a shooting device, and when the game balls enter a prize winning area such as a prize winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuation”) identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device is a specific display result, the game state (game There is a so-called pachinko machine configured to change the state of the machine (ie, more specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) to give a predetermined game value to the player.

The game value is defined as the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine that is advantageous to the player who is likely to win the ball, or the state that is advantageous to the player. It is to generate a right or to be in a state in which the conditions for paying out prize balls are likely to be established.

In a pachinko game machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started on the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball in a starting winning hole. If you do, a "jackpot" will occur. It should be noted that the derivation display means that the symbol (final stop symbol) is finally stopped and displayed. When a big win occurs, for example, the big win opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big win game state in which the ball is likely to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning opening is closed. The number of openings of the big winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed after the opening time has elapsed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning slot may be called a round. Moreover, the game in a round may be called a round game.

In addition, in the variable display device, patterns other than the final stop pattern (for example, the middle pattern among the left, middle, and right patterns) continue for a predetermined period of time and are stopped and shaken in a state in which they match a specific display result. Big wins can occur before the final result is displayed due to moving, scaling, or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating in sync with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols changing. The production performed in the state where the sexuality is continuing (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is called the reach production. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach state. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the pattern variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

Among such gaming machines, there is known a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in a normal state. For example, in Patent Document 1, even if the number of times of the special game executed in the normal game state (the number of times of execution of the variable display) reaches 1000 times (special number), when the big win (advantageous state) does not occur (special When the condition is met), the game state is controlled to a probability variable state, the probability of determining a big hit as a result of the special game is increased to about 1/100, and the big win is likely to occur in the subsequent special game. is stated. In addition, in Patent Document 1, when the number of special game games (the number of executions of variable display) reaches 1000 times in a normal game state and no big hit occurs, a time saving state is generated instead of the variable probability state. It is described that it is acceptable.

JP 2005-95449 A (0058, 0133, etc.)

However, there is room for improvement in the control in which the special state can be controlled based on the number of times the variable display is executed.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the improvement of gambling properties and realizes sound game properties.

The gaming machine according to the present invention performs variable display of identification information including first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and second identification information (eg, second special symbol), and performs a specific display result (eg, a big hit). A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player based on the derivation display of symbols), and is a special state (for example, a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state). Time saving state) controllable special state control means (e.g., part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and numerical information (e.g., relief Time saving number counter) can be updated (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the special state control means is such that the numerical information updated by the updating means is a special number of times (for example , 900 times) corresponding to a specific value (e.g., "0") when a special condition is established (e.g., relief time reduction is established) can be controlled to a special state (e.g., game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120 IWS 150), and the updating means updates the numerical information between when variable display of the first identification information is performed and when variable display of the second identification information is performed (for example, the Regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is uniformly updated), the specific display result Special state control means (for example, for game control A portion that executes steps 120IWS114 to S116 in the microcomputer 100) and a special counting means that counts the number of special states that occurred in the special state (for example, a portion that executes step 120IWS73 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a special A special state ending means for ending the state (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS143 in the game control microcomputer 100) is further provided, and the special state ending means is such that the number of special states counted by the special counting means reaches a specific number of times. (For example, once) it is possible to end the special state based on (for example, game control my The black computer 100 sets the time saving end flag at step 120IWS75 when Y at step 120IWS74, determines Y at step 120IWS141, and executes step 120IWS143),
The special state control means, when a special condition is established in the normal state and a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is established, is based on the derived display of the special display result. It is possible to control the special state during the special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, even if it is a small hit fluctuation, at the timing of the end of the symbol fixing period, if the relief time reduction determination flag is set in 120IWS 148 , Step 120 IWS150 is executed, and in the subsequent small winning game state it is controlled to the time saving state C), the special state control means is controlled to the advantageous state in the normal state First special state (for example, time saving once Time saving state) can be controlled (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S544), and after being controlled to an advantageous state in a special state, a higher degree of advantage than the first special state 2 special state (for example, time saving state of 7 times of time saving number) can be controlled (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS537, S542), special display result in the variable display where the special condition is established is derived and displayed, and in the special state based on the derived display of the special display result, when controlled to an advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area, after the advantageous state, the first special It is characterized by being controllable (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120, IWS537 and S540).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that does not become too advantageous for the player (that is, does not become too disadvantageous for the game parlor).

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in the characteristic portion 120IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning ball apparatus in the characteristic part 120IW. FIG. 12 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the characterizing portion 120IW; It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a big-hit determination table, a small-hit determination table, and a time-saving deviation determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit type determination table and a small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a time saving classification determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a design determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a design determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the release pattern of the small winning game. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 120IW; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the game control main processing in characteristic part 120IW. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing in characteristic part 120IW. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit closing post-processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. FIG. 10 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in the characterizing part 120IW; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a setting suggestion effect determination table at the time of relief; It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. It is explanatory drawing of the setting suggestion production|presentation determination table at the time of a big hit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation aspect when shifting to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation aspect when shifting to relief time reduction. It is a flowchart which shows the special design stop processing in the modification 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit closing post-processing in the modified example 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit closing post-processing in the modification 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing in the modification 4. FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol normal process in the modification 5. It is a flowchart which shows the special design stop processing in the modification 5. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol normal process in the modification 6. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing the timing of the look-ahead advance notice effect restriction period in Modification 7. FIG. It is a timing chart which shows the timing of control of various time saving states in the modification 8. FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit type determination table and a small hit type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the release pattern of the small winning game. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 090IW; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 090IW; It is a flowchart which shows a small hit closing post-processing. It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of an effect mode when a small hit occurs; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of an effect mode when a small hit occurs; It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of the opening pattern of a small hit game. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of an effect mode when a small hit occurs; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of an effect mode when a small hit occurs; It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of the opening pattern of a small hit game. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 113IW; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 113IW; 7 is a flowchart showing an example of processing related to output of each test signal in test terminal processing; 7 is a flowchart showing an example of processing related to output of each test signal in test terminal processing; It is a flow chart which shows customer waiting demonstration effect control processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display execution lottery table and a telop display mode determination lottery table; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing which shows time saving classification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of a special design and a decoration design. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special design variation process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special design normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special design normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special design normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special design stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special design stop process. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the game state. It is a time chart for explaining the control example of the game state. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect of time saving rush production|presentation. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode of the time-saving rush effect in the modification 1-3. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the game state in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol normal processing in the second modification. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol normal processing in the second modification. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol normal processing in the second modification. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol normal processing in the second modification. It is a timing chart which shows the timing which performs each production|presentation in the modification 2. FIG. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a staged reach effect mode in Modification 2; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect of relief working-time-saving establishment information in the modification 2. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of control of a game state in modification 2;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 120IW)
Next, the characterizing portion 120IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characterizing portion 120IW, the game state is controlled to either a normal state (non-time saving state) or a time saving state. In this example, in the time saving state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, the average normal figure fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, compared to the normal state Increases the probability of winning in the normal game. For example, in the normal state, the probability of hitting the normal pattern is 10%, while in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the normal pattern is increased to 90%, and the game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port). easier to do. In addition, not only such an aspect, for example, in the time saving state, compared with the normal state, by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) It may be configured so that game balls can easily win a prize.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result is a big hit and the time saving state is controlled after the big win game ends, the time saving losing pattern is derived and displayed even if the variable display result is a loss. It may be controlled to a time saving state based on.

Furthermore, in this example, after the gaming machine is turned on, after the occurrence of a big hit, or after the occurrence of a time-saving loss, the next big win or time-saving loss occurs even if the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example). Even if you do not, it may be controlled to a short working hours state (relief working hours).

In addition, in the time saving state, (1) control to increase the normal pattern per probability, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, and (3) open time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Part of the control in (4) may not be performed. For example, the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the time-saving loss, and the time-saving state via the relief time-saving via (1) to (4) may be different in which control is performed, may be the same.

In addition, it is preferable to define the number of times n of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is controlled and the number of times N of time reduction in the relief time reduction are defined as follows.
2.5P≤n≤3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of operations, N = number of time reduction)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750-900, and the number of time reductions N is 120-1140.

In addition, in this example, it is easy to execute the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state. Since it is configured, the time saving state is a state that is easily controlled to the small winning game state.

(board configuration)
FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic portion 120IW. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 120IW, in the game area, the first path of the flowing paths along which the game balls flow is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the image display device 5 as viewed from the front, and the game is played. A second route, which is different from the first route, is mainly provided in a region on the right side of the image display device 5 as viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path is called left hitting. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the second path is called right hitting. The first path may be called a left-handed path because it is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by striking the game ball to the left side of the game area. Also, the second path may be called a right-handed path because it is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by striking the game ball to the right side of the game area.

Note that the first route and the second route may be composed of different routes, or may be a route in which a part is shared. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 and the arrangement of the game nails in the game area.

The game ball fired from the ball shooting device in response to the operation of the ball operating handle 30 and hit into the game area is guided to the left game area along, for example, the arrangement of the game nails. As a result, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the right game area. In addition, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area by being guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example.

A winning ball device 6A that constitutes a first start winning hole is provided as a structure into which game balls that are hit in the left game area of the game areas can enter.

Structures into which game balls hit into the right game area of the game areas can enter include a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B that constitutes a second start winning opening, and a special variable winning opening that constitutes a special winning opening. A ball device 120IW17 and a special variable winning ball device 7 constituting a big winning hole are provided.

In the left game area, a game nail is planted so that a game ball is guided to the winning ball device 6A of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming for the game ball to enter the winning ball device 6A, the player should hit the game ball to the left. Also, in the right game area, the game nail is set so that the game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 6B, the passage gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and the special variable winning ball device 7 among the winning opening structures. is planted. Therefore, when the player aims to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B, the passage gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and the special variable winning ball device 7, the player hits the game ball to the right. good.

It should be noted that although it may be arranged that there is a possibility that a game ball hit into the right game area may enter the winning ball device 6A, from the point of view of game performance, the possibility is limited to a game ball hit into the left game area. It is desirable to make them extremely low compared to the likelihood of a ball entering them. Conversely, it may be possible that game balls hit into the left game area may enter the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, but from the point of view of playability, that possibility is limited to the right. It is desirable to make the possibility extremely low compared to the possibility that game balls hit into the game areas enter them.

The special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is a device for determining V winning of a game ball, which is a condition for generating a big hit when a small hit occurs.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 120IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a right-handed informing LED 120IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG.

(Special Variable Winning Ball Device)
FIG. 8-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 in the feature part 120IW. As shown in FIG. 8-2, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 120IW17a formed as a bottom surface of a flow path through which game balls flow down. By moving the bottom member 120IW17a backward from the closed state in which the bottom member 120IW17a is moved forward, the special prize winning opening serving as the prize winning area is opened. A game ball that has entered the special winning opening is detected by the special winning opening switch 120IW24.

In this example, when a game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole) and is detected by the count switch 23, 15 winning balls are obtained. When game balls enter the ball device 120IW17 (special winning opening) and are detected by the special winning opening switch 120IW24, three winning balls are obtained.

Further, the bottom member 120IW17a is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 120IW83 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

In this characteristic part 120IW, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the game ball that has won in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning opening) is further guided to the right side of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17. It leads to 120IW01. The guide path 120IW01 is further branched into two paths 120IW02, 03, and the game ball guided to the guide path 120IW01 is guided to the left path 120IW02 or the right path 120IW03. The left path 120IW02 is a V winning opening, and a game ball that has entered the V winning opening is detected by the V winning opening switch 120IW20a.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, a V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is provided near the entrance of the left path 120IW02 (V winning opening). A game ball guided to the path 120IW01 enters the left path 120IW02 (V winning opening), and can enter the V winning opening. Also, when the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is in the closed state, the game ball guided to the guide path 120IW01 enters the right path 120IW03 and is discharged behind the game area.

The V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 120IW84 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

In addition, in this characterizing section 120IW, when it is controlled to the small winning game state, the game ball enters the V winning opening 120IW02 during the small winning game state and is detected by the V winning opening switch 120IW20A. After the end of the small winning game, it is controlled to a big winning game state.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is formed with a plurality of regulation pieces that reduce the flow speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom member 120IW17a. In this example, the regulation piece is provided in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, so that the game ball flowing down from the upper right to the lower left is meandering with a movement in the front-rear direction component, so that the flowing direction of the game ball is controlled. By changing it, the time it takes to flow down is delayed compared to when there is no restricting piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-2, in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning opening), a special winning opening switch 120IW24 is provided on the upstream side, and a V winning opening and a discharge opening are provided on the downstream side. Although the case where the V winning opening switch 120IW20A is provided on the V winning opening side by branching to and is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the upstream side in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning opening) branches into the V winning opening side and the general winning opening side, and the V winning opening switch 120IW20A is provided on the V winning opening side, and the general It may be configured such that a special winning opening switch 120IW24 is provided on the winning opening side.

(Substrate configuration)
FIG. 8-3 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the characteristic portion 120IW. As shown in FIG. 8-3, in this characteristic portion 120IW, the switch circuit 110 includes the gate switch 21, the starter switch (the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B), the count switch 23, and the special winning opening. A detection signal from the switch 120IW24 and the V winning opening switch 120IW20a (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, solenoid 81, solenoid 82, solenoid 120IW83, solenoid 120IW84, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100, and the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the big prize It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 for the entrance door (special variable winning ball device 7), the solenoid 120IW83 for the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and the solenoid 120IW84 for the V winning mouth opening/closing plate 120IW20.

(Big hit probability, Small hit probability, Missing probability)
FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the big-hit probability and the small-hit probability for each set value. Among them, FIG. 8-4(A) shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, FIG. 8-4(B) shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed.

In this example, any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) can be set. Setting confirmation processing and setting change processing can be executed to check the current set values and change the set values. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-4, this example shows a case where the setting can be changed in six stages from setting values "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, but may be configured so that the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or in 7 or more steps.

As shown in FIG. 8-4(A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the set value "1" is the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous for the player. It is set. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "328/65536". It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of the set value "1" to "6" , the small hit probability is constant at "164/65536" (about 1/400).

In addition, with respect to the loss with time saving, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the setting value "1" ~ "6" is related to which There is no small hit probability, which is constant at "328/65536" (about 1/200).

On the other hand, with respect to the loss without time saving, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), in the case of time saving, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the set value "1" is a big hit The highest probability is "64839/65536", the set value is "2", the set value is "3", the set value is "4", and the set value is "5". The lowest probability is "64716/65536".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the set value "1" is the lowest probability of hitting "205/65536", which is the lowest for the player. Unfavorable setting. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "328/65536". It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of the set value "1" to "6" , the small hit probability is constant at "9362/65536" (about 1/7).

In addition, with respect to the loss with time saving, as shown in FIG. There is no small hit probability, which is constant at "164/65536" (about 1/400).

On the other hand, with respect to the loss without time saving, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), in the case of time saving, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the set value "1" is a big hit The highest probability is "55805/65536", the set value is "2", the set value is "3", the set value is "4", and the set value is "5". It has the lowest probability of “55682/65536”.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit probability is about 1/400, whereas the variation display of the second special symbol is about 1/400. When executed, the small hit probability is as high as about 1/7.

(Big hit type determination table, small hit type determination table)
8-5 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Among them, FIG. 8-5(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-5(B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This table is referred to for determining the type of the jackpot to be either "6R time saving jackpot A" or "6R time saving jackpot B".

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to in order to determine the type of jackpot to "10R time-saving jackpot".

"6R time-saving jackpot A" is a jackpot that controls to a jackpot game state of 6 rounds and shifts to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. "6R time-saving jackpot B" is a jackpot that controls to a jackpot game state of 6 rounds and shifts to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. It should be noted that the "6R time-saving jackpot A" and the "6R time-saving jackpot B" are different in the stop pattern of the jackpot pattern of the first special symbol to be derived and displayed. "10R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that controls to a jackpot game state of 10 rounds and shifts to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends.

As shown in FIG. 8-5(A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the jackpot is achieved, the probability of 70% is determined as "6R short time jackpot A", and 30 It is determined as "6R short time jackpot B" with a probability of %. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is achieved, it is determined as "10R short time big hit" with a probability of 100%. .

8-5 (C) and (D) are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Among them, FIG. 8-5(C) shows a specific example of the small hit type determination table for the first special symbol. In addition, FIG. 8-5 (D) shows a specific example of the small hit type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the small hit type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table referred to in order to determine the type of the small win as "small win A".

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (D), the small hit type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. This table is referred to for determining the type of the small win to be "small win A" or "small win B".

"Small hit A" is controlled to the big hit game state of the 2nd to 6th rounds on the condition that the V prize is won during the small win game (first round), and after the big win game state is completed, the time is shortened. It is a small hit to shift to the state. "Small hit B" is controlled to the big hit game state of the 2nd round to the 10th round on the condition that the V prize is won during the small win game (first round), and after the big win game state is finished, the time is shortened. It is a small hit to shift to the state.

As shown in FIG. 8-5(C), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed to result in a small hit, the "small hit A" is determined with a probability of 100%. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (D), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and becomes a small hit, the "small hit A" is determined with a probability of 30%. , is determined as "small hit B" with a probability of 70%.

(Time saving type judgment table)
8-6 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the time reduction type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Among them, FIG. 8-6(A) shows a specific example of the time reduction type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-6(B) shows a specific example of the time reduction type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), the time saving type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when the variable display result is determined to be a time saving design. , is a table referred to for determining the type of time saving loss to be either “time saving loss A”, “time saving loss B” or “time saving loss C”.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), the time saving type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when the variable display result is determined to be a time saving design. , is a table referred to for determining the type of time saving loss to be either “time saving loss A”, “time saving loss B” or “time saving loss C”.

As shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), in this example, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed and the time saving is lost, it is determined as "time saving loss A" with a probability of about 33%, With a probability of about 33%, it is determined to be "time saving B", and with a probability of about 33% it is determined to be "time saving C". Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the time saving is lost, it is determined as "time saving loss A" with a probability of about 33%. Then, it is determined to be “time saving B” with a probability of about 33%, and is determined to be “time saving C” with a probability of about 33%.

(symbol judgment table)
8-7 and 8-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the symbol determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Among them, FIG. 8-7(A) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the 6R time-saving jackpot A. FIG. Further, FIG. 8-7(B) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the 6R time-saving jackpot B. As shown in FIG. Further, FIG. 8-7(C) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the 10R time-saving jackpot. Further, FIG. 8-7(D) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the small hit A. As shown in FIG. Further, FIG. 8-7(E) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the small hit B. FIG. Further, FIG. 8-8(F) shows a specific example of the pattern determination table for the time saving deviation A. FIG. Further, FIG. 8-8(G) shows a specific example of the pattern determination table for the time-saving loss B. As shown in FIG. Further, FIG. 8-8(H) shows a specific example of the pattern determination table for the time saving deviation C. As shown in FIG. Further, FIG. 8-8(I) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for loss (no time saving).

As shown in FIG. 8-8, the symbol determination table is a table referred to for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol based on the random number for symbol determination according to the big hit type, small hit type, time saving type, etc. is.

As shown in FIG. 8-7(A), when the "6R time-saving jackpot A" is achieved, the symbol "3" is determined with a probability of 100%. As shown in FIG. 8-7(B), when the "6R time-saving jackpot B" is achieved, the symbol "5" is determined with a probability of 100%. As shown in FIG. 8-7(C), in the case of a "10R time-saving jackpot", the symbol "7" is determined with a probability of 100%. As shown in FIG. 8-7(D), in the case of a "minor win A", the symbol "1" is determined with a probability of 100%. As shown in FIG. 8-7(E), when a "minor win B" is obtained, the symbol "9" is determined with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 8-8 (F), in the case of "time saving failure A", the pattern "6" is determined with a probability of 50%, and the pattern "8" is determined with a probability of 50%. As shown in FIG. 8-8(G), in the case of "time saving failure B", the symbol "4" is determined with a probability of 100%. As shown in FIG. 8-8(H), in the case of "time saving failure C", the symbol "9" is determined with a probability of 100%. As shown in FIG. 8-8(I), if it is lost (no time reduction), the symbol "-" is determined with a probability of 100%.

It should be noted that the specific example of the special symbol stop symbol is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, in this example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each composed of one 7-segment LED, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is represented by a one-digit number. However, it may be configured with two 7-segment LEDs so that the stop symbol of the special symbol is represented by a two-digit number. In this case, for example, "6R time saving big hit A", "6R time saving big hit B", "10R time saving big hit", "small hit A", "small hit B", "time saving out B", "time saving out C", " Even in the case of "loss (no time reduction)", it may be configured to be able to determine a plurality of types of special symbols to be stopped.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, a case is shown in which the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined using the symbol determination random number. For example, the type determination random number may also be used to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the random number for type determination is used in combination, for example, when the "6R short time jackpot A" is determined as the jackpot type, the value of the random number for type determination is 0 to 125 (Fig. 8- 5 (A)), 0 to 125 may be assigned as the symbol determination values in FIG. Further, for example, when the time saving type is determined to be "time saving A", the value of the random number for type determination is 0 to 59 (see FIG. 8-6), FIG. 8-8 ( In F), a symbol determination table for time-saving deviation A may be constructed by allocating 0 to 29 to symbol "6" and allocating 30 to 59 to symbol "8" as a symbol determination value.

(Release pattern of small winning game)
Next, the release pattern of the small winning game will be described. FIG. 8-9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small winning game. As shown in FIG. 8-9, after 8 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game at timing S1 (timing S2), the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to be open, and then 8 seconds have passed. The open state of the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 continues until (see FIG. 8-9(C)).

In the case of a small win (small win A, small win B), the time before opening the special winning hole (fanfare time) from the start of the small winning game until the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to the open state. Eight seconds are set, and the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to open state, and at the same time, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning opening) is controlled to open state. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-9(A), during the period in which the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to be open, the special winning opening is opened four times for 0.016 seconds. Therefore, in the small wins (small win A, small win B), the opening of the special winning opening for 0.016 seconds is performed four times during the V winning period.

In this example, the opening time of each special winning hole in the small wins (small win A, small win B) is extremely short at 0.016 seconds. is formed with a plurality of regulating pieces, and about 2 to 3 game balls flow down while meandering on the bottom member 120IW17a of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, so even if the opening time is short, the bottom member 120IW17a is controlled to the open state, the game ball on the bottom member 120IW17a can drop into the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to win a prize.

When a game ball enters the special winning hole and wins a V prize, after the last opening of the special winning hole is finished, a predetermined period of closing time (interval time) and small winning end time (ending time) elapse, and then the big win is won. The game state is shifted to the game state, and as shown in FIG. 8-9(B), control is performed to open the special variable winning ball device 7 from the second round to the sixth round or the tenth round.

In addition, in this example, when the last opening of the special winning opening is completed in the small winning game, the small winning game is ended based on the passage of the closing time (interval time) and the small winning end time (ending time). Although a case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning opening), detection switches capable of detecting game balls are provided at two locations, the upstream side and the downstream side, and after the last closing time (interval time) has passed, the upstream After waiting until the detection number of the detection switch on the side and the detection switch on the downstream side match (all the game balls that have entered the special prize winning port are discharged), it shifts to the small winning end time (ending time), and the small winning It may be configured to end the small winning game when the end time (ending time) elapses.

In addition, in this example, in both cases of the small win A and the small win B, there is shown a case where it is possible to win a V prize during the small win game. It may be configured to provide a winning type as well.

(Variation pattern table)
FIGS. 8-10 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 120IW. Among them, FIGS. 8-10 (A) and (B) show specific examples of the variation pattern table for the first special symbol. Also, FIGS. 8-10 (C) and (D) show specific examples of the variation pattern table for the second special symbol. In addition, FIGS. 8-10 (E) and (F) show a specific example of the variation pattern table (for non-time saving state) for time saving loss. Further, FIG. 8-10 (G) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for reducing the time for relief.

First, using FIGS. 8-10 (A) and (B), the variation pattern of the first special symbol will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), in this example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, if the deviation occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern PT1-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PT1-2 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PT1-3 (normal reach), or fluctuation pattern PT1-4 (super reach). In addition, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the case of a big hit in the normal state, the variation pattern is either the variation pattern PT1-5 (normal reach) or the variation pattern PT1-6 (super reach). is determined by Also, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, if a small hit occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern is either the variation pattern PT1-7 (normal reach) or the variation pattern PT1-8 (super reach). determined by

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), in this example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, if the deviation occurs during the time saving state, the variable pattern PT2-1 (high speed outlier variation). Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if the big hit occurs during the time saving state, the variation pattern PT2-2 (high-speed big hit variation) is determined as the variation pattern. In addition, when executing the variation display of the first special symbol, if the small hit occurs during the time saving state, the variation pattern PT2-3 (high-speed small hit variation) is determined as the variation pattern.

Next, using FIGS. 8-10 (C) and (D), the variation pattern of the second special symbol will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), in this example, when executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if the deviation occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern PT4-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PT4-2 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PT4-3 (normal reach), or fluctuation pattern PT4-4 (super reach). In addition, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if the big hit occurs in the normal state, the variation pattern is either the variation pattern PT4-5 (normal reach) or the variation pattern PT4-6 (super reach). is determined by In addition, when executing the variation display of the second special symbol, when the small hit occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern is either the variation pattern PT4-7 (normal reach) or the variation pattern PT4-8 (super reach). determined by

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is lost during the time saving state (including both the first time saving state and the second time saving state) In the case, as a variation pattern, any of the variation pattern PT5-1 (shortening variation), variation pattern PT5-2 (super shortening variation), variation pattern PT5-3 (normal reach), variation pattern PT5-4 (super reach) is determined by Also, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if the big hit occurs during the time saving state (including both the first time saving state and the second time saving state), the change pattern PT5-5 ( normal reach) or variation pattern PT5-6 (super reach). In addition, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of a small hit during the time saving state (including both the first time saving state and the second time saving state), the variation pattern PT5-7 is used as the variation pattern. (Normal Reach) or fluctuation pattern PT5-8 (Super Reach).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 8-10 (E) and (F), the variation pattern of time saving deviation (for non-time saving state) will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), in this example, in the case of time saving A to C (symbols "2", "4", "6") in the non-time saving state, as a fluctuation pattern, fluctuation Either pattern PT6-1 (normal variation) or variation pattern PT6-2 (time-saving fan effect) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (F), in this example, in the case of time saving A (symbol "8") in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation pattern PT7-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation Pattern PT7-2 (time-saving fanning effect), variation pattern PT7-3 (time-saving revival effect) is determined.

Incidentally, in this example, in the case of time saving deviation A to C in the time saving state, it is determined to be the same variation pattern as deviation (no time saving).

Next, with reference to FIG. 8-10 (G), the variation pattern of the relief time reduction will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-10 (G), in this example, when the relief time is shortened, the variation pattern PT8-1 (relief time reduction rush effect) is determined as the variation pattern in the case of a small hit or a loss. be.

Further, in this example, in the normal symbol process processing (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (normal symbol hit), and based on the determination result, the normal symbol is displayed. Control is performed to execute variable display, but in this example, if it is in the normal state, it is decided to hit the normal pattern with a probability of 10%, and if it is in the time saving state, it is determined to be 90%. It is decided to hit the normal figure with probability. In addition, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) to open state based on the determination of the winning of the normal symbol in the normal symbol process (step S26).

(Production control command)
8-11 and 8-12 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the example shown in FIGS. 8-11 and 8-12, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command that designates the variation pattern of the decorative symbols variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols. (fluctuation pattern command). It should be noted that the effect control command specifying the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives one of the commands 80XX (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decoration pattern.

Command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 specification command) (off specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is non-time saving loss. The command 9002 (H) is a production control command (display result 2 designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a time saving loss A (symbol "8") command)). The command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 3 designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a time saving loss A (symbol "6") command)). The command 9004 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a time saving loss B (symbol "4") command)). The command 9005 (H) is a production control command (display result 5 designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a time saving loss C (symbol "2") command)).

The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (6R short time jackpot A designation command) that designates the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command as 6R short time jackpot A. is. Command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (6R short time big hit B designation command) that designates the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command as 6R time short big hit B). is. The command 9008 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (10R short-time big hit designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 10R short-time big hit. .

Command 9009 (H) is an effect control command (display result 9 designation command (small hit A designation command)) that designates the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command as a small hit A. . The command 900A (H) is an effect control command (display result 10 specification command (small win B specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a small win B. .

Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A specification command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

The command A100 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and specifying that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. The command A102 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol determination C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds. be.

Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of a big hit game. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) that designates the end of the jackpot game.

The command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (large winning opening open display command) that designates display during the round during the big win game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (post-opening big winning opening display command) that designates a post-round display (display of an interval between rounds) during a big win game.

Command B300 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) that designates the start of a small hit game. Command B301 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) that designates the end of the small hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening designation command) that designates that a game ball has entered a large winning opening. Command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening designation command) that designates that a game ball has won a special winning opening. Command B402 (H) is an effect control command (V winning opening designation command) that designates that a game ball has won a V winning opening in the special winning opening.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that designates that the first reserved memory number is increased by one. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that designates that the second reserved memory number is increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that designates that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that designates that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

Command E000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that designates that the game state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state A designation command) that designates that the game state is controlled to the time saving state at the end of the jackpot game. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state B designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time saving state when time saving is lost. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state C designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time saving state during relief time saving.

The command E100 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification start designation command) that designates the start of the right-handed notification. The command E101 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification end designation command) that designates the end of the right-handed notification.

Command E2XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) that designates the setting value that has been set. Note that the set value set in "XX" is set. For example, the command E201(H) is transmitted when the setting value is set to "1", and the command E206(H) is transmitted when the setting value is set to "6".

The effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 8-11 and FIG. Incidentally, the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 8-11 and 8-12 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed production control command related to the jackpot game and a production control command indicating a game state (for example, a production control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 .

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 8-13 is a flow chart showing the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 120IW. In this example, the processes of steps S1-S2, the processes of steps S3-S9, and the processes of steps S10-S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this example, when the initial setting is performed in step S2, the CPU 103 performs setting change/confirmation processing (step 120IWS11). In the setting change/confirmation process, it is possible to check the current set value and change the set value. Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a set value command corresponding to the currently set set value to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS12).

In addition, when the effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "900" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 120IWS13). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the game machine is powered on, "900" is set to the relief time reduction number counter. That is, in this example, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the game machine, even if the variation display is executed 900 times, if neither the big hit nor the time-saving deviation occurs, the relief time-saving state is established. will be controlled by In addition, in this example, it is possible to specify the initial value to be set to the relief time reduction number counter based on the effect control command instructing the initialization transmitted in step S9.

In this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the game machine is powered on, the relief time reduction counter is set to "900" and initialized. Instead, the configuration may be such that the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter is not performed when the RAM clear processing is executed. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the relief time reduction number counter of the previous day, so that the investment amount until the relief time reduction can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter is not performed, and the RAM When an abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter may be performed.

(Special pattern process processing)
FIG. 8-14 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol process processing in the characterizing section 120IW. In this example, the starting winning determination process (step 120IWS101) is generally the same as the starting winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. Also, the special symbol normal process (step 120IWS110) to special symbol stop process (step 120IWS113) are generally the same as the special symbol normal process (step S110) to special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG. However, in this example, when the small winning pattern is derived and displayed, the process proceeds to the small winning opening preprocessing (step 120IWS114). Also, when a big hit symbol is derived and displayed (when a so-called direct hit is made), the process proceeds to the big win opening pre-processing (step 120IWS117).

Small hit opening preprocessing (step 120IWS114): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The game control microcomputer 100 executes a process for controlling the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to be in an open state, and changes the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) to the small winning open process (step 120IWS 115) (5 in this example).

Minor hit open process (step 120IWS115): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. When the opening time has passed while the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is open, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to the closed state, the closing time has passed while the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is closed, and it is still open. When the number of times remains, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to open. In addition, when the opening timing of the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 comes, the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to be opened, and when the closing timing of the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 comes, the V winning opening opening/closing plate is controlled. 120IW20 is controlled to the closed state. Also, it is confirmed whether or not the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is turned on, and when the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is turned on, the V winning opening flag is set. When the opening of all the special variable winning ball devices 120IW17 is finished and the closing time (interval time) has passed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is changed to a value ( In this example, update to 6).

Small hit closing post-processing (step 120IWS116): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. When the V prize flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 120IWS117). When the V winning flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 120IWS110).

The jackpot opening preprocessing (step 120IWS117) to jackpot end processing (step 120IWS120) are generally the same as the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) to jackpot end processing (step S117) shown in FIG.

In this example, after the big win/minor win pattern is derived and displayed after the big win is determined, or after the V winning occurs during the small win game and the small win game ends, the game is immediately shifted to the big win game. is shown, but is not limited to such an aspect. For example, instead of immediately transitioning to the big win game, it is configured to shift to the big win game on the condition that the game ball passes through an operating gate (which may also be used as the passage gate 41) provided in the game area. good too.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIGS. 8-15 and 8-16 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step 120IWS110) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending memory number (step 120IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the combined reserved storage number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is confirmed. If the combined reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 120IWS52). Specifically, it confirms whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). is set with data indicating "second" (step 120IWS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS54).

In this characterizing section 120IW, by executing the processing of steps 120IWS52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to take precedence over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are executed in the order in which the game ball wins the first start winning hole and the second start winning hole It may be configured as

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 120IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random random A numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 . In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 120IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and each storage area in the first reserved storage number buffer shift the contents of Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and the contents of each save area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102. , is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n−1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 120IWS57). Note that the CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 .

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a set value command capable of specifying the currently set set value to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS58). In this example, a case is shown in which the set value command is transmitted at the start of fluctuation each time the variable display is executed. may be configured.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for winning determination from the random number buffer area (step 120IWS61), and executes the big winning determination module (step 120IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the hit determination random number extracted in the starting prize determination process (step 120IWS101) and pre-stored in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer to determine the jackpot. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value with a hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit. The CPU 103 determines that the special symbol will be a big hit when the value of the hit determination random number matches one of the big hit determination values. If it is determined to be a big hit (Y of step 120IWS63), the process proceeds to step 120IWS64. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be a big hit (N of step 120IWS63), the process proceeds to step 120IWS66. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big win game state, and determining whether or not the stop symbols on the special symbol display device are to be the big win symbols. But also.

At step 120 IWS64, the CPU 103 sets a big win flag indicating a big win. Also, the CPU 103 selects the big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS65). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8-5 (A) is selected, and the value of the special symbol pointer is If "second" is indicated, the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-5(B) is selected. Then, using the selected jackpot type determination table, the CPU 103 uses the type (6R short-time jackpot A, 6R short-time jackpot B, 10R short-time jackpot) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number for type determination stored in the random number buffer area jackpot) is determined as the type of jackpot (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for type determination extracted in the starting prize determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in a jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 . Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS92.

On the other hand, in step 120IWS66, the CPU 103 selects the small hit determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer. In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the small hit determination table for the first special symbol is selected, and when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second". , the small hit determination table for the second special symbol is selected. Then, the CPU 103 uses the selected small win determination table to perform a lottery process based on the hit determination random number, and determines whether or not to make a small win (step 120IWS67). In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) and (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of being determined as a small hit is about 1/400. It is determined as a hit, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is determined as a small win with a probability of about 1/7.

When it is determined to be a small win (Y of step 120IWS68), the CPU 103 sets a small win flag indicating a small win (step 120IWS69). Then, the CPU 103 selects the small hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS70). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", select the small hit type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", select the small hit type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-5 (D). After selecting the small hit type determination table, the process proceeds to step 120IWS71.

If it is not determined to be a small hit (N of step 120IWS68), the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS71.

At step 120IWS71, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a small hit number counter for counting the number of times the small win is controlled during the time saving state is 0 (step 120IWS71). When the value of the small hit number counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS76.

When the value of the small hit frequency counter is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step 120IWS72). If the small hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS76.

When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small hit number counter (step 120IWS73).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the number-of-small-hit counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS74). When the value of the small hit number counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS76.

When the value of the small hit number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of fluctuation (step 120IWS75). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS76.

At step 120IWS76, the CPU 103 checks whether any of the time saving flags is set (step 120IWS76). If none of the time saving flags is set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS83. If any of the time saving flags is set, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the total time saving number counter (step 120IWS77).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the count value of the combined time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS74), and when it is 0, proceeds to step 120IWS82. When the count value of the combined time saving number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (step 120IWS79). It should be noted that whether or not it is a case of starting the variable display of the second special symbol can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. If the variable display of the second special symbol is not to be started, the process proceeds to step 120IWS83.

When starting the variable display of the second special symbol, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second time saving number counter (step 120IWS80), and checks whether the count value of the second time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0. Confirm (step 120IWS81). When the count value of the second time saving number counter after subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS83, and when the count value of the second time saving number counter after subtraction is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS82.

At step 120IWS82, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of fluctuation (step 120IWS82).

In this example, steps 120IWS76 to S82 are executed before the counting process of the number of fluctuations until the relief time saving after step 120IWS83 to perform the subtraction process of the time saving number counter, but such a processing mode not limited to For example, after executing the counting process of the number of fluctuations up to the remedy time saving after step 120IWS83, the time saving number counter subtraction process may be executed. In this case, for example, if it is a variable display that will save time, if the subtraction process is performed after setting "900" in the time saving counter (see step 120IWS149), the value of the time saving counter will be 1 extra. Since it is subtracted, it may be configured to add 1 again to the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction process in the variable display for saving time. Moreover, it may be configured such that "901", which is one more, is set in the time saving number counter in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 120IWS83). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS87. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the relief time reduction number counter value (step 120IWS84). In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 120IWS83, regardless of whether the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value of the relief time saving number counter is uniformly updated. Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 120IWS83, regardless of whether the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. , the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS85). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS87. If the value of the relief time-saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time-saving determination flag indicating control to the time-saving state at the end of fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time-saving (step 120IWS86). . Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS87.

In addition, in this example, since the processing of steps 120IWS83 to S86 is executed not only in the case of the loss fluctuation but also in the case of the small hit fluctuation, the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0 and the relief time reduction occurs. In some cases, the variation display is a small hit variation. On the other hand, in this example, when the big hit variation occurs, the processing of steps 120IWS83 to S86 is not executed, so if the variation display that should cause the relief time reduction is the big hit variation, the relief time reduction control is not performed. Normal jackpot control is performed.

At step 120IWS87, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step 120IWS87). If the small hit flag is set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS91. In this case, the CPU 103 uses the small hit type determination table selected in step 120IWS 70, the type corresponding to the value of the random number for type determination stored in the random number buffer area (small hit A or small hit B) is determined as the type of small hit (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the starting winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in advance in the second reserve storage buffer, and determines the small hit type. Moreover, CPU103 sets the data which show the classification of the determined small hit to the small hit classification buffer in RAM102. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS92.

If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 uses a time saving loss determination table for determining whether or not the time saving loss is determined, performs lottery processing based on the random number for time saving loss determination, and determines whether the time saving loss is made. No (step 120IWS88). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time saving loss determination table for the first special symbol is selected, and the time saving loss is determined with a probability of about 1/200. (See FIG. 8-4(A)). Also, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", select the time-saving loss determination table for the second special symbol, and decide to make the time-saving loss with a probability of about 1/400 ( See Figure 8-4 (B)). If it is not determined to be time saving (if it is determined to be no time saving), the process proceeds to step 120IWS93.

When it is determined that the time saving is lost (Y of step 120IWS89), the CPU 103 selects the time saving type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS90). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", select the time reduction type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the value of the special symbol pointer When "second" is indicated, the time reduction type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-6 (B) is selected. Then, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the value of the random number for type determination stored in the random number buffer area (time saving error A, time saving error B, time saving error C) as the time saving error type (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first and second reserve storage buffers, and determines the time saving type. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS92.

After completing the process of step 120IWS91, the CPU 103 selects the symbol determination table (see FIGS. 8-7(A) to 8-8(H)) according to the result of the type determination performed at step 120IWS91 (step 120IWS92). ). Incidentally, in the case of no time saving, the symbol determination table shown in FIG.

At step 120IWS93, the CPU 103 determines a symbol corresponding to the value of the random number for symbol determination stored in the random number buffer area (step 120IWS93).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 120IWS94).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 8-17 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern setting process (step 120IWS111) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) confirms whether or not the story has been set (step 120IWS1701). In addition, the story is the variation pattern and variation time according to the number of times the pattern has changed. Check if there are any.

If the story has already been set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag (see step 120IWS86) is set (step 120IWS1702). When the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the relief time reduction variation pattern table (see FIG. 8-10 (G)) and proceeds to step 120IWS1710.

If the story has not been set, or if the saving time determination flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving is lost (step 120IWS1704). If it is not out of time saving, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table (see FIGS. 8-10 (A) to (D)) corresponding to the special symbol, game state and display result (step 120IWS1709), and proceeds to step 120IWS1710. . Therefore, in the present example, even if the variable display is a relief time-saving, if the story is not set, the normal variation pattern is uniformly determined instead of the relief time-saving variation pattern.

If the time saving is out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag (step 120IWS150, step 120IWS160, step 120IWS537) is set (step 120IWS1705). When the time saving flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table (see FIGS. 8-10 (A) to (D)) corresponding to the special symbol, game state and display result (step 120 IWS 1709), and step 120IWS1710. Therefore, in this example, even if it is determined that the time saving is off, when it is in the time saving state, the same variation pattern as the time saving (no time saving) is determined.

When the time saving flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the symbol "8" is determined in the symbol determination (see step 120IWS93) (step 120IWS1706). If the symbol "8" is not used, the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern table (see FIG. 8-10(E)) for time saving (other than symbol "8") (step 120IWS1707), and proceeds to step 120IWS1710. When the symbol "8" is selected, the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern table (see FIG. 8-10(F)) for time saving (symbol "8") (step 120IWS1708), and proceeds to step 120IWS1710.

In step 120IWS1710, the CPU 103 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 120IWS1703, S1707, S1708, and S1709 and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the reserved storage buffer indicated by the special symbol pointer. , to determine which of the variation patterns shown in FIGS. In this example, by determining the variation pattern, the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined. After determining the variation time, the variation pattern for which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1711).

Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined in step 120IWS1710, the CPU 103 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time to the variation time timer to measure the variation time. (step 120IWS1712), and start the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 120IWS1713). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 120IWS1714).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 8-18 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation processing (step 120IWS112) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not to make a big hit, if not yet transmitted, determines whether or not to make a small hit. Based on the result, the decision result of whether or not to save time, the decision result of the big hit type, the decision result of the small hit type, and the decision result of the time saving type, any display result designation command (display result 1 designation command ~ Display result 10 designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step 120IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 120IWS1123), confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag (see step 120IWS86) is set (step 120IWS1124). ). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS1125). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 120IWS1126, in this example, when the relief time reduction occurs, the lighting of the right-handed LED 120IW10 is started at the start of the symbol fixing period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a symbol fixation period timer for measuring the fixation display period of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (step 120IWS1127). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1128). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

On the other hand, if the relief time saving flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be time saving (step 120IWS1129). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined to be time-saving can be determined by confirming the stop design of the special design stored in the stop design storage area at step 120IWS93, for example.

If it is determined to be time-saving, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS1130). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1131).

By executing the process of step 120IWS1131, in this example, when the time-saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, the lighting of the right-handed LED 120IW10 is started at the start of the symbol fixing period.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, or the time saving flag C is set (step 120IWS1132). If none of the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, and the time saving flag C are set (that is, if it is in a normal state), the CPU 103 determines the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "20 seconds" is set in the pattern fixing period timer for counting (step 120IWS1133). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation A designation command or a second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1134). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

If the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, or the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state), the CPU 103 measures the fixed display period of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "10 seconds" is set in the symbol fixing period timer for the game (step 120IWS1135). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1136). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In that case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

If it is not determined to be time saving (N of step 120 IWS 1129), the CPU 103 sets the symbol determination period timer for measuring the determination display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol to "0". 5 seconds” is set (step 120 IWS 1137). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol determination C designation command or the second symbol determination C designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1138). . In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) (step 120IWS1139).

(Special symbol stop processing)
8-19 to 8-21 are flowcharts showing special symbol stop processing (step S113) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol fixing period timer (step 120IWS131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS132). .

If the value of the symbol fixed period timer after the subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended yet), the special symbol stop processing is terminated. do. If the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag. is confirmed (step 120IWS133). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 103, if set, the time saving flag (time saving flag A, time saving flag B, time saving flag C), for counting the number of times of execution of the variable display during the time saving state The time saving number counter is reset (step 120IWS134).

In addition, as the time saving number counter, a special 2 time saving number counter corresponding to the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol and a total time saving number counter corresponding to the number of fluctuations of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. ing. When simply referred to as "time saving number counter", it indicates both the special 2 time saving number counter and the total time saving number counter.

Next, the CPU 103 sets "900" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 120IWS135). Therefore, in this example, "900" is set to the relief time-saving number counter with the big hit as a trigger, and even if the fluctuation display is executed 900 times after the big win game is over, neither the next big win nor the time-saving error occurs. , it will be a relief time reduction and will be controlled in a time reduction state.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 120 IWS 135, when a big hit is made, the initial setting is shown by setting "900" to the relief time reduction number counter at the start of the fanfare period of the big win. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "900" may be set in the relief time reduction number counter during the round of the jackpot game, and "900" may be set in the relief time reduction number counter at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot game to be initialized. can be configured to

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS136). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a pre-opening big winning hole timer for measuring the time before opening the big winning hole (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 120IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S144) (step 120IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N of step 120IWS133), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving end flag is set (step 120IWS141). If the time saving end flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS148. If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 120IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (one of the time saving flags A to C) and terminates the time saving state (step 120IWS143).

Next, if the value is set, the CPU 103 resets the small hit number counter, the total time reduction number counter, and the special 2 hour reduction number counter (step 120IWS 144), and performs control to end lighting of the right-handed LED 120IW 10 (step 120IWS 145 ). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS146). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS147). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS148.

It should be noted that, in the present example, by executing the processing of steps 120IWS141 ~ S147, it shows a case where the right-handed notification is terminated with the transition to the normal state at the end of the symbol determination period in the time-saving final variation. It is not limited to any form. For example, it may be configured to shift to the normal state at the start of the fluctuation or at the start of the symbol fixed period in the time saving final fluctuation and end the right hitting notification.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 120IWS148). When the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 sets "900" to the special 2 time reduction number counter, "900" to the total time reduction number counter, "900" to the relief time reduction number counter, and the small hit number counter. are set to "1" (step 120, IWS 149). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 120IWS150). Moreover, CPU103 performs control which transmits the time saving state C designation|designated command to CPU120 for production|presentation control (step 120IWS151). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS164.

In addition, in this example, even if it is a small hit variation, at the timing of the end of the symbol fixing period, if the relief time reduction determination flag is set in 120IWS 148, step 120IWS 150 is executed, and in the subsequent small win game state, the time reduction state controlled by C.

If the relief time saving flag is not set, it is checked whether or not it is decided to lose the time saving (step 120 IWS 152). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined to be time-saving can be determined by confirming the stop design of the special design stored in the stop design storage area at step 120IWS93, for example.

If it is determined to be out of time saving, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not any of the time saving flags (time saving flags A to C) is set (step 120IWS153). If none of the time saving flags are set (that is, if it is in a normal state), the CPU 103, if the time saving is out of A (Y of step 120IWS154), the special 2 time saving number counter "100", the total time saving number "900" is set in each counter (step 120IWS155). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS160.

If it is not a time saving error A, the CPU 103, if it is a time saving error B (Y of step 120IWS156), sets "50" to the special 2 time saving number counter and "900" to the total time saving number counter (step 120IWS157). . Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS160.

If it is not the time saving deviation B (step 120IWS156 N), that is, if the time saving deviation is C, the CPU 103 sets "30" to the special 2 time saving number counter and "900" to the total time saving number counter (step 120 IWS 158). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS160.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B and controls the time saving state (step 120IWS160).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "900" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 120IWS161). Therefore, in this example, "900" is set to the relief time-saving number counter with the time-saving loss as a trigger, and even if the fluctuation display is executed 900 times after the time-saving loss, neither the next big hit nor the time-saving loss occurs. , it will be a relief time reduction and will be controlled in a time reduction state.

Further, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the small hit count counter (step 120IWS162), and performs control to transmit a time saving state B designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS163). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS164.

Moreover, if any of the time saving flags are set (Y of step 120IWS153), it will transfer to step 120IWS164. Therefore, in this example, if it is in the time saving state even if the time saving is off, a new time saving state based on the time saving is not set, and the current time saving state is continued (Therefore, The value of the special 2 hour-saving number counter and total hour-saving number counter will continue to be the current value).

At step 120IWS164, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step 120IWS164). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right hitting LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS165). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS167). Next, the CPU 103 sets a special winning opening pre-open timer (step 120IWS168). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S118) (step 120IWS169).

When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag if it is set (step 120IWS170).

At step 120IWS171, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 120IWS171).

(Small hit opening pretreatment)
FIG. 8-22 is a flow chart showing the small hit opening pre-processing (step 120IWS114) in the special symbol process processing. In the small hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the special winning opening pre-opening time timer has timed out (step 120IWS401). If the timer for the time before opening the special winning opening has not timed out (that is, if the fanfare time has not elapsed), the process is terminated as it is.

If the special winning opening pre-open timer has timed out (that is, if the fanfare time has elapsed), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to the open state. (Step 120 IWS 402). In addition, the CPU 10103 sets a value corresponding to the first opening time (0.016 seconds in this example) of the special winning opening to the opening time timer (step 120IWS403).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning open processing (step 120IWS115) (step 120IWS404).

(Small hit open process)
FIG. 8-23 is a flow chart showing small hit opening process (step 120IWS115) in the special symbol process process. In the process during small hit opening, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the special winning opening switch 120IW24 is turned on (step 120IWS421). If the special winning opening switch 120IW24 is in the ON state (that is, if the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening is detected), the CPU 103 sends a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Transmission control is performed (step 120IWS422).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is turned on (step 120IWS423). If the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is in the ON state (that is, if the winning of the game ball into the V winning opening is detected), the CPU 103 sends a V winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Transmission control is performed (step 120IWS424). Also, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that the player has won a V prize (step 120IWS425).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is time to open the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 (step 120IWS426). Whether or not the opening timing of the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 has come is determined, for example, by setting a timer when starting a small winning game, and setting a predetermined time after starting the small winning game (in this example, , 8 seconds). When it is time to open the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20, the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW84 to open the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 (step 120IWS427).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is time to close the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 (step 120IWS428). Whether or not it is time to close the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 can be determined, for example, by setting a timer when the opening of the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is started, and starting the opening of the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the time from the start has reached a predetermined time (eight seconds in this example). If it is time to close the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 120IW84 and controls the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 to the closed state (step 120IWS429).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening is 0 (step 120IWS430). If the value of the opening time timer is not 0 (that is, if the special winning opening is being opened), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time timer (step 120IWS431), and the value of the opening time timer after subtraction is It is checked whether it is 0 (step 120IWS432). If the value of the open time timer is 0, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 120IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to the closed state (step 120IWS433). In addition, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined closing time (a value corresponding to the interval time) to the closing time timer for measuring the closing time after the opening of the special prize winning opening (step 120IWS434). Then, the processing ends.

If the opening time timer is 0 at step 120IWS430 (that is, if the special winning opening is closed), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the closing time timer (step 120IWS435), and the value of the closing time timer after the subtraction. is 0 (step 120IWS436). If the value of the closing time timer is 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not all the special winning openings have already been opened (step 120IWS437). In this example, if the special winning opening has already been opened four times, it is determined as Y in step 120IWS437, and the process proceeds to step 120IWS440.

If all of the special winning holes have not been opened (that is, if the second to fourth openings remain), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW83 to open the special variable winning ball device 120IW17. (step 120IWS438). Also, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the opening time (0.016 seconds in this example) to the closing time timer (step 120IWS439). Then, the process ends.

If all of the special winning openings have been opened (Y in step 120IWS437), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning closing post-processing (step 120IWS116) (step 120IWS440 ).

(Processing after closing the jackpot)
FIG. 8-24 is a flow chart showing the small winning closing post-processing (step 120IWS116) in the special symbol process processing. In the processing after closing the small win, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small win end display timer is set (step 120IWS451), and when the small win end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS453. When the small-hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 causes the small-hit end display timer to display corresponding to the time during which the small-hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small-hit end display time). A value corresponding to time is set (step 120IWS452), and the process ends.

At step 120IWS453, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small-hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small-hit end display time has elapsed (step 120IWS454). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the small hit end display time has passed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 120IWS455). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag and the time saving number counter (step 120IWS456). Also, the CPU 103 resets the V win flag (step 120IWS457). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS458). In addition, the CPU 103 sets a timer for the time before the opening of the big winning opening (step 120IWS459).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit pre-start process (step 120IWS117) (step 120IWS460).

When it is confirmed in the processing of step 120IWS456 that the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 103 resets the small hit flag (step 120IWS461). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a small hit end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS462). Then, if the CPU 103 is set, it resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 120IWS463), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 120IWS464). .

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 8-25 is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending process (step 120IWS121) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 120IWS531), and when the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS535. When the big-hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the big-hit flag or the small-hit flag (step 120IWS532), and controls transmission of the big-hit end designation command (step 120IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (jackpot end display time) during which the big win end display is being performed on the image display device 5 in the big win end display timer (step 120IWS534), and executes the process. finish.

At step 120IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 120IWS536). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has passed (Y of step 120IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A (step 120IWS537), and confirms whether or not the relief time saving flag is set (step 120IWS538). When the relief time reduction flag is set, when the variation display in which the relief time reduction occurred is a small winning variation, V winning occurs during the small winning game and the transferred big winning game is terminated. be. In this case, the CPU 103 resets the relief time saving flag (step 120IWS539), sets the special 2 time saving number counter to "1", sets the total time saving number counter to "99", and sets the small hit number counter to "1". (step 120 IWS 540). Next, the CPU 103 performs story setting processing (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

On the other hand, if the relief time saving flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not the jackpot occurred in the time saving state (step 120IWS541). Whether or not the jackpot occurred in the time-saving state is determined, for example, by whether the time-saving flag is set before the processing of step 120IWS134 or step S120IWS456 is executed at the start of the jackpot game and the time-saving flag is reset. It is checked whether or not, and if the time-saving flag is set, the big-hit time-saving flag indicating that it was in the time-saving state at the time of occurrence of the big win is set, and in step 120IWS541, whether or not the big-hit time-saving flag is set. can be determined by checking

In the case of a big hit occurring in the time saving state, the CPU 103 sets a special 2 time saving number counter to "7", sets a total time saving number counter to "99", and sets a small winning number counter to "1". (Step 120 IWS 540). Next, the CPU 103 performs story setting processing (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

In addition, if the jackpot is not generated in the time saving state (if the jackpot is generated in the normal state), it is confirmed whether or not the finished jackpot game state is based on the variation of the first special symbol (step 120IWS543). . Whether or not the big hit is based on the variation of the first special symbol can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer. If the finished jackpot game state is based on the variation of the first special symbol, the CPU 103 sets "1" to the special second time reduction counter, sets "99" to the total time reduction counter, and sets the number of small hits. A counter is set to "1" (step 120IWS544). Next, the CPU 103 performs story setting processing (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

If the finished jackpot game state is not based on the variation of the first special symbol (if it is based on the variation of the second special symbol), the CPU 103 sets "99" to the special 2 time reduction number counter, and adds up. "99" is set in the time saving number counter, and "1" is set in the small hit number counter (step 120IWS545). Next, the CPU 103 performs story setting processing (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by executing the above processing, if a big hit occurs during the normal state, the time saving state is set to the time saving number of times. It is controlled (see step 120IWS544), and when it becomes a big hit during the time-saving state, it is controlled to the time-saving state with seven times of time-saving times (see step 120IWS542). Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the time-saving state (in this example, time-saving number of times) is controlled.

In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a big hit occurs during the normal state, the time saving state is controlled to the time saving number of times 99 times (see step 120 IWS545), and a big hit occurs during the time saving state. When it becomes, it is controlled to the time-saving state of 7 time-saving times (refer to step 120IWS542). Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the time-saving state (in this example, time-saving number of times) is controlled.

Furthermore, in this example, if the variation display that caused the relief time reduction is a small winning variation, if the V winning occurs during the small winning game and the transferred big winning game is terminated, the time saving number of times is 1 The time saving state is controlled (see step 120 IWS 540). Therefore, when the variation display that caused the relief time reduction is the small winning variation, when the V winning occurs during the small winning game and the shifted big winning game is ended, the time saving of the one with the lower advantage It is controlled to a state (in this example, the number of times of time saving is as small as one time).

It should be noted that, for example, when the variation display that caused the relief time reduction is a small hit variation, when the V winning occurs during the small win game and the transferred big win game is ended, it is the second special symbol. If a V prize is won with a small hit variation based on the variation display of 1, it may be configured to be controlled to a time saving state of 99 times of time saving times (thus, a time saving state with a high degree of advantage).

(state change)
Next, the state transition in this characterizing portion 120IW will be described. FIG. 8-26 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in this characterizing portion 120IW. As shown in FIG. 8-26, in the normal state, when a big hit is achieved, control is made to the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) (see step 120IWS537). In addition, even if it is lost in the normal state, if the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via time saving loss) (see step 120 IWS 160). Furthermore, even if it is lost, if it becomes a relief time (after the RAM clearing process, after the big hit or time saving loss, the next big hit or time saving loss will not occur, and the number of fluctuations has reached 900 times. case) is controlled to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) (see step 120IWS150).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-26, in the time-saving state A, when it becomes a big hit, it is controlled again to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via the big hit) (see step 120IWS537). In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-26, in the time-saving state A, when it becomes a small hit, it is controlled to a small hit state (see step 120 IWS69), and when V is won in the small hit state, it goes through a big hit. Then, it is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via the jackpot) (see step 120IWS537). Also, in the time-saving state A, even if it is lost, if the time-saving design is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via time-saving loss) (see step 120 IWS 160). In addition, in the time saving state A, even if a small win does not occur, when the variation display of the second special symbol is completed once, seven times or 99 times without a big win occurring, the control is made to the normal state. (see step 120, IWS82, S143). Also, in the time-saving state A, when a small hit occurs once, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73-75).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-26, in the time-saving state B, in the case of a big hit, it is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via the big hit) (see step 120IWS537). Also, in the time-saving state B, when a small hit occurs, the game is controlled to a small hit state (see step 120IWS69). In addition, in the time saving state B, even if the small hit does not occur, when the fluctuation display of the second special pattern is completed 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, 200 times without the occurrence of the big win, the normal state is entered. controlled (step 120, see IWS82, S143). In addition, in the time saving state B, even if it is lost, if the time saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via time saving loss) (see step 120 IWS 160). Also, in the time-saving state B, when a small hit occurs once, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73-75).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26, in the time-saving state C, when it becomes a big hit, it is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via the big hit) (see step 120IWS537). In addition, in the time saving state C, when a small hit occurs, the game is controlled to a small hit state (see step 120IWS69). Further, in the time-saving state C, when 900 fluctuation displays are completed without occurrence of a big hit, the control is again made to the time-saving state C (see step 120, IWS 150). In addition, in the time saving state C, when the number of fluctuations reaches 900 times, it is controlled again to the time saving state C (see steps 120IWS149, 150). Also, in the time-saving state C, when a small hit occurs once, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73-75).

In addition, in the time-saving state A, when the small win is made but the V prize is not won, the time-saving state A is continued as it is after the small win game is finished. Further, in the time saving state B, when the small win is made but the V prize is not won, the time saving state B is continued as it is after the small win game is finished. Further, in the time saving state C, when the small win is made but the V prize is not won, the time saving state C is continued as it is after the small win game ends.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 8-27 and 8-28 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 120IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. The case where the two match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the command reception buffer stores the reception command, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 120IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 120IWS613). The reason for incrementing by 2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 120IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 120IWS615). Then, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step 120IWS616).

If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step 120IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 120IWS618 ).

The received effect control command is any of the design determination designation commands (first design determination A designation command, first design determination B designation command, first design determination C designation command, second design determination A designation command, second design determination B designation command, second design determination C designation command) (step 120IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 sets a determination command reception flag corresponding to the received design determination designation command (step 120IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first symbol decision B designation command is received, the first decision B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the first confirmation C command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol decision B designation command is received, the second decision B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the second confirmation C command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 120IWS621), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 120IWS622). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 120IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 120IWS624).

If the received effect control command is a large winning opening winning designation command (step 120IWS625), the effect control CPU 120 sets a large winning opening winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS626). If the received effect control command is a special winning hole winning designation command (step 120IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 sets a special winning hole winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS628). If the received effect control command is a V winning opening winning designation command (step 120IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets a V winning opening winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a normal state designation command (step 120IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode). (step 120IWS632).

If the received production control command is the time saving state A designation command (step 120IWS633), the production control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image (for example, the sunset A yellow background image corresponding to the mode) is controlled (step 120IWS634).

If the received production control command is the time saving state B designation command (step 120IWS635), the production control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image (for example, A green background image corresponding to the forest mode) is controlled (step 120IWS636).

If the received production control command is the time saving state C designation command (step 120IWS637), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the special production mode flag indicating that the production mode is set to the special production mode is set. (step 120IWS638). If the special effect mode flag is not set, the image display device 5 switches to a background image (for example, an orange background image corresponding to the mandarin field mode) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving). Control is performed (step 120IWS638). On the other hand, if the special effect mode flag is set, the image display device 5 performs control to switch to a background image corresponding to the special effect mode (for example, a red background image corresponding to the flame mode) (step 120IWS640). .

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 120IWS641), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to store the set value in the set value storage area (step 120IWS642).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 120IWS643), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed notification LED 120IW20 (step 120IWS644). In this example, the right-handed notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of the symbol determination period when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed or when the relief time is shortened (see steps 120IWS1126, S1131). , Lighting of the right hitting notification LED 120IW20 is started at the start of the symbol fixing period.

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification end designation command (step 120IWS645), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed notification LED 120IW20 (step 120IWS646), and executes the left-handed notification effect. start (step 120IWS647).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command, or executes a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 120 IWS 648 ). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS611.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-29 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 120IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result (stop symbol) is determined (step 120IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 120IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the decoration pattern is stopped) A display result determining means for determining the pattern) is realized. Incidentally, when a pseudo-run is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120, in step 120IWS802, sets a chance symbol (for example, like "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-run. , a combination of a jackpot pattern that does not become a reach and a pattern that is shifted by one pattern) is also determined. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 120IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not the hit is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the decorative symbols to be stopped based on only the variation pattern command. .

At step 120 IWS802, the effect control CPU 120, when the received display result designation command indicates a "big hit" or when the received display result designation command indicates a "minor hit", the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decoration patterns (big hit pattern, small hit pattern) in which 3 patterns are the same pattern as a stop pattern. In this example, a case is shown in which a combination of decoration patterns in which three patterns are the same pattern is determined for both the big win pattern and the small win pattern, but this is not the only option. For example, when the received display result specifying command indicates a "small hit", the effect control CPU 120 is configured to determine a combination of "135" decorative symbols as a small win symbol and a stop symbol. may

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decoration patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the ready-to-win effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined. In addition, even if it is lost, in the case of "time saving lost", a combination of decorative symbols of the lost symbols including special symbols (for example, star symbols) is determined. It should be noted that it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of missing symbols including different special symbols (for example, heart-shaped symbols and diamond-shaped symbols) according to the time-saving type.

The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for decorative patterns, a stop pattern (a combination of patterns in which the left, middle, and right are all the same pattern) that reminds us of a big win is called a big hit pattern. Also, a stop symbol that reminds us of a loss is called a lost symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read in step 120IWS801 is the variation pattern PT8-1 (see FIG. 8-10 (G)) that specifies the relief time-saving rush effect. (step 120IWS803). In the case of the variation pattern PT8-1, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value specified by the set value command (the set value stored in the set value storage area (see step 120IWS642). It is checked whether it is one of the settings "4" to "6" (step 120IWS804) If the set value is not one of the settings "4" to "6", the process proceeds to step 120IWS808.

If the set value is one of the settings "4" to "6", the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a relief setting effect depending on which of the set values "4" to "6". Determine the type (step 120IWS805). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is decided to execute the relief time setting effect (step 120IWS806). If it is determined not to execute the effect set at the time of relief, the process proceeds to step 120IWS808. When it is decided to execute the effect set at the time of relief, the effect control CPU 120 sets a special effect mode flag (step 120IWS807) and proceeds to step 120IWS808.

At step 120IWS808, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table including the setting suggesting effect at the time of relief when execution of the relief time-saving entry effect or the setting suggesting effect at the time of relief is determined (step 120IWS808). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS814.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read in step 120IWS801 is not the variation pattern PT8-1, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read in step 120IWS801. Check whether it is a variation pattern PT6-2 (see FIG. 8-10 (E)) that specifies a time-saving production or a variation pattern PT7-2 (see FIG. 8-10 (F)) that specifies a time-saving production (step 120IWS809). If it is the variation pattern PT6-2 or the variation pattern PT7-2, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table corresponding to the time-saving fan effect (step 120IWS810). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS814.

On the other hand, if the effect control CPU 120 is not the variation pattern PT6-2 or the variation pattern PT7-2, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read in step 120IWS801 is the variation pattern PT7- 3 (see FIG. 8-10(F)) (step 120IWS811). In the case of the variation pattern PT7-3, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the time saving revival effect (step 120IWS812). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS814. If it is not the variation pattern PT7-3, the effect control CPU 120 selects a normal process table corresponding to the variation pattern (step 120IWS813). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS814.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected at step 120IWS808, step 120IWS810, step 120IWS812 and step 120IWS813 (step 120IWS814).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (parts for effect) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. In addition, the process timer set value is set with a variable time in the mode of variation. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decoration pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Also, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80 . Also, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, in the process table used when performing the effect control for the variation pattern involving the ready-to-win effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed. Process data indicating to display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the simulated run and the sliding effect. may

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 120IWS815). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 120IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls such that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 120IWS816).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 120IWS817).

(Remedy Setting Suggestion Effect Decision Table)
FIG. 8-30 is an explanatory diagram of the remedy setting suggestion effect determination table used in step 120IWS 805 of FIG. 8-29 when the variation pattern is the variation pattern PT8-1 (see FIG. 8-10 (G)). be.

As shown in FIG. 8-30, in the setting suggestion effect determination table at the time of relief, when the set value is set to "4", the selection ratio of no setting suggestion effect at the time of relief is 50%, and the selection of the setting suggestion effect A at the time of relief is selected. Determination values are assigned such that the ratio is 40%, the selection ratio of setting suggestive performance B for relief is 5%, and the selection ratio of setting suggestive performance C for rescue is 5%.

In addition, when the set value is set to "5", the selection ratio of no setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue is 30%, the selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect A at the time of rescue is 10%, and the selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect B at the time of rescue is 50%. %, and the judgment value is assigned so that the selection ratio of the rescue setting suggestion effect C is 10%.

In addition, when the set value is set to "6", the selection ratio of no setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue is 10%, the selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect A at the time of rescue is 15%, and the selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect B at the time of rescue is 15%. %, and the judgment value is assigned so that the selection ratio of the rescue setting suggestion effect C is 60%.

Therefore, in this example, if the setting suggestion effect A for relief is executed, it is suggested that the set value is likely to be set to "4", and if the setting suggestion effect B for rescue is executed, the set value "4" is suggested. It is suggested that there is a high possibility that the set value is set to "5", and if the relief setting suggestion effect C is executed, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the set value is set to "6".

The setting suggestion effect at the time of relief is a setting value suggestion effect that is executed when the image display device 5 executes the relief time-saving entry effect.

Incidentally, in this example, since the setting suggestion effect at the time of relief is configured to be executable when the setting value is set to "4" to "6", the setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue is set to a relatively high setting. It is a setting suggestive production that suggests that it is being done.

(Effect processing during variable display)
FIGS. 8-31 and 8-32 are flowcharts showing the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 120IWS841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 120IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 120IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next process timer set value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 120IWS844). Also, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data which are set next (step 120IWS845).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received (step 120IWS846). Specifically, it is checked whether or not the first fixed A command reception flag or the second fixed A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation A specified command or the second symbol confirmation A specified command is received, the effect control CPU 120 is a mode transition effect (effect to inform that it shifts to a time saving state (time saving mode)) and right hitting A process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 120IWS847). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS848). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 120IWS849). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to the fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 120IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS867.

If neither the first design determination A designation command nor the second design determination A designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first design determination B designation command or the second design determination B designation command. (step 120IWS851). Specifically, it is checked whether or not the first fixed B command reception flag or the second fixed B command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol determination B designation command or the second symbol determination B designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table corresponding to the continuous effect (effect for notifying that the time saving state continues). (Step 120 IWS 852). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS853). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 120IWS854). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to the fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 120IWS855). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS867.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command. (step 120IWS861). Specifically, it is checked whether the first fixed C command reception flag or the second fixed C command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol determination C designation command or the second symbol determination C designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 120IWS863.

If neither the first symbol determination C designation command nor the second symbol determination C designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (step 120IWS862). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received (Y of step 120IWS861), or when the variable time timer times out (Y of step 120IWS862), the effect control CPU 120 normally (step 120IWS863). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS864). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 120IWS865). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 second to the fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 120IWS866). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS867.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the pattern confirmation designation command is received, also when the variable time timer times out (see step 120IWS862), the processing after step 120IWS862 is shifted to the pattern confirmation period. Normally, however, if the symbol confirmation designation command is not missed, the determination at step 120IWS862 is Y, and the process from step 120IWS862 onwards is not performed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 120IWS867).

(Waiting process per special figure)
FIGS. 8-33 and 8-34 are flowcharts showing the special figure per waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the fixed effect period timer (step 120IWS871), and confirms whether the value of the fixed effect period timer after the subtraction has timed out ( step 120 IWS 872). If the fixed effect period timer value after the subtraction has not timed out, 1 is subtracted from the process timer value (step 120IWS873), and the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data n), control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts) is executed (step 120IWS874).

Also, when the process timer times out (step 120IWS875), the effect control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 120IWS876). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer, and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stationary symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed (step 120IWS878). If the stop pattern of the decorative pattern is being displayed, the process is terminated. If the stop pattern of the decoration pattern is not being confirmed and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop pattern (non-time-saving design, time-saving design, big hit pattern, small hit pattern) ( step 120 IWS 879).

When the jackpot design is stopped and displayed in the process of step 120IWS879 (Y in step 120IWS880), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot design has been confirmed and displayed (step 120IWS881). Then, the process ends.

When the small winning design is stopped and displayed in the processing of step 120IWS879 (Y of step 120IWS882), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small winning stop flag indicating that the small winning design has been confirmed and displayed (step 120IWS883A). Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start executing the V winning promotion effect to encourage the game ball to enter the V winning hole (step 120IWS883B), and ends the process.

If the value of the fixed effect period timer after the subtraction has timed out (that is, if the pattern fixed period has passed), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit stop flag is set (step 120IWS884). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has received a jackpot start designation command (step 120IWS885A). Whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 120IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start designation command is not received, the process is terminated as it is.

If the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 120IWS885B). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence and type of setting suggestion effect at the time of big hit based on the set value specified by the set value command (the set value stored in the set value storage area (see step 120 IWS 642)). (Step 120 IWS 886).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table for the effect during the big win corresponding to the presence or absence of the setting suggesting effect at the time of the big win and its type (step 120IWS887). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 120IWS888), the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speaker 27 as performance parts) is executed (step 120IWS889).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during the big hit (step 120IWS890).

If the big hit stop flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the small hit stop flag is set (step 120IWS891). If the small hit stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the small hit start designation command is received (step 120IWS892). Whether or not the small hit start designation command is received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not a flag indicating that the small hit start designation command has been received is set in the command analysis process. If the small hit start designation command is not received, the process is terminated as it is.

If the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the small hit stop flag (step 120IWS893). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the small winning effect (step 120IWS894). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 120IWS895), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), the control of the performance device (the image display device 5 as the performance component, various lamps as the performance component, and the speaker 27 as the performance component) is executed (step 120IWS896).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during the small hit (step 120IWS897).

If the small hit stop flag is not set (that is, if the non-time saving design or time saving design is stopped and displayed), the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect control process flag to the variable display start waiting process ( It is updated to the value according to step S170) (step 120IWS898).

(Jackpot time setting suggestion production decision table)
FIG. 8-35 is an explanatory diagram of the setting suggestion effect determination table used at step 120IWS886 at the time of big hit.

As shown in FIG. 8-35, in the big hit time setting suggestion effect determination table, when the setting value is set "1", the selection ratio of no setting suggestion effect at the time of the big hit is 65%, and the selection of the setting suggestion effect A at the time of the big hit is selected. The ratio is 10%, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance B at the time of big win is 5%, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance C at the time of big win is 5%, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance D at the time of big win is 5%, setting suggestion performance E at the time of big win is 5%, and the selection ratio of setting suggestion effect F at the time of big hit is 5%.

In addition, when the set value is set to "2", the selection ratio of no setting suggestion effect at the time of the big hit is 65%, the selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect A at the time of the big win is 5%, and the selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect B at the time of the big win is 10%. %, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance C at the time of big win is 5%, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance D at the time of big win is 5%, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance E at the time of big win is 5%, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance F at the time of big win A judgment value is assigned so that is 5%.

In addition, when the set value is set to "3", the selection ratio of no setting suggestion effect at the time of the big hit is 65%, the selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect A at the time of the big win is 5%, and the selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect B at the time of the big win is 5%. %, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance C at the time of big hit is 10%, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance D at the time of big win is 5%, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance E at the time of big win is 5%, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance F at the time of big win A judgment value is assigned so that is 5%.

In addition, when the set value is set to "4", the selection ratio of no setting suggestion effect at the time of big hit is 60%, the selection ratio of setting suggestion effect A at the time of big win is 5%, and the selection ratio of setting suggestion effect B at the time of big win is 5. %, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance C at the time of big win is 5%, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance D at the time of big win is 15%, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance E at the time of big win is 5%, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance F at the time of big win A judgment value is assigned so that is 5%.

In addition, when the set value is set "5", the selection ratio of no setting suggestion effect at the time of big hit is 60%, the selection ratio of setting suggestion effect A at the time of big win is 5%, and the selection ratio of setting suggestion effect B at the time of big win is 5. %, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance C at the time of big hit is 5%, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance D at the time of big win is 5%, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance E at the time of big win is 15%, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance F at the time of big win A judgment value is assigned so that is 5%.

In addition, when the set value is set to "6", the selection ratio of no setting suggestion effect at the time of the big hit is 60%, the selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect A at the time of the big win is 5%, and the selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect B at the time of the big win is 5. %, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance C at the time of big win is 5%, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance D at the time of big win is 5%, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance E at the time of big win is 5%, the selection ratio of setting suggestion performance F at the time of big win A judgment value is assigned so that is 15%.

Therefore, in this example, if the setting suggesting effect A at the time of big hit is executed, it is suggested that the set value is set to "1" relatively high, and if the setting suggesting effect B at the time of big hit is executed, it is set. It is suggested that the possibility that the value is set to "2" is relatively high, and that the possibility that the value is set to "3" is relatively high if the big win setting suggestion performance C is executed. If the setting suggestion performance D at the time of big win is executed, it is suggested that the possibility of setting the set value to "4" is relatively high, and if the setting suggestion performance E at the time of big win is executed, the set value "5" is suggested. is relatively high, and if the big hit setting suggestion performance F is executed, it is suggested that the possibility of being set to the set value "6" is relatively high.

The setting suggestion effect at the time of the big win is a setting value suggestion effect executed in the image display device 5 when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed.

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode of the relief time-saving entry effect and the relief time setting suggestion effect when shifting to the time-saving state C that is the relief time-saving will be described. FIGS. 8-36 and 8-37 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until transition to the time saving state. In FIGS. 8-36 and 8-37, the effect screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C), . . . (G).

As shown in FIG. 8-36(A), it is assumed that the variable display of the decoration pattern 120IW100 is started one variation before the variable display that shifts to the relief time reduction.

As shown in FIG. 8-36(B), when the variable display of the decorative pattern 120IW100 is started, the relief time-saving rush effect is started. In the relief time-saving rush effect, first, a rush suggestion display 120IW105 suggesting a rush to the rescue time-saving effect is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern 120IW100, and the relief time-saving rush effect is started. In addition, henceforth, in the relief time-saving rush effect, the decoration pattern 120IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 120IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-36(C), an operation suggestion image 120IW106 that suggests operating (depressing) the push button 31B (see FIG. 8-1) is displayed. For example, in the operation suggestion image 120IW106, an image prompting the user to press the push button 31B is displayed along with the characters "Press".

Then, as shown in FIG. 8D, when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggesting image 120IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time elapses after the operation suggesting image 120IW106 is displayed, "V STOCK x 1" is displayed, and the start of the relief time saving is notified. Also, a right-handed hitting instruction display 120IW108 for instructing right-handed hitting is displayed next to the small symbol 120IW101. Furthermore, when execution of the setting suggestion effect at the time of relief is determined, the setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue is executed, and a set value suggestion display 120IW200 suggesting the set value is displayed at the lower right of the screen. This suggests that the setting value is one of the settings "4" to "6".

It should be noted that, for example, the set value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed in a blue display color when the setting suggestion effect A for relief is to be executed, and the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed in a green display color when the setting suggestion effect B for relief is to be executed. The display 120IW200 is displayed, and when the setting suggestion effect C at the time of relief is executed, the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed in a red display color, and the display color of the setting value suggestion display is changed according to the type of the setting suggestion effect at the time of relief. They may be configured to be different.

In addition, not limited to such a mode, for example, when the setting suggestion effect A for relief is executed, a triangular set value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed, and when the setting suggestion effect B for rescue is executed, a rhombic shape is displayed. setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed, and when the relief setting suggestion effect C is executed, a star-shaped setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed, and the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed according to the type of the setting suggestion effect at the time of relief. It may be configured to have different display shapes.

It should be noted that, in this example, even when a big hit is achieved, an effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK×1" can be executed in the same manner as in FIG. 8-36(D). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), in the start-up winning determination process (step S101), performs a prefetch determination process of whether or not it will be a big hit and the variation pattern type, and performs a prefetch determination. Send a prefetch determination result specifying command that can specify the result. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect (so-called holding continuous effect) similar to that of FIG. 8-36(D) based on the received prefetch determination result specifying command. For example, when it is specified that there is one jackpot in the pending memory based on the received look-ahead determination result designation command, the text display of "V STOCK x 1" is displayed to perform the pending continuous effect. to run. Further, for example, when it is specified that there are two big hits in the pending memory based on the received prefetch determination result specifying command, the holding by displaying the characters "V STOCK x 2" is displayed. Execute a series of performances.

On the other hand, when the relief time is shortened, after that, there is a high probability that a variable display with an extremely short variation time of 0.5 seconds will be executed during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction (see FIG. 8-10 (B) ), the variable display is digested very quickly, and a big hit is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, in the variable display (in this example, the design confirmation period), which has become a relief time reduction, the character display "V STOCK × 1" shown in Fig. 8-36 (D) is displayed without checking the look-ahead determination result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character display "V STOCK × 1" shown in Fig. 8-36 (D) is the same effect as the pseudo holding continuous effect, and the relief time is shortened. It is a production that informs.

In addition, if the variation that reaches the relief time reduction is a big hit variation, for example, 30 seconds are secured as the variation time, and the same performance as in FIG. 8-36 is executed to temporarily reduce the relief time. After the execution, an effect of announcing a big hit may be executed.

Although the case where the display of the right-handed instruction display 120IW108 is started from the display timing of the character display 120IW107 of "V STOCK×1" is shown, the display start timing of the right-handed instruction display 120IW108 is limited to that shown in this example. do not have. For example, the display of the right-handed instruction display 120IW108 may be started from the timing of the fixed display of the stop symbol one time before, and various modes are conceivable.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting suggestion effect is executed when the relief time is shortened and the pseudo holding continuous effect is executed, but not limited to such an aspect, it becomes a big hit and the holding continuous effect is performed. It may be constituted so as to execute the setting suggesting performance also when executing , or it may be constituted so as not to execute the setting suggesting performance when the big win is achieved and the holding continuous performance is executed. In addition, in the case of executing the setting suggestion performance when the big win is achieved and the holding continuous performance is executed, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion performance may be different from that in the case of the relief time reduction, or the execution mode of the setting suggestion performance. can be different.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-37(E), a mode selection screen 120IW109 for selecting a production mode for saving time is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes AD is displayed. Mode selection is performed by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. In addition, when a predetermined time has passed without selecting the presentation mode, the presentation mode in which the cursor is matched is automatically determined. Further, even when the mode selection screen 120IW109 is displayed, the right-handed instruction display 120IW108 remains displayed next to the small symbol 120IW101. In addition, the relief setting suggestion effect is continuously executed, and the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed on this screen as well.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (F), when the selection of the effect mode is completed, a start notification screen 120IW110 for notifying that the relief time reduction is started is displayed. For example, the characters "Relief Time Shortening Rush" are displayed. At this time, the small pattern 120IW101 stops.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (G), and when the next fluctuation is started, it shifts to the time saving state C, and the relief time saving is started. At this time, the background image is changed to the background image (red) for the special effect mode.

In addition, in this example, the relief time-saving rush production is executed before one variation that enters the relief time-saving, but before the change, the remaining number of rotations until the relief time-saving and the production in the relief time-saving are explained, and the countdown is performed. Display and the like may be performed.

In addition, in this example, the pattern confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds in the variable display that shortens the relief time, and the mode transition effect and right-handed notification are executed, but the pattern confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving as it is without performing the mode transition effect etc.

In addition, in this example, when the RAM clear processing is executed, when the jackpot is executed, and when the time saving is lost, the relief time saving number counter is initially set to "900". or high-speed variation), the selection buffer and story counter of the story may be cleared. In addition, it may be possible to configure a story to be set when the relief time saving is activated, or to configure a different story to be set depending on the game state.

(Modification 1)
In the above characteristic part 120IW, the time saving state A through the big hit, the time saving state B through the time saving loss, and the time saving state C through the relief time saving state show the case where the time saving state continues until a small hit occurs once. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, depending on whether it is a time saving state A via a big hit, a time saving state B via a time saving loss, or a time saving state C via a relief time saving, the time saving state is continued until a different number of small hits occur. may be configured. Hereinafter, depending on which of the time saving state A via the big hit, the time saving state B via the time saving loss, and the time saving state C via the relief time saving, a modification example that continues the time saving state until a different number of small hits occurs 1 will be explained.

FIG. 8-38 is a flow chart showing special symbol stop processing in Modification 1. FIG. In the modified example 1, the processes of steps 120IWS131 to S148 of the special symbol stop process are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 8-19 and 8-20. In modification 1, if the relief time reduction determination flag is set (Y of step 120IWS148), the CPU 103 sets "900" to the special 2 time reduction number counter, "900" to the total time reduction number counter, and the relief time reduction number counter is set to "900", and "2" is set to the minor hit number counter (step 120IWS149X). The processes after step 120IWS150 are the same as those shown in FIG. 8-20.

By executing the above processing, in the modification 1, in the case of the time saving state A via the big hit and the time saving state B via the time saving loss, the time saving state is continued until the small hit occurs once In the case of the time-saving state C via the relief time-saving, the time-saving state is continued until two small hits occur.

In addition, not only the aspect shown in the present example, for example, between the time saving state A via the big hit and the time saving state B via the time saving loss, the time saving state is continued until a different number of small hits occur. can be configured to In addition, in this example, in the case of the time saving state C through the relief time saving, the time saving state is configured to continue until the small hit occurs twice, but the time saving state until the small hit occurs another number of times such as three times. may be configured to continue.

(Modification 2)
In the characteristic portion 120IW described above, the case of executing the subtraction processing of the small hit number counter (see steps 120IWS71 to S75) at the start of the fluctuation of the small hit fluctuation was shown, but such a processing mode is not limited. For example, it may be configured to execute a process of subtracting the number of small hits counter at the end of the small hit game after the variation of the small hit. Hereinafter, modification 2 will be described in which the subtraction process of the small-hit number counter is executed at the end of the small-hit game after the small-hit variation.

FIG. 8-39 is a flow chart showing the small hit closing post-processing in the modified example 2. FIG. In modification 2, the processing of steps 120IWS451-S463 is similar to those processing shown in FIG. 8-24. Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit number counter is 0 (step 120IWS463A). When the value of the small hit number counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

When the value of the small-hit number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small-hit number counter (step 120IWS463B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS463C). If the value of the small hit number counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

When the value of the small hit number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 resets the set time saving flags (time saving flags A to C) and terminates the time saving state (step 120IWS463D). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

The processing of step 120IWS464 is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 8-24.

(Modification 3)
In addition, in the above characteristic portion 120IW, the case of uniformly controlling the time saving state at the end of the pattern fixed period when the relief time is shortened is shown, but not only in such an aspect, the relief time shortening fluctuation display is small. In the case of hit fluctuation, it may be configured to control to the time saving state at the end of the small hit game. Hereinafter, when the variation display for saving time is a small hit variation, a modification 3 will be described in which the game is controlled to the time saving state at the end of the small win game.

FIG. 8-40 is a flow chart showing the small hit closing post-processing in Modification 3. FIG. In addition, in the modified example 3, in the special symbol stop processing, even if the relief time reduction determination flag is set in step 120IWS148, if the small hit flag is set, the processing of steps 120IWS149 to S151 is not executed. .

In modification 3, the processing of steps 120IWS451-S462 is similar to those processing shown in FIG. 8-24. Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 120IWS462A). When the relief working hours determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set relief working hours determination flag (step 120IWS462B). In addition, the CPU 103 sets "900" to the special 2 time saving number counter, "900" to the total time saving number counter, "900" to the relief time saving number counter, and "1" to the small hit number counter (step 120IWS462C). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C to control the time saving state (step 120IWS462D). Moreover, CPU103 performs control which transmits the time saving state C designation|designated command to CPU120 for production|presentation control (step 120IWS462E). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

The processing of step 120IWS464 is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 8-24.

(Modification 4)
In addition, in the above-described characteristic portion 120IW, when the variation display that caused the relief time reduction is a small hit variation, when V winning occurs during the small win game and the transferred big win game is terminated, Although the case where it controls to the time-saving state (time-saving state of 1 times of time-saving frequency|count) of the one where an advantage is lower was shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to control to a time-saving state with a lower advantage (for example, a time-saving state of seven time-saving times). Hereinafter, if the variation display that caused the relief time reduction is a small winning variation, when the V winning occurs during the small winning game and the transferred big winning game is terminated, the time saving of the one with the higher degree of advantage A description will be given of Modification 4 that is controlled to a state (time saving state with seven times of working time saving).

FIG. 8-41 is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending process in Modification 4. FIG. In modification 4, in the jackpot ending process, the processes of steps 120IWS531 to S539 are the same as those processes shown in FIG. 8-25. Next, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time saving number counter to "7", sets the total time saving number counter to "99", and sets the small hit number counter to "1" (step 120IWS540X). The processing of steps 120IWS541-S541 is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 8-25.

In the modification 4, by executing the above processing, when the variation display in which the relief time reduction occurred is a small hit variation, the big win game shifted to the V winning occurs during the small win game When it ends, it is controlled to the time-saving state of 7 time-savings (see step 120 IWS 540). Therefore, considering the case of executing the variation display of the first special symbol, when the variation display that caused the relief time reduction is the small hit variation, the V prize is generated during the small win game and the big hit is shifted. When the game is finished, it is controlled to the time-saving state with the higher advantage (in this example, the time-saving state is 7 times, which is more than 1 time). On the other hand, considering the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if the variable display that caused the relief time reduction was a small hit change, V winning occurred during the small win game and was transferred. When the jackpot game is finished, it is controlled to a time-saving state with a lower advantage (in this example, the number of time-savings is 7 times less than 99 times).

(Modification 5)
In addition, in the above characteristic portion 120IW, after the relief time is shortened, even during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction, when the fluctuation display is completed 900 times without occurrence of a big hit or a small hit, the relief time is shortened again. (relief time reduction loops), but not limited to such an aspect, the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction may be configured to end once. Hereinafter, Modified Example 5 configured so that the time saving state C via relief time saving is once terminated will be described.

FIG. 8-42 is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing in modification 5. FIG. In modification 5, in the special symbol normal process, the processes of steps 120IWS51 to S85 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 8-15 and 8-16. In Modified Example 5, if the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction is 0 (Y in step 120IWS85), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the time saving flag C is set (step 120IWS85A). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the variation display of 900 times is completed without becoming a big hit or a small hit during the time saving state C via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 is a relief time saving counter. is set to "900" (step 120IWS85B). The processes after step 120IWS86 are the same as those shown in FIGS. 8-16.

FIG. 8-43 is a flow chart showing special symbol stop processing in modification 5. FIG. In modification 5, in the special symbol stop process, the processes of steps 120IWS to S148 are the same as those shown in FIGS. 8-19 and 8-20. In modification 5, when the relief time reduction determination flag is set (Y of step 120IWS148), the CPU 103 sets "900" to the special 2 time reduction number counter, "900" to the total time reduction number counter, and a small hit "1" is set in each counter (step 120IWS149Z). That is, in Modification 5, the relief time reduction number counter is not performed at the end of the variable display in which the relief time reduction has occurred. The processing after step 120IWS150 is the same as those shown in FIGS. 8-20 and 8-21.

By executing the above processing, in the modification 5, the relief time reduction number counter is not set at the end of the variable display in which the relief time reduction occurred, and then a big hit or a small hit during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction. When 900 fluctuation displays are completed without becoming, the relief time reduction number counter is set. Therefore, in the fifth modification, after the relief time is shortened, even if the variation display of 900 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit or a small hit during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction, the time reduction state C is temporarily terminated. And the relief time reduction does not loop.

(Modification 6)
In the above modification 5, when the relief time is reduced, the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0, so during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction, in the special symbol normal process, it is determined as Y in step 120IWS83, The subtraction process of the relief time reduction number counter in step 120 IWS84 is not executed. In addition, it may be configured to perform the subtraction process of the relief time-saving number counter even during the time-saving state C via the relief time-saving. Hereinafter, a modification 6 in which the subtraction process of the relief time reduction number counter can be executed even during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction will be described.

FIG. 8-44 is a flow chart showing special symbol normal processing in Modification 6. FIG. In modification 6, in the special symbol normal process, the processes of steps 120IWS51-S82 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 8-15 and 8-16. In Modification 6, there is no process of determining the value of the relief time-saving number counter in step 120IWS83, and the CPU 103 directly subtracts 1 from the value of the relief time-saving number counter (step 120IWS84).

Next, the CPU 130 confirms whether or not the value of the reduced working hours counter after the subtraction is smaller than 0 (that is, a negative value) (step 120IWS84A). If the value of the relief time-saving counter after subtraction is smaller than 0, the CPU 103 sets the relief time-saving counter to "0" (step 120IWS84B). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS87.

If the value of the relief time-saving number counter after subtraction is not less than 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time-saving number counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS84C). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS87.

If the value of the relief time-saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time-saving flag C is set (step 120IWS84D). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the variation display of 900 times is completed without becoming a big hit or a small hit during the time saving state C via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 is the relief time saving counter. is set to "900" (step 120IWS84E). The processes after step 120IWS86 are the same as those shown in FIGS. 8-16.

By executing the above process, in the sixth modification, similarly to the fifth modification, the relief time reduction number counter is not set at the end of the variable display in which the relief time reduction has occurred, and thereafter, the time reduction via the relief time reduction When 900 times of variation display is completed without becoming a big win or a small win during the state C, a relief time reduction number counter is set. Therefore, in the modification 6, after the relief time is shortened, even if the variation display of 900 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit or a small hit during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction, the time reduction state C is temporarily terminated. And the relief time reduction does not loop.

(Modification 7)
Modification 5 and Modification 6 may be configured to be able to further execute a pre-reading announcement effect. Then, it may be configured to limit the pre-reading announcement effect in a predetermined period and a specific period before and after ending the time saving state C via the relief time saving. Hereinafter, Modification 7 will be described in which the pre-reading announcement effect is limited in a predetermined period and a specific period before and after ending the time saving state C via the relief time saving.

In the modification 7, in the starting winning determination process (step 120IWS101) of the special symbol process process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether a big hit or a small hit will occur. , Whether or not the time saving will be lost, the big hit type, the small hit type, the time saving type, the fluctuation pattern type, etc. are determined. And CPU103 performs control which transmits the prefetch determination result designation command which can specify a prefetch determination result with respect to CPU120 for production|presentation control. Effect control CPU 120 determines the presence and type of the pre-reading notice effect based on the received pre-reading determination result designation command in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process processing, and the variable display of the notice object. Control is performed to execute a look-ahead foretelling effect over one or a plurality of times of variable display before execution.

FIG. 8-45 is a timing chart showing the timing of the pre-reading advance notice effect restriction period in Modification 7. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-45, after the relief time-saving number counter is set, when 900 times of fluctuation display is completed without a big hit, a small hit, or a time-saving loss, a relief time-saving occurs, and the time-saving state C is controlled. be. Next, when the variation display is completed 900 times without becoming a big hit or a small hit during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction (that is, when counting after the relief time reduction counter is set, the 1800th variation display is displayed. When finished), the time saving state C is ended.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 limits the execution of the pre-reading announcement production in a predetermined period and a specific period before and after the time saving state C ends. In this example, since the upper limit of the total number of pending memories is 8, the predetermined period from the fluctuation display before the 8 change when the time saving state C ends to the relief time saving and the time saving state C after the relief time saving The execution of the look-ahead foretelling performance is restricted over a specific period until the variation display after 8 variations after the end. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-45, when counting after the relief time reduction number counter is set, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined from the 1792nd variable display to the 1808th variable display.

In addition, the "restriction of pre-reading notice effect" may be controlled so that the pre-reading notice effect is not executed at all, or the execution probability of the pre-reading notice effect is reduced, or some of the multiple types of pre-reading notice effects Only the kind of look-ahead foretelling effect may be made executable.

(Modification 8)
Moreover, in said characteristic part 120IW and each modification, you may comprise the control to a some time saving state parallelly so that it can be performed simultaneously. FIG. 8-46 is a timing chart showing control timings for various time-saving states in Modification 8. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 8-46, when the jackpot game state is completed (timing T1), the case of transition to the time saving state A with 99 times of time saving times is shown.

Next, at the timing T2 during the continuation of the time saving state A, it is assumed that a new time saving occurrence condition (in this example, the occurrence of the time saving deviation) has been established. In this case, in modification 8, as shown in FIG. 8-46, in parallel with the control of the time saving state A, the control of the time saving state B (in this example, the time saving number of times 30 times) based on the new time saving deviation is started. be done. Then, when the 30 times of fluctuation display is finished (timing T3), the control to the time saving state B is finished. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 8-46, since the 99-time variable display has not ended yet at the stage of the timing T3, the control of the time saving state A is continued. In addition, during the period from timing T2 to T3, in terms of internal processing, the control processing of the time saving state A and the control processing of the time saving state B are executed in parallel. looks like it's continuing.

Next, at timing T4 during the continuation of the time saving state A, it is assumed that a new time saving occurrence condition (in this example, the occurrence of a time saving deviation) has been established. In this case, in modification 8, as shown in FIG. 8-46, in parallel with the control of the time saving state A, the control of the time saving state B (in this example, the time saving number of times 30 times) based on the new time saving deviation is started. be done. Then, at the timing T5 before finishing the 30th variable display, the 99th variable display after being controlled to the time saving state A is finished, and the control to the time saving state A is finished. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 8-46, since the 30-time variable display has not yet ended at the stage of timing T5, the control of the time saving state B is continued. Then, when the 30 times of fluctuation display is finished (timing T6), the control to the time saving state B is finished. Therefore, in terms of internal processing, the time saving state A is ended at the timing T5 after finishing the jackpot game, but the control of the time saving state B is also executed in parallel, so 99 times after the jackpot game is finished. It looks like it was controlled in a time-saving state beyond times.

(Modification 9)
In addition, in the above-described characteristic unit 120IW, in the variation pattern setting process, by determining as Y in step 120IWS1702 and executing steps 120IWS1703 and S1710, even if the time saving is lost, if it becomes a relief time saving, Although the case where the common fluctuation pattern can be determined has been shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured such that it is possible to determine a different variation pattern even when the time saving is lost and when the relief time is reduced.

(Modification 10)
In addition, in the characteristic portion 120IW described above, by switching to the background image corresponding to the special effect mode, the setting suggesting effect can be executed even after the variable display in which the relief time saving is established has been shown, but such a mode is shown. not limited to For example, based on the look-ahead determination result, in the variable display before the variable display in which the relief time saving is established, by executing a stimulating effect such as "special effect mode?" good too.

As described above, the characteristic portion 120IW and each modification include the following (means A1) to (means A10), (means B1) to (means B6), (means C1) to (means C5) , and (means D1) to (means D5).

(Means A1) The identification information including the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are variably displayed, and the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is displayed. A game machine controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player based on derived display, and in a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. Controllable special state control means (e.g., the part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and numerical information (e.g., relief time reduction number counter ) can be updated (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the special state control means is such that the numerical information updated by the update means is a special number of times (for example, 900 times ) corresponding to a specific value (e.g., "0") when a special condition is established (e.g., relief time reduction is established) can be controlled to a special state (e.g., game control microcomputer 100, step 120 (IWS 150 is executed), the update means updates the numerical information in the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the first special symbol Regardless of whether the variable display of is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated), different from the specific display result Special state control means (e.g., game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a special state (e.g., small winning game state) different from the advantageous state when the special display result (e.g., small winning pattern) is derived and displayed Part that executes steps 120IWS114 to S116 in) and special counting means that counts the number of special states that occurred in the special state (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS73 in the game control microcomputer 100) and end the special state (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS143 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the special state ending means is a specific number of times the number of special states counted by the special counting means (for example, It is possible to terminate the special state based on the fact that it has become (for example, game control microcomputer The computer 100 sets the time saving end flag at step 120IWS75 when Y at step 120IWS74, determines Y at step 120IWS141, and executes step 120IWS143), When the display result is derived and displayed, it is possible to control the special state during the special state based on the derived display of the special display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is a small hit variation and Also, at the timing of the end of the pattern fixing period, if the relief time reduction determination flag is set in 120IWS148, step 120IWS150 is executed, and in the subsequent small winning game state, the time reduction state C is controlled), the special counting means, Do not count the special state based on the derived display of the special display result in the variable display where the special condition is established (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS73 at the start of the fluctuation and sets the small hit number counter to 1 When the relief time is shortened, step 120IWS149 is executed at the end of the fluctuation to set the small hit number counter, so in the small hit variation in which the relief time reduction is established, after the small hit number counter is set in step 120IWS149, The small hit number counter is not subtracted immediately by the fluctuation display). According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably control in a situation where both the special state and the special state occur. For example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a special display result is displayed even though the special condition is established and the special state is controlled, and the special state ends immediately, so that the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

In addition, in this example, regarding "controllable to special state during special state", when the variation display to be relief time saving is small hit variation, at the end of the symbol fixed period, it moves to time saving state C, and then, Although the case where it is controlled to the time-saving state C also during a small hit game is shown, the timing which transfers to the time-saving state C is not restricted to what was shown by this example. For example, it may be configured to shift to the time saving state C from the start of the fluctuation of the small winning variation to save the time saving, or may be configured to shift to the time saving state C from the middle of the small winning game. As long as there is a period during which the time saving state C is controlled during the small winning game in some form. In addition, in the case of configuring to shift to the time saving state C from the start of the variation of the small hit variation, it may be configured to perform the subtraction processing of the small hit number counter at the start of the variation of the small hit variation.

Moreover, although this example shows the case where the "specific number of times" is one time, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the time saving state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a small hit a plurality of times such as two or three times during the time saving state, or a plurality of times may be set as the specific number of times.

(Means A2) In means A1, the special state termination means is provided when the number of special states counted by the special counting means reaches a specific number (for example, 1 time), and in the special state for a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 time). 7 times, 99 times, 900 times) when the variable display is executed and to end the special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving end flag at step 120IWS75 when Y at step 120IWS74 However, when Y in step 120IWS78 and Y in step 120IWS81, the time saving end flag is set in step 120IWS82, Y is determined in step 120IWS141, and step 120IWS143 is executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably control in a situation where both the special state and the special state occur. For example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a special display result is displayed even though the special condition is established and the special state is controlled, and the special state ends immediately, so that the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

(Means A3) In means A1 or means A2, the special state control means can be controlled to a special state based on being controlled to the advantageous state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, game control micro The computer 100 executes step 120 (IWS 537), and the special state ending means is controlled to the special state when the special condition is satisfied and when the advantageous state is controlled. When the number of special states counted by the special counting means reaches the same number of times (for example, once), the special state is terminated (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is a small hit at step 120 IWS 149 set "1" to the number counter). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition from becoming too advantageous. For example, it is possible to prevent a game from being controlled in an advantageous special state.

(Means A4) In any one of means A1 to A3, the special state control means can control to a special state based on being controlled to an advantageous state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS537), the special state end means is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition and the special state based on the advantageous state. When the number of special states counted by the special counting means is different (for example, two times), the special state is terminated (for example, in the first modification, the game control micro The computer 100 may be configured to set "2" to the small win number counter in step 120IWS149X). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition from becoming too advantageous. For example, it is possible to prevent a game from being controlled in an advantageous special state.

In addition, although it may be difficult for the player to immediately notice the time saving state of the relief time reduction via Only when it is controlled to the time-saving state, it is configured to end the time-saving state with two small hits, so even if you miss the prize to the second start winning port in the first small hit (second Even if you miss the charge of the reserved memory), you can give another chance to win the second start prize mouth.

In addition, in the modification 1, in the normal time saving state, the number of times of time saving is often as small as 1 or 7 times, and there are relatively few cases where the time saving state ends due to the occurrence of a small hit, whereas the relief time saving via In the time-saving state, the number of times of time-saving is as large as 900 times, and the time-saving state is often ended by the occurrence of a small win, so by surely ending the time-saving state by the occurrence of a small win, it is possible to prevent the player from attacking. can.

(Means A5) In any one of means A1 to A4, the special state control means counts the special state based on the derived display of the special display result in the variable display that satisfies the special condition (for example, deformation In Example 2, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS463B at the end of the small winning game. Therefore, in the small winning variation in which the relief time reduction is established, after the small winning frequency counter is set in step 120IWS149, the variation display is performed. , the number of small hits counter is immediately subtracted). According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably control in a situation where both the special state and the special state occur. For example, in a special state where a special condition is established, if a capture element remains due to control in the special state, it becomes a capture element for the player, which can reduce the risk of being disadvantageous to the game arcade.

(Means A6) In any one of means A1 to A5, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, the special state control means determines that the special display result is derived and displayed. (For example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS462D at the end of the small hit game. , it is controlled to the time saving state C at the end of the small hit game). According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably control in a situation where both the special state and the special state occur. For example, when the special condition is established and the control is performed to the special state, it is possible to wait until the control of the special state is started, so that various controls can be easily performed.

(Means A7) In any one of means A1 to A6, the special state control means can be controlled to a first special state (for example, a time saving state with one time saving time) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S544), and after being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state, a second special state with a higher degree of advantage than the first special state (for example, time saving Time saving state of 7 times) can be controlled (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S542), and a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied, and the special In the special state based on the derived display of the display result, when controlled to an advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area, it is possible to control to the first special state after the advantageous state ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute step 120IWS537, S540). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that does not become too advantageous for the player (that is, does not become too disadvantageous for the game parlor).

(Means A8) In any of means A1 to A6, the special state control means can be controlled to a first special state (for example, a time saving state with one time saving time) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S544), and after being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state, a second special state with a higher degree of advantage than the first special state (for example, time saving Time saving state of 7 times) can be controlled (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S542), and a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied, and the special In the special state based on the derived display of the display result, when controlled to an advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area, it is possible to control to the second special state after the advantageous state ( For example, in modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120IWS537 and S540X). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that does not become too advantageous for the player (that is, does not become too disadvantageous for the game parlor).

(Means A9) In any of means A1 to A6, the special state control means can be controlled to the first special state (for example, the time saving state of 99 times of working time saving times) after being controlled to the advantageous state in the normal state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S545), and after being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state, a second special state that is less advantageous than the first special state (for example, time saving Time saving state of 7 times) can be controlled (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S542), and a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied, and the special In the special state based on the derived display of the display result, when controlled to an advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area, it is possible to control to the first special state after the advantageous state ( For example, when executing steps 120IWS537 and S542, the game control microcomputer 100, if it wins V with a small hit fluctuation based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the time saving state of 99 times of the number of times of time saving. controlled by). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that does not become too advantageous for the player (that is, does not become too disadvantageous for the game parlor).

(Means A10) In any one of means A1 to A6, the special state control means can be controlled to a first special state (for example, a time saving state of 99 times of working time saving) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S545), and after being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state, a second special state that is less advantageous than the first special state (for example, time saving Time saving state of 7 times) can be controlled (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S542), and a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied, and the special In the special state based on the derived display of the display result, when controlled to an advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area, it is possible to control to the second special state after the advantageous state ( For example, in modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120IWS537 and S540X). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that does not become too advantageous for the player (that is, does not become too disadvantageous for the game parlor).

(Means B1) The identification information including the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are variably displayed, and the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is displayed. A game machine controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player based on derived display, and in a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. Controllable special state control means (e.g., the part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and numerical information (e.g., relief time reduction number counter ) can be updated (for example, a portion that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and an effect execution means that can execute effects in response to the variable display (for example, step 170 in the effect control CPU 120 to S173), and the special state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (eg, "0") corresponding to the special number of times (eg, 900 times) (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150) can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is established (for example, the relief time reduction is established), and the update means is the variable of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether the display is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the second special symbol Regardless of whether the display is executed, the value of the relief time-saving counter is uniformly updated), the special state control means has a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, time-saving failure pattern) When it is derived and displayed, it can be controlled in a special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS160), and when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied, special The state is controlled, and the special display results are the first special display result (for example, pattern "6" out of time saving A) and the second special display result (e.g., pattern "8" out of time saving A). The special state control means can control the same special state when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, a game control microcomputer The data 100 executes step 120 IWS 160 regardless of whether the symbol "6" is derived and displayed or the symbol "8" is derived and displayed). When the variable display in which the condition is not established is executed, different effects are executed depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed or the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS1707 and S1710 when step 120IWS1706 is N, and executes steps 120IWS1708 and S1710 when step 120IWS1706 is Y, so that different fluctuation patterns can be determined. When the established variable display is executed, a common effect is executed for the case where the first special display result is derived and displayed and the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, a game control microcomputer 100, even if the time saving is lost, if it becomes a relief time saving, it is possible to determine Y in step 120 IWS 1702 and execute steps 120 IWS 1703 and S 1710 to determine a common variation pattern). do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably perform control even in situations where both the control to the special state due to the establishment of the special condition and the control to the special state due to the derivation display of the special display result occur. can be done. For example, when a special condition is established and the special state is controlled, a suitable effect can be produced.

In this example, as the "same special state", regardless of whether the symbol "6" is derived and displayed or the symbol "8" is derived and displayed, in the case of time saving A Although the case of being controlled to the time saving state B with the same number of time saving times of 100 (see steps 120, IWS155 and S160) is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as the "same special state", (1) controlling to the same number of times of time saving, (2) determining the variation pattern of the special symbol using the same variation pattern table, (3) using the same variation pattern table (4) Controlling the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) to the open state with the same open pattern, execute one or more of , or may be configured to execute all of (1) to (4).

Also, in this example, the case of determining different variation patterns as "execution of different effects" has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, different addition times may be added to the variation time indicated by the variation pattern depending on whether the symbol "6" is derived and displayed or the symbol "8" is derived and displayed. Further, for example, it may be configured to perform either one of (1) the process of determining a different variation pattern and (2) the process of adding a different addition time, or to perform both You may

Further, for example, not only are the fluctuation times different, but also the symbol fixing periods at the end of the fluctuation may be made different.

(Means B2) In means B1, the effect execution means can execute a common effect in the special state when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed. (For example, if the game control microcomputer 100 is Y in step 120IWS1704 and Y in step 120IWS1705, it executes steps 120IWS1709 and S1710, and can determine a common variation pattern). good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably perform control even in a situation where both the control to the special state due to the establishment of the special condition and the control to the special state due to the derivation display of the special display result occur. can be done. For example, when a special condition is established and the special state is controlled, a suitable effect can be produced.

In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is determined with a probability of about 1/200 that the time saving is lost, and when the second special symbol variable display is performed, it is determined to be about 1/400. However, this is not limited to such a mode, for example, the probability of time saving when the second special symbol variation display is executed is further lowered (for example, 1/ 800), it may be configured to make it difficult for the time saving to occur during the time saving state.

Further, for example, when the time saving deviation probability is increased when the second special symbol variation display is executed, and there is a second reservation memory at the end of the time saving state, the second special symbol variation display after the end of the time saving state It may be configured such that the resurrection effect is easily executed at .

(Means B3) In the means B1 or means B2, display result determination means for determining the display result (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS93 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the display result determination means controls the display result in an advantageous state. The processing for determining the type of display result to be controlled in an advantageous state when the , the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute step 120IWS93 in common when determining the jackpot symbol and when determining the time-saving losing symbol). According to such a configuration, an increase in program capacity can be suppressed by sharing processing.

(Means B4) In any one of means B1 to means B3, variable display control means for executing variable display control (for example, a portion that executes steps 120IWS110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100), and variable The display control means determines a variable display period, which is a period during which variable display is performed according to the type of display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the variation pattern), and special conditions in the normal state is executed, the variable display period is determined to be different between when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, for game control Microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS1707 and S1710 when step 120IWS1706 is N, and executes steps 120IWS1708 and S1710 when step 120IWS1706 is Y, so that different variation patterns can be determined), and variable display is executed in a special state. When the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed, the common variable display period is determined (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can reduce the time Even if it is lost, if the relief time is shortened, it is possible to determine Y in step 120IWS1702 and execute steps 120IWS1703 and S1710 to determine a common variation pattern). . According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize the display result and the variable display period depending on the situation.

(Means B5) In any one of the means B1 to B4, the effect executing means derives and displays the first special display result when the variable display with the special condition established in the normal state is executed. The second special display result is derived and displayed to perform a different effect (for example, in the ninth modification, the game control microcomputer 100, even if it is a time saving loss and a relief time saving, different variation patterns can be determined). According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize the display result and the variable display period depending on the situation.

(Means B6) In any one of means B1 to means B5, variable display control means for executing variable display control (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) The display control means determines the fixed display period of the display result, and the fixed display period can be changed according to the type of the display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can control steps 120IWS1127, S1133, S1135, S1137 to execute). According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize the display result and the variable display period depending on the situation.

In addition, in this example, a case was shown in which the pattern fixing period is changed according to whether the relief time reduction has occurred or the display result, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the pattern fixing period may be fixed (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of whether or not the relief time reduction has occurred or the display result.

(Means C1) The identification information including the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are variably displayed, and the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is displayed. A game machine controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player based on derived display, and in a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. Controllable special state control means (e.g., the part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and numerical information (e.g., relief time reduction number counter ) can be updated (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a plurality of setting values that differ in the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, setting values “1” to “6 ”) can be set to any of the set values (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the special state control means is the numerical value updated by the update means When the information becomes a specific value (e.g., "0") corresponding to the special number of times (e.g., 900 times), a special condition is established (e.g., relief time reduction is established). , the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120 IWS 150), the updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. (For example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the value of the relief time reduction counter is updated uniformly. ), a notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a relief time-saving rush effect) that notifies that a special state is controlled by a special state control means based on the establishment of a special condition Step 120 IWS808, S845 in step 120) and suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 in effect control CPU 120 Step 120 (part for executing IWS808, S845), and the suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect when the notification effect is executed (for example, , the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 120IWS808 and S845, and can execute the setting suggestion effect at the time of relief when the relief rush rush effect is executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably perform control even in situations where both the control to the special state due to the establishment of the special condition and the control to the special state due to the derivation display of the special display result occur. can be done. For example, when a special condition is established and the special state is controlled, a suitable effect can be produced. In addition, since the rate at which the special condition is satisfied changes according to the set value, by executing the suggestive effect according to the rate at which the special condition is satisfied, the player's interest can be enhanced when the special state is controlled. can.

It should be noted that, in this example, since the jackpot probability is different depending on the setting value, as a result, the ease of occurrence of the relief time reduction will also differ, and the relief time reduction occurs when the set value is set to a low value. It will be easy. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may feel that the set value may be set to a low value when the relief time reduction occurs. Therefore, in this example, the player's interest is less likely to be lowered by executing a relief-time setting-suggestion effect that makes the player feel even a little that the set value is high during the relief time-saving. Therefore, in this example, when the set value is relatively high setting "4" to "6", it is configured to be able to execute the setting suggesting effect at the time of relief, and other timing such as the setting suggesting effect at the time of the big hit. The execution ratio is different from the setting suggestion effect executed in .

(Means C2) In means C1, the setting suggesting effect execution means executes the suggesting effect when the variable display that satisfies the special condition is not controlled to an advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may provide relief in the event of a big hit variation). It may be configured such that time-saving processing is not performed). According to such a configuration, the suggestive effect can be executed without interfering with other effects.

In addition, in this example, while the relief time-saving processing is not performed for the big hit variation, the relief time-saving processing is performed for the small hit variation. may be configured not to perform the processing of

(Means C3) In means C1 or means C2, the setting suggesting effect executing means executes the suggesting effect even after the special condition is met (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 120IWS640 when step 120IWS638 is Y). ) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest a set value over a long period of time, so that interest can be improved.

(Means C4) In any one of the means C1 to C3, the setting suggesting effect executing means executes the suggesting effect before the special condition is established (for example, in the tenth modification, the effect control CPU 120 reads ahead Based on the determination result, in the variable display before the variable display in which the relief time saving is established, the setting suggestion effect is executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest a set value over a long period of time, so that interest can be improved.

(Means C5) In any one of the means C1 to C4, the setting suggesting effect execution means may perform another suggesting effect (for example, when a big hit is set) that can be executed at a timing different from the suggesting effect when the special condition is established. Suggestive effect) can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 120IWS887, S889 and step S176), and setting is more advantageous for the suggestive effect when the special condition is satisfied than other suggestive effects. It is easy to execute a suggestion effect that suggests a value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-30, the setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue is configured to be executable when the set value is set to “4” to “6”. Therefore, the setting-suggesting effect at the time of relief may be a setting-suggesting effect suggesting that the setting is relatively high). According to such a configuration, the more advantageous the set value is, the lower the rate at which the special condition is established. Therefore, by executing the suggestive effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player when the special condition is established.

In this example, a case is shown in which the setting suggestion effect at the time of the big win is executed during the fanfare period of the big win game, but not limited to such an aspect, it may be executed during the round period or the ending period of the big win game. may be configured.

(Means D1) Variable display of identification information including first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and second identification information (eg, second special symbol) is performed, and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is displayed. A game machine controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player based on derived display, and in a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. Controllable special state control means (for example, the part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the initial value set based on the execution of the variable display (for example, Numerical information (e.g., relief time saving number counter) from "900"). Numerical information subtracted and updated by updating means can be controlled to a special state when it becomes a specific value (for example, "0") (for example, game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150), updating means is updated by subtracting the numerical information between when the variable display of the first identification information is performed and when the variable display of the second identification information is performed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed The value of the relief time reduction number counter is uniformly updated regardless of whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), the numerical information that the update means subtracts and updates is a predetermined condition. When it is set to the initial value (for example, in modifications 5 and 6, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS85B and S84E), and the special state control means specifies the numerical information subtracted and updated by the updating means. After controlling from the normal state to the special state based on the value, the numerical information subtracted and updated by the updating means becomes the specific value during the period until the predetermined condition is satisfied and the initial value is set. (For example, in modification 5, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the processing of steps 120IWS84 to S86 when Y in step S120IWS83. In modification 6, the game The control microcomputer 100 performs the processing of steps 120IWS84D to S86 when Y at step S120IWS84A or N at step 120IWS84C. don't run ). According to such a configuration, when performing control to shift to a special state according to the number of times of variable display, subtraction update processing can be performed in common before and after numerical information reaches a specific value. It is possible to prevent the capacity from increasing and to perform suitable control. For example, if the transition when the numerical information becomes a specific value is not caused to transition to a special state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in capacity due to the preparation of a dedicated program for after the numerical information reaches the specific value.

In addition to the case where the relief time reduction counter is set when the time reduction state via the relief time reduction state is completed by executing steps 120IWS85B and S84E, the predetermined condition is that step 120IWS13 is set when the initialization process is executed when the power is turned on. It includes the case where the relief time reduction counter is set by execution and the case where step 120IWS135 is executed and the relief time reduction counter is set when a big hit occurs.

When the relief time reduction number counter is set when the big win occurs, it may be set at the start of the big win game, or may be set during the round of the big win game or at the end of the big win game.

Further, when setting the relief time reduction number counter at the time of executing the initialization process at power-on, the process may be different depending on whether the setting is changed or not. For example, if you change the settings and execute the initialization process, set the relief time reduction counter, while if you execute the initialization process without changing the settings, the current relief time reduction counter value may be configured to maintain Conversely, if you change the settings and perform the initialization process, the current value of the relief time reduction counter is maintained, while if you perform the initialization process without changing the settings, the relief time reduction It may be configured to set a number counter.

(Means D2) In means D1, the updating means performs variable display when the subtracted and updated numerical information is greater than a specific value, and variable display when the subtracted and updated numerical information is a specific value. is executed, it is possible to update the numerical information by subtraction (for example, in the modification 6, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS84), and the numerical information updated by subtraction is greater than a specific value When it is a value, the numerical information is updated to the numerical information after subtraction (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS84C to S86 when N in step 120IWS84A), and the numerical information updated by subtraction is When the value is smaller than the specific value, the numerical information is updated to the specific value (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS84B when Y in step 120IWS84A). . According to such a configuration, when performing control to shift to a special state according to the number of times of variable display, subtraction update processing can be performed in common before and after numerical information reaches a specific value. It is possible to prevent the capacity from increasing and to perform suitable control. For example, if the transition when the numerical information becomes a specific value is not caused to transition to a special state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in capacity due to the preparation of a dedicated program for after the numerical information reaches the specific value.

(Means D3) In means D1 or D2, operation means (for example, clear switch) for performing operation and initial value setting means (for example, , a part that executes step 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to select whether or not to set to the initial value by operating the operation means, so it is possible to enhance the convenience in terms of operation.

In addition, as an operation means for changing the settings and setting the relief time saving number counter, a dedicated operation means (button or switch) different from the clear switch may be provided.

(Means D4) In any one of means D1 to D3, the special state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a time-saving design is displayed) is displayed. Yes (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120 IWS 160), even when the numerical information subtracted and updated by the updating means is a specific value, it is possible to control to a special state when the special display result is displayed. Even after the numerical information subtracted and updated by the update means becomes a specific value, it is possible to control the special state when the special display result is displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 Regardless of whether it is in the time saving state C via relief time saving, step 120IWS88 can be executed). According to such a configuration, since there is a possibility that the special state is controlled after the numerical information that has been subtracted and updated becomes the specific value again, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

(Means D5) In any one of means D1 to D4, determination means for determining whether to control in an advantageous state (for example, a portion that executes step 120IWS62 in the game control microcomputer 100) and determination means Before the determination of, determination means for determining whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS101 in the game control microcomputer 100) and based on the determination result of the determination means, pre-reading notice effect and a predetermined period before the numerical information subtracted and updated by the update means becomes a specific value, and the update means subtracts and updates A specific period after the numerical information obtained reaches a specific value, and a pre-reading notice effect limiting means that limits the execution of the pre-reading notice effect (for example, in modification 7, as shown in FIG. 8-45, the time saving state C is Over a predetermined period from the change display before the ending 8 change to the relief time saving, and a specific period from the relief time saving to the change display after the 8 change after the end of the time saving state C, execution of the pre-reading notice effect is performed. limiting). According to such a configuration, since there is a possibility that the special state is controlled after the numerical information that has been subtracted and updated becomes the specific value again, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-described characteristic portion 120IW and each modification, the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is uniformly 900 times, but not limited to such an aspect, for example, different depending on the set value It may be configured such that the relief time is shortened based on the number of times the variable display is performed. For example, when the set values are “1” to “5”, relief time reduction occurs based on the execution of 900 times of variable display without a big hit, a small hit, or time saving, while setting If the value is "6", it may be configured such that relief time reduction occurs based on the fact that 600 fluctuation displays have been executed without causing a big win, a small win, or a loss of time reduction, and a specific setting. Only in the case of values, the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened may be different.

Further, for example, for all of the setting values “1” to “6”, the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened may be varied for each setting value. In this case, for example, the ratio between the denominator of the jackpot probability and the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened may be set to be about three times the same. Also, for example, within the range of 2.5P ≤ n ≤ 3.0P (P = denominator of the probability of a big hit, n = the number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced), the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is varied. may

Also, even if it is a time saving state via relief time saving, it may be configured not to continue the time saving state until the next big hit occurs. It may be configured to end the time saving state, and the time saving state is ended based on the end of the variable display of the specified number of times (900 times in this example) as shown in Modification 5 and Modification 6 It may be configured as

In addition, as shown in Modification 5 and Modification 6, after completing the variable display of the specified number of times (in this example, 900 times) in the time saving state via the relief time saving and shifting to the normal state, further big hits and small hits , It may be configured such that when the variable display of a specified number of times (for example, 900 times) is completed without causing a loss of time saving, it becomes a relief time saving again and shifts to a time saving state, or it is configured so that it does not become a relief time saving again. may be configured. In this case, when configured so that the relief time reduction does not occur again, for example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0, it may be controlled not to perform the subtraction process of the relief time reduction number counter from the next processing. However, it may be configured to perform a process of resetting to 0 when a negative value is obtained by subtracting the relief time reduction number counter from the next process.

Further, in the characteristic portion 120IW and each modified example described above, the configurations shown in the following (means 1A) to (means 10A) may be applied.

(Means 1A) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), and a state control means (for example, step 120 IWS 150 in the game control microcomputer 100, S160, S537 execution part) and updating means (for example, step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, The state control means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, step 120 IWS85 in the game control microcomputer 100 , S86; the portion that executes step 120 IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100); It may be configured so as to update the numerical information (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player. Specifically, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is displayed variably, the update of the numerical information continues, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for playing the game can be enhanced. can be done.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special condition is established on the basis that a predetermined display result (for example, a lost pattern) different from the specific display result as the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed a special number of times in succession ( For example, a portion for executing steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the game control microcomputer 100. A portion for executing step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100.). According to such a configuration, since display results disadvantageous to the player are relieved when they are successively derived and displayed, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

(Means 3A) In means 1A or means 2A, the update means updates the numerical information when variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (for example, time saving state, variable probability state) (for example , a part that executes step 120 IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player. Specifically, numerical information is updated fairly, and even after being controlled to a special state once, it can be controlled to a special state again, so it is possible to control to a special state until it is controlled to a substantially advantageous state. Thus, the player's investment can be suppressed, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

(Means 4A) In any of means 1A to 3A, the updating means sets the numerical information to the initial value when a predetermined condition is established (for example, step 120IWS13, S135, S149, (the part that executes S161). According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous to the player, and there is no need to rescue the player.

(Means 5A) In means 4A, the predetermined condition is to be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous to the player, and there is no need to rescue the player.

(Means 6A) In means 4A, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, time saving) is derived and displayed in the normal state (for example, game control The part that executes step 120IWS160 in the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined condition is that the special display result is derived and displayed (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS161 in the game control microcomputer 100). may According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 7A) In means 4A, the predetermined condition may be that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to substantially control the special state until the next advantageous state, so that the degree of relief for the player can be enhanced.

(Means 8A) In means 4A, backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information to be updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped when the power supply is stopped, and the updating means , When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, execution of initialization processing), the numerical information held by the backup storage means is set to the initial value (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100) , The predetermined condition may be configured such that a specific condition is established (for example, the part that executes step S8 and step 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, if the numerical information up to the special number of times is held when initialization is performed in the game hall, it may be too disadvantageous for the game hall. can be made easier.

(Means 9A) In any of means 1A to means 8A, an effect control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) corresponding to variable display is provided, and the state control means is a special number of times Based on the execution of the variable display can be controlled to a special state of a specific period more than the special number of times (for example, step 120IWS83 ~ S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100 portion), special in the special state It is possible to control the special state of the specific period again based on the execution of the variable display of the number of times (for example, the part that executes steps 120IWS83 to S86 and S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the effect control means is It may be configured to execute different effects in the first specific period and the second specific period. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, it is a situation in which the advantageous state is not controlled for a long period of time. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game by adding a change to the effect mode.

(Means 10A) In any of means 1A to 8A, an effect control means (for example, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) corresponding to variable display is provided, and the state control means is a special number of times Based on the execution of the variable display can be controlled to a special state of a specific period more than the special number of times (for example, step 120IWS83 ~ S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100 portion), special in the special state It is possible to control the special state of the specific period again based on the execution of the variable display of the number of times (for example, the part that executes steps 120IWS83 to S86 and S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the effect control means is It may be configured such that a common effect is executed in the first specific period and the second specific period. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, the state is not controlled to the advantageous state for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily conscious of the fact that the situation is not under control, and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, in the characteristic portion 120IW and each modified example described above, the configurations shown in the following (means 1B-1), (means 1B-2) to (means 5B) may be applied.

(Means 1B-1) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and an advantageous advantageous state (eg, a gaming machine controllable to a jackpot game state), in which a game area in which game media can be divided into a first path (for example, a left-handed path) and a second path (for example, a right-handed path); A state control means (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, and S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a variable display Update means (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), variable display control and advantageous state control. A process executing means for updating a data value indicating a game progress state necessary for executing a process and executing a process corresponding to the data value (for example, a portion for executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) And, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, game control micro A portion that executes steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the computer 100. A portion that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100.) The update means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the second identification information When the variable display is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the processing execution means updates the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value. 1 processing is executed (for example, the part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the data value is the second numerical value different from the first numerical value, the second processing regarding the advantageous state is executed (for example , a part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition. to execute the third process (for example, game control microcomputer The controller 100 may be configured to execute the next fluctuation postponement process), in the normal state, the game is played by shooting the game medium to the first path, and in the special state, the game medium is shot to the second path. It may be configured to include a launch promotion notification means for executing a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched to the second path while the game medium is being launched and the third process is being executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 1B-2) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and an advantageous advantageous state (such as A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that is controllable to a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in a normal state 120IWS150, S160, S537), updating means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, a portion that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and variable A process execution means (for example, A portion that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is provided with a special condition when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. It is controllable in a special state (for example, the part that executes steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the game control microcomputer 100. The part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100.), and the update means is the first identification information When the variable display is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the process execution means , When the data value is the first numerical value, the first processing related to variable display is executed (for example, the part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value When the second processing related to the advantageous state is executed (for example, the part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the data value is the third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value The state control means executes the third process for controlling to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute the next fluctuation postponement process), Information for notifying that control is performed in a special state during execution of the third process You may comprise so that the production|presentation execution means which performs knowledge production|presentation may be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 2B) In the means 1B-1 and 1B-2, the process execution means executes the second process after the first process when the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display satisfying the special condition. may be configured to According to such a configuration, priority is given to the control of the advantageous state, so that the player is not disadvantaged, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

(Means 3B) In means 1B-1, means 1B-2 or means 2B, the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display is started (for example, step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed part), the processing executing means changes the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value, and the special information when the state control means controls to the special state. is changed from the second information to the first information, and different processing is executed depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information. According to such a configuration, by managing the special information, it is possible to suitably execute the process of transitioning to the special state.

(Means 4B) In means 3B, variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern of variable display (for example, a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the variable display pattern determination means is a special It may be configured such that different variable display patterns are determined when the information is the first information and when the information is the second information. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the effect when the variable display is performed the special number of times.

(Means 5B) In means 3B, variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern of variable display (for example, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the variable display pattern determination means is a special It may be configured such that a variable display pattern with different determination times of display results is determined depending on whether the information is the first information or the second information. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the effect when the variable display is performed the special number of times.

Further, in the characteristic portion 120IW and each modified example described above, the configurations shown in the following (means 1C) to (means 6C) may be applied.

(Means 1C) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), a game control means capable of controlling the game (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100), and an effect corresponding to the variable display Effect control means to control (for example, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120), and the game control means is a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, time saving state) Controllable state control means (for example, the part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, and S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example , a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a state information control means for controlling state information that can specify the state controlled by the state control means, and the state control means is variable It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the display (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and update Numerical information updated by the means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, step 120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100 Part that executes (A portion that executes step 120 IWS 150 in the game control microcomputer 100.) The updating means updates numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), the state information control means sets the state information to the first numerical value in the normal state, and the specific display result is the display result of the variable display When the state information is controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state based on the derived display, the state information is set to the second numerical value, and when the special state is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, the state information. a third value different from the first and second values The game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means, and when the special state is in the state information, the specific information corresponding to the second numerical value and the third numerical value. may be configured to be able to transmit According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since different game states can be preferably identified, control is facilitated, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

(Means 2C) In means 1C, the state information control means changes the state information to the first numerical value, the second numerical value and the It may be configured to have a fourth numerical value different from the three numerical values. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since different game states can be preferably identified, control is facilitated, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C, the effect control means controls the state control means to a special state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, and when the state control means satisfies the special condition. It may be configured such that a different effect can be executed when controlling to a special state based on what has been done. According to such a configuration, since the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, it is possible to execute the performance according to the situation, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

(Means 4C) In any one of means 1C to means 3C, the effect control means controls to a special state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, and when the state control means It may be configured such that a common effect can be executed (for example, a common background image is displayed) when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the condition. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition the same every time, and thereby prevent an increase in development costs because a new performance is not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Means 5C) In any one of means 1C to 4C, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, time saving) is derived and displayed in the normal state. Yes (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS160 in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means, the state control means, when the special display result is derived and controlled to a special state based on the display, the state The control means may be configured to be able to execute a different effect when controlling to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. According to such a configuration, since the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, it becomes possible to execute the performance according to the situation, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

(Means 6C) In any one of means 1C to 4C, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the effect control means can , when the state control means controls to the special state based on the derived display of the special display result, and when the state control means controls to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. (for example, displaying a common background image). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition the same every time, and thereby prevent an increase in development costs because a new performance is not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 120IW and each modified example described above, the configurations shown in the following (means 1D) to (means 4D) may be applied.

(Means 1D) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), a game control means capable of controlling the game (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100), and an effect corresponding to the variable display Effect control means to control (for example, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120), and the game control means is a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, time saving state) Controllable state control means (for example, the part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, and S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example , a part that executes step 120 IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed when the power supply is stopped. Including, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is established by numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100 A portion for executing steps 120 IWS85 and S86. A portion for executing step 120 IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100.) The update means is configured to perform the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. When it is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the game control means transmits predetermined information to the effect control means when the power supply is started. It is possible, and the effect control means is configured to be able to execute a suggestive effect regarding the number of executions of the variable display in a predetermined period after the power supply is started, based on the reception of the predetermined information. good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, the player is motivated to play a game from the opening of the game arcade, and the operating rate of the game machine can be increased.

(Means 2D) In means 1D, the game control means is configured to be able to transmit specific information capable of specifying numerical information held by the backup storage means to the effect control means when power supply is started. may be According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, the player will be motivated to play a game from the opening of the game arcade, thereby increasing the operation rate of the game machine and suppressing an increase in the processing load.

(Means 3D) In means 1D or 2D, the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means in relation to the execution of the variable display, and the effect control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means based on the establishment of the special condition. It is possible to execute a special effect related to being controlled to a special state based on the specific information, and as the specific information, it is possible to specify that the difference between the number of executions of the variable display and the special number of times is less than or equal to a predetermined value. 1st specific information (for example, relief time reduction number 1 designation command), and the second specific information that can specify that the difference between the number of execution times of variable display and the special number is larger than a predetermined value (for example, relief time reduction number of times 2 designation command). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by regularly suggesting a function to a player, it is possible to reduce the risk of inadvertently inflicting a loss on the player and to suitably implement the processing relating to the specific information.

(Means 4D) In any one of means 1D to 3D, the effect control means is controlled to a special state when a special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display a first predetermined number of times less than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting that a special number of variable displays are executed, and the suggestive effect can be executed each time a second predetermined number of variable displays less than the first predetermined number of times are executed before the special number of variable displays are executed. It may be configured to be According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by regularly suggesting features to the player, the risk of unknowingly incurring losses can be reduced.

In addition, the configurations shown in the following (means 1E-1) and (means 1E-2) may be applied to the characteristic portion 120IW and each modified example described above.

(Means 1E-1) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a game control means capable of controlling the game (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a variable display Effect control means for controlling the effect (for example, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120), and the game control means is a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, time saving state) controllable state control means (for example, the part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control microcomputer 100), and updating means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (For example, a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times variable display is performed when the power supply is stopped. , when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an initialization means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means including information on the number of times the predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100 The part that executes S8), and the state control means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times ( For example, the part that executes steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the game control microcomputer 100. The part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100.), the updating means, when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the effect control means is such that the storage contents of the backup storage means are When the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after being initialized, and when the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized and specified Display results are derived and displayed It may be constructed such that different performances are executed when the special state is controlled by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition after the special condition is established. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing of setting values are increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Means 1E-2) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a game control means capable of controlling the game (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a variable display Effect control means for controlling the effect (for example, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120), and the game control means is a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, time saving state) controllable state control means (for example, the part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control microcomputer 100), and updating means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (For example, a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times variable display is performed when the power supply is stopped. , when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an initialization means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means including information on the number of times the predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100 The part that executes S8), and the state control means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times ( For example, the part that executes steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the game control microcomputer 100. The part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100.), the updating means, when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the effect control means is such that the storage contents of the backup storage means are When the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after being initialized, and when the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized and specified Display results are derived and displayed After being controlled to the special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition, a different performance may be executed after being controlled to the special state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing of setting values are increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 090IW)
Next, the characterizing portion 090IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characterizing portion 090IW, the game state is controlled to either a normal state (non-time saving state) or a time saving state. As will be described later in detail, it is possible to control from the normal state to the time saving state via the small winning game state based on the derivation display of the small winning symbol. Further, the display result of the small win includes the display result of the small win A or the small win B controllable in the time saving state and the display result of the small win C uncontrollable in the time saving state. Then, a case where the first special symbol is variably displayed to derive and display a small win display result, and a second special symbol is variably displayed to derive and display a small win display result. , the ratio at which the display result of the small win A or the small win B is derived and displayed differs.

(Big hit type determination table, small hit type determination table)
9-1 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Among them, FIG. 9-1(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 9-1(B) shows a specific example of the big hit type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. , is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be "10R time-saving jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. , is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to "10R time-saving jackpot".

"10R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that controls to a jackpot game state of 10 rounds and shifts to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. When shifting to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

As shown in FIG. 9-1(A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a big hit is achieved, it is determined as a 10R short-time big hit with a probability of 100%. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-1(B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the big hit is achieved, the 10R short time big hit is determined with a probability of 100%.

Incidentally, the jackpot type is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, even if the number of times of time saving is different (for example, 3 times or 5 times) and more than one type of time saving jackpot is provided, or the number of rounds is different (for example, 2 rounds or 4 rounds) and more than one type of time saving jackpot is provided good. In addition, in this example, only the time-saving jackpot that shifts to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends is provided, but a non-time-saving jackpot (normal jackpot) that does not shift to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends is provided. may be configured. Further, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the 100R time-saving jackpot is determined with a probability of 100%, but the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Even in this case, it may be configured so that a plurality of types of jackpot types are determined.

FIG. 9-1(C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. As shown in FIG. 9-1 (C), the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a small hit pattern, is based on the random number for the hit type determination. This table is referred to for determining the type to be one of "minor win A", "minor win B", and "minor win C".

"Small hit A" means that the game ball that entered the special winning opening during the small winning game (first round) did not win the V (detected by the non-V winning opening switch and did not pass through the V winning opening It is a small hit that shifts to a time saving state after the small hit game is completed on the condition that it is detected that it is. When shifting to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is maintained until ten times of variable display is completed. Incidentally, the 'small win A' is a small win that controls to the big win game state of the second to fourth rounds on the condition that V prize is won, and shifts to the time saving state after the big win game state is finished. However, when the "minor hit A" is reached, the release pattern of the special variable winning ball device is controlled so as not to win the V prize.

"Small hit B" means that the game ball that entered the special winning opening during the small winning game (first round) did not win the V (detected by the non-V winning opening switch and did not pass through the V winning opening It is a small hit that shifts to a time saving state after the small hit game is completed on the condition that it is detected that it is. When shifting to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until five times of variable display is completed. Incidentally, the 'small win B' is a small win that controls to the big win game state of the 2nd round to the 4th round on the condition that V win is won, and shifts to the time saving state after the big win game state is finished. However, when the "small win B" is reached, the opening pattern for opening the special variable winning ball device is first controlled so as not to win the V prize.

"Small hit C" means that the game ball that entered the special winning opening during the small winning game (first round) did not win the V (detected by the non-V winning opening switch and did not pass through the V winning opening) It is a small hit that does not shift to the time saving state after the small hit game ends even if it is detected that there is something. Further, 'small win C' is a small win to control to the big win game state of the 2nd to 4th rounds on the condition that V prize is won, and shift to the time saving state after the big win game state is finished. Then, when the "small hit C" is reached, the opening pattern for opening the special variable winning ball device is controlled so that V winning is achieved in most cases.

As shown in FIG. 9-1(C), in this example, 25% of the cases where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and becomes a small hit are determined as "small hit A", and 25% are determined as "small hit A". It is determined as "small win B", and 50% is determined as "small win C".

As shown in FIG. 9-1 (D), in this example, 5% of the cases where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and becomes a small hit are determined as "small hit A", and 5% are determined as "small hit A". It is determined as "small win B", and 90% is determined as "small win C".

In addition, a small hit classification is not restricted to the aspect shown by this example. For example, the number of times of time saving may be different (for example, 3 times or 5 times). Further, it is also possible to provide a small win without V prize in which V winning is substantially impossible during the small winning game and transition to the big winning game is not performed after the small winning game.

Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the probability of a small hit is higher than when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, so when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. has a higher ratio of a small hit A or a small hit B (that is, a small hit with a short time), but when the second special symbol fluctuation display is executed, a small with a short time at a rate of 100% You can hit it.

(Release pattern of small winning game)
Next, the release pattern of the small winning game will be described. FIG. 9-2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small winning game. As shown in FIG. 9-2, after a small winning game is started at timing S1, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to open state at timing S2 when the pre-opening period t1 (fanfare time) elapses.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (A), in the case of a small hit A or B (with time reduction), when the V winning opening opening and closing plate is controlled to the closed state, a special variable of 0.05 seconds After opening the winning ball device (special winning opening), after 1 second closing time, the special winning opening is opened and closed again for 0.05 seconds, and after 12 seconds closing time, the special winning opening is closed twice. Performs opening and closing operations.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (B), in the case of a small hit C (no time reduction), when the V winning opening opening and closing plate is controlled to the open state, the special variable winning ball device (special winning opening) is controlled to the open state, by repeating the operation of opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds, closing the special winning opening for 1 second, and then opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds again. A special winning opening is opened 10 times by winning.

The operation of the V winning opening opening/closing plate is the same for small win A or small win B (with time saving) and small win C (no time saving), and is opened for 8 seconds in either case.

In this example, the opening time of each special winning hole is as short as 0.05 seconds in a small hit, but as already explained, the special variable winning ball device is formed with a plurality of regulating pieces. On the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device, about 2 to 3 game balls meander and flow down. A game ball can drop and enter into the special variable winning ball device.

Then, when the small hit C (without time reduction), the special variable winning ball device is opened when the V winning opening opening and closing plate is open, so the game ball can be made to enter the V winning opening. It is possible. Also, in the case of a small hit A or B (with time reduction), when the V winning opening opening and closing plate is closed, the special variable winning ball device is opened, so the game ball enters the V winning opening. impossible or difficult to

In the case of a small hit C (no time reduction), when the game ball entering the special prize opening does not pass through the V prize opening, it is not controlled to the time reduction state, but the small hit A or B (with time reduction). In the case of , when the game ball entering the special winning opening does not pass through the V winning opening, it is controlled to the time saving state. As a result, when there is a small hit C (no time reduction), the game ball passes through the V prize opening and is highly likely to be controlled to a big win state, while it is not controlled to a time reduction state, and a small hit A or B is achieved. When (with time saving), the possibility that the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening and is controlled to the big hit state is extremely low, while the possibility of being controlled to the time saving state is high.

Then, when the game ball enters the special winning opening and wins V, after the final opening of the special winning opening is completed, a predetermined period of closing time (interval time) and small winning end time (ending time) elapse. , the state shifts to the jackpot game state, and control to open the special variable winning ball device 7 is performed from the second round to the fourth round.

In addition, in both cases of the small hit A or B (with time reduction) and the small win C (no time reduction), the ending period is shifted from timing S3 to S4, but the small hit A or B (with time reduction) ), the ending period t3 is longer than the ending period t4 in the case of the small win C (no time reduction). For example, the ending period t3 is 10 seconds longer than the ending period t4. As a result, in the case of a small hit A or B (with time saving), it is possible to secure time for displaying the start screen of the time saving state (see FIG. 9-9 (N)).

In addition, in the case of a small hit A or B (with time saving), the ending period may be changed depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning hole (that is, whether or not to shift to the time saving state). Concretely, when the game ball does not enter the V winning hole, control is performed in a time-saving state, so in this case the ending period is lengthened.

Thus, in this example, different patterns (in this example, open The number of times) can control the special variable winning ball device to the open state. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control the time saving state.

Specifically, in this example, when the display result of the small win A or the small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of the small win C is derived and displayed, the V winning prize is performed in common. When the opening opening/closing plate is provided and the display result of the small win A or the small win B is derived and displayed, it is special when the V winning opening opening/closing plate is in a state that hinders the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening. When the variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state and the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed, the V winning opening opening/closing plate is in a state where the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening is not hindered. A special variable winning ball device is controlled to an open state. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control the time saving state.

(Variation pattern table)
FIG. 9-3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 090IW. Among them, FIG. 9-3 shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 9-4 shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for the second special symbol.

First, the variation pattern of the first special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 9-3. As shown in FIG. 9-3, in this example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, if it is lost during the normal state, the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), Variation pattern PA1-2 (normal variation non-reach → development production), variation pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation), variation pattern PA1-4 (shortening variation non-reach → development production), variation pattern PA2-1 ( normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (normal reach→development effect), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach β). Also, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, if it is lost during the time saving state, the variation pattern PA1-5 (shortened variation), the variation pattern PA1-6 (non-shortened variation) reach → development production), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (normal reach → development production), fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach α), fluctuation pattern PA2-4 (super reach β) determined by

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, when the big hit occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern PB1-1 (normal reach) is used as the variation pattern. , variation pattern PB1-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PB1-3 (super reach β). Also, when executing the variation display of the first special symbol, when the big hit is made during the time saving state, the variation pattern PB1-1 (normal reach), the variation pattern PB1-2 (super reach α), the variation One of the patterns PB1-3 (super reach β) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in this example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, when the small hit C (no time reduction) occurs in the normal state, the variation pattern is PC1-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PC1-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PC1-3 (super reach β) is determined. In addition, when executing the variation display of the first special symbol, when it becomes a small hit C during the time saving state, as the variation pattern, the variation pattern PC1-1 (normal reach), the variation pattern PC1-2 (super reach α) , variation patterns PC1-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in this example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, when the small hit A or B (with time reduction) occurs in the normal state, the variation pattern is as follows. Decide on one of the variation patterns PC1-4 (normal variation non-reach → development effect), variation pattern PC1-5 (short variation non-reach → development effect), variation pattern PC1-7 (normal reach → development effect) be done. Also, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, if it becomes a small hit A or B (with time saving) in the time saving state, the variation pattern PC1-6 (shortening variation non-reach → Developed effect) or variation pattern PC1-7 (normal reach→developed effect) is determined.

Next, the variation pattern of the second special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 9-4. As shown in FIG. 9-4, in this example, when performing the variation display of the second special symbol, if the deviation occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern PA3-1, the variation pattern PA3- 2 (non-reach in normal fluctuation → development production) is determined. Also, when executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is lost during the time saving state, the variation pattern PA3-3 (shortened variation), the variation pattern PA3-4 (non-shortened variation) reach → development production), fluctuation pattern PB3-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PB3-2 (normal reach → development production), fluctuation pattern PB3-3 (super reach α,) fluctuation pattern PB3-4 (super reach β) determined by

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if the big hit occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern PA3-5 (normal reach) is determined as the variation pattern. . In addition, when executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of a big hit during the time saving state, as the variation pattern, the variation pattern PC3-1 (normal reach), the variation pattern PC3-2 (super reach α), the variation One of the patterns PC3-3 (super reach β) is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4, when executing the variation display of the second special symbol, when the small hits A to C are made in the normal state, the variation pattern PA3-6 (normal reach) is used as the variation pattern. is determined by Also, when the small hit C occurs during the time saving state, the variation pattern is the variation pattern PD3-1 (normal reach), the variation pattern PD3-2 (super reach α), and the variation pattern PD3-3 (super reach β). Either is decided.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4, in this example, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, when the small hit A or B (with time saving) occurs during the time saving state, the variation pattern is as follows. Either of the variation pattern PD3-4 (non-reach with shortened variation→development effect) or the variation pattern PD3-5 (normal reach→development effect) is determined.

Further, in this example, in the normal symbol process processing (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (normal symbol hit), and based on the determination result, the normal symbol is displayed. Control is performed to execute variable display, but in this example, if it is in the normal state, it is decided to hit the normal pattern with a probability of 10%, and if it is in the time saving state, it is determined to be 90%. It is decided to hit the normal figure with probability. In addition, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) to open state based on the determination of the winning of the normal symbol in the normal symbol process (step S26).

Thus, in this example, the display result of the small win A or the small win B is derived and displayed, and the display result of the small win C is derived and displayed during the variable display as the specific effect. The rate at which development effects are executed is different. Specifically, in the case of the small win A or the small win B, the sticking effect is executed, but in the case of the small win C, the development effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconsistency between the look-ahead foretelling effect and the performance after the jackpot game state or after the time-saving state, so that the look-ahead foretelling effect can be suitably executed.

In the case of a small win A or a small win B (with time saving), a variation pattern common to the small win C (no time saving), loss or big win may be provided.

(Processing after closing the jackpot)
FIG. 9-5 is a flow chart showing the small hit closing post-processing (step 090IWS116) in the special symbol process processing in the characteristic part 090IW. In the small hit closing post-processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small win end display timer is set (step 090IWS451), and when the small win end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS453. When the small-hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 causes the small-hit end display timer to display corresponding to the time during which the small-hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small-hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 090IWS452), and the process ends.

At step 090IWS453, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small-hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small-hit end display time has elapsed (step 090IWS454). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the small hit end display time has passed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 090IWS455). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag and the time saving number counter (step 090IWS456). Also, the CPU 103 resets the V winning flag (step 090IWS457). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS458). In addition, the CPU 103 sets a timer for the time before the opening of the big winning opening (step 090IWS459).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit pre-start process (step 090IWS117) (step 090IWS460).

When it is confirmed in the processing of step 090IWS456 that the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is a small hit A (step 090IWS461). In the case of the small hit A, it is checked whether or not the non-V prize winning flag is set (step 090IWS461a). If the non-V winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465. When the non-V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag (step 090IWS462). "10" is set in the time saving number counter (step 090IWS463). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a small hit end designation A command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS464). Next, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465.

Further, when the CPU 103 confirms that it is not the small win A (N in step 090IWS461), it confirms whether it is the small win B (step 090IWS467). In the case of the small hit B, it is confirmed whether or not the non-V winning flag is set (step 090IWS467a). If the non-V winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465. When the non-V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag (step 090IWS468). "5" is set in the time saving number counter (step 090IWS469). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a small hit end designation B command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS470). Next, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465.

Further, when the CPU 103 confirms that it is not a small hit B (N in step 090IWS467), it performs control to transmit a small win end designation C command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS471). Next, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465.

At step 090IWS465, the CPU 103 resets the small hit flag (step 090IWS465). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a small hit end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS462). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 090IWS110) (step 090IWS463).

In addition, depending on whether it is a small hit A or B (with time saving) or a small win C (no time saving), a value is set in the timer for measuring the ending period after closing the small win, but the small win A Alternatively, the value is set so that the ending period in case of B (with time saving) is longer than the ending period in case of small win C (without time saving).

(Waiting process per special figure)
FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7 are flowcharts showing the special figure per waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process shown in FIG. 7 in the characterizing part 090IW. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the big hit stop flag is set (step 090IWS871). The jackpot stop flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot pattern has already been derived and displayed but before the jackpot start designation command is received, and is set at step 090IWS875 to be described later. If the jackpot stop flag is set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS876.

If the big hit stop flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the small hit stop flag is set (step 090IWS872). The small-hit stop flag is a flag indicating that the small-hit symbol has already been derived and displayed but before the small-hit start designation command is received, and is set at step 090IWS883 to be described later. If the small hit stop flag is set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS885.

If the small-hit stop flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbols (losing symbols, big-hit symbols, small-hit symbols) (step 090IWS873).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS873 (Y of step 090IWS874), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag (step 090IWS875). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 090IWS876). Whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 090IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start designation command is not received, the process is terminated as it is.

If the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 090IWS877). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the big hit (step 090IWS878). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 090IWS879), the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), the control of the performance device (the image display device 5 as the performance component, various lamps as the performance component, and the speaker 27 as the performance component) is controlled (step 090IWS880).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during the big hit (step 090IWS881).

If it is not the case that the big hit design is stop-displayed in the process of step 090IWS873 (N of step 090IWS874), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit design is stop-displayed in the process of step 090IWS882 (step 090IWS882). . When the small winning design is stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS882 (Y of step 090IWS882), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small winning stop flag (step 090IWS883). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a small hit start designation command is received (step 090IWS885). Whether or not the small hit start designation command is received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not a flag indicating that the small hit start designation command has been received is set in the command analysis process. If the small hit start designation command is not received, the process is terminated as it is.

If the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the small hit stop flag (step 090IWS886). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is a small win A or a small win B (with short working hours) (step 090IWS887a). If it is a small win A or a small win B, a process table of a small win notification effect for informing a small win and a right hitting instruction A for instructing a right hitting is selected (step 090IWS887b). In addition, if it is not a small win A or a small win B, that is, if it is a small win C (no time reduction), a V winning promotion effect that encourages the game ball to enter the V winning hole and a right hitting instruction B that instructs right hitting process data (step 090IWS887b). Note that the right-handed instruction A and the right-handed instruction B are different in form. Also, the right-handed instruction differs from the right-handed instruction C in the time saving state. For example, the difference in mode is the size, position, and content of the image of the instruction to hit to the right.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 090IWS888), the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the performance devices (the image display device 5 as the performance component, various lamps as the performance component, and the speaker 27 as the performance component) is executed (step 090IWS889). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period during the small win game (step 090IWS890).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during the small hit (step 090IWS891).

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in an open state during the small winning game, the effect corresponding to the opening of the special variable winning ball device is provided as the small winning medium effect during the small winning effect process. executed.

If it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small win will be made (N of step 090IWS882), that is, if it is determined that the loss is determined, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect control process flag. The value is updated according to the display start waiting process (step S170) (step 090IWS895).

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of an effect in the case of a small win A or a small win B (with time saving) and a case of a small win C (without time saving) will be described.

FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10 show screen transitions in the case of a small win A or a small win B (with short working hours) in the normal state (low probability/low base state).

As shown in FIG. 9-8(A), when it is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), the image display device 5 corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the upper left. A small pattern 090IW100 on the left, middle, and right is displayed. In this example, since the starting winning to the first starting winning opening occurs in most cases in the normal state, the game ball enters the first starting winning opening and the variable display of the small pattern 090IW100 is started. . In conjunction with the variable display of the small pattern 090IW100, left, middle and right decorative patterns 090IW101 larger than the small pattern 090IW100 start to fluctuate at the center of the screen.

As shown in FIGS. 9-8 (B) and (C), it is assumed that the right and left decorative symbols 090IW101 are stopped and normal reach is achieved due to the jackpot symbol. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 remains displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 9-8(D), it is assumed that the middle decorative symbol 090IW101 is stopped and the missing symbol is stopped. At this time, the decorative pattern 090IW101 is not in a completely stopped state, but in a temporarily stopped state accompanied by shaking. In addition, the small pattern 090IW100 remains displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 9-8(E), the temporarily stopped decorative symbol 090IW101 is once erased, and the development effect is executed. In this example, a character 090IW102 indicating that it is controlled to the time saving state is displayed at the center of the screen larger than the small pattern 090IW100. In addition, the small pattern 090IW100 remains displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 9-8(F), after the development effect shown in FIG. 9-8(E) is executed, the temporarily stopped decorative symbol 090IW101 is variably displayed again. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 remains displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIGS. 9-8 (G) and (H), it is assumed that the left and right decorative symbols 090IW101 are stopped and the reach state of the small hit A or the small hit B is reached. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 remains displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (I), it is assumed that the remaining decorative symbols 090IW101 are stopped and the small winning pattern "135" of the small winning A or B is stopped. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 also stops at "135".

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (J), when the small winning symbol "135" stops in the small symbol 090IW100 and the decorative symbol 090IW101, the small winning occurs in the pre-opening time before the special variable winning ball device is opened. A character 090IW103 indicating the start of the game, "small hit!"

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (K), when the small-hit game is started, the background A during the small-hit game is displayed, and the characters "in the small-hit" notifying that the small-hit game is in progress. 090IW105 is displayed. Further, in the case of the small win A or the small win B, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the V winning hole, and it is difficult to generate a big win. For this reason, although it is more disappointing for the player than the small win C that tends to generate a big win, in the case of the small win A or the small win B, it is controlled to the time saving state by becoming V non-winning. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter the special variable winning ball device, a right-handed instruction display (right-handed instruction A) 090IW106 is displayed, and a right-handed instruction is given so as not to arouse the player's sense of regret. The display (right hitting instruction A) 090IW106 is displayed in a small and inconspicuous manner at the bottom right of the screen. The right-handed instruction display 090IW106 is composed of the characters "Right-handed" and one arrow pointing to the right. In addition, in order to make the right-handed instruction display 090IW106 inconspicuous, the background A during the small hit is a flashy background that attracts the player's interest, such as the appearance of a character.

As shown in FIG. 9-9(L), when the small win game state ends without winning the V winning slot, an end screen is displayed during the ending period of the small win. For example, a background and characters corresponding to the end screen are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (M), after the end screen of the small winning game is displayed, the start screen of the time saving state is displayed. For example, an image to the effect that the time saving state is started and the number of fluctuations in the time saving state are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (N), when the display of the start screen of the time saving state is finished, the small pattern 090IW100 and the left, middle and right decorative patterns 090IW101 start to be variably displayed, and the control of the time saving state is started. When the control of the time saving state is started, the background of the time saving state is displayed, and the remaining number of fluctuations 090IW107 in the time saving state is displayed on the upper right of the screen. Furthermore, during the time-saving state, a right-handed instruction display (right-handed instruction C) 090IW108 is displayed at the top of the screen in order to enter the game ball toward the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B. The right-handed instruction display 090IW108 in the time-saving state is composed of characters "right-handed" and two rightward arrows. Note that the right-handed hitting instruction display 090IW108 is larger than the right-handed hitting instruction display 090IW106, and the display position is also different.

As shown in FIGS. 9-9 (O), FIGS. 9-10 (P) and (Q), it is assumed that the decorative symbol 090IW101 has stopped, the small symbol 090IW100 has stopped, and the missing symbol has stopped.

As shown in FIG. 9-10(R), when the next variation is started and the variation display of the decoration symbol 090IW101 and the small symbol 090IW100 is started, the number of remaining variations 090IW107 is subtracted. Henceforth, the same control is performed until a time saving state is complete|finished.

FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 show screen transitions in the case of a small win C (no time reduction) in the normal state (low probability/low base state).

As shown in FIG. 9-11(A), when it is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), the image display device 5 corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the upper left. A small pattern 090IW100 on the left, middle, and right is displayed. In this example, since the starting winning to the first starting winning opening occurs in most cases in the normal state, the game ball enters the first starting winning opening and the variable display of the small pattern 090IW100 is started. . In conjunction with the variable display of the small pattern 090IW100, left, middle and right decorative patterns 090IW101 larger than the small pattern 090IW100 start to fluctuate at the center of the screen.

As shown in FIGS. 9-11 (B), (C), and (D), it is assumed that left, middle, and right decorative symbols 090IW101 have stopped, and the small winning symbol "357" of the small winning C has stopped. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 also stops at "357".

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (E), when the small winning symbol "357" stops in the small symbol 090IW100 and the decorative symbol 090IW101, the small winning occurs in the pre-opening time before the special variable winning ball device is opened. A character 090IW103 indicating the start of the game, "small hit!"

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (F), when the small winning game is started, the background B during the small winning is displayed, and the game ball is shot aiming at the V winning opening of the special variable winning ball device. A character 090IW109 saying "Aim for V!" is displayed. Also, in the case of a small hit C, game balls are likely to enter the V winning opening, and a big hit is likely to occur. For this reason, the player is happy because a large number of balls can be obtained. Therefore, in order to cause the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device and generate a big hit, the right-handed instruction display (right-handed instruction B) 090IW110 is displayed, and the right-handed instruction display 090IW110 is greatly conspicuous in the center of the screen. to display. The right-handed instruction display 090IW110 consists of the characters "Right-handed" and three rightward arrows. In order to make the right-hand hitting instruction display 090IW107 more conspicuous, the background B during the small hit is a simple screen without characters or the like, and is a plain background that does not attract the player's interest. The right-handed instruction display 090IW110 is larger than the right-handed instruction display 090IW106 in the small win A or the small hit B and the right-handed instruction display 090IW108 during the time saving, and the display position is also different.

In this way, the right-handed instruction display 090IW106 for the small hit A or the small-hit B, the right-handed instruction display 090IW110 for the small hit C, and the right-handed instruction display 090IW108 during the time saving have different sizes, display positions, and display modes ( number of arrows) are different.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (G), when the small winning game state ends with the winning of the V winning opening, it is suggested that the winning occurs at the V winning opening during the ending period of the small winning and the big winning occurs. The letter 090IW104 of "V" is displayed in the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 9-12(H), characters 090IW111 of "ROUND2" suggesting the start of a big winning game (second round) are displayed in the center of the screen in a size larger than the small pattern 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (I), when the big win game (second round) is started, the background during the big win is displayed, and the game is played in the big win game state. The same goes for the third and fourth rounds. In this example, an example of a small hit C during the normal state is explained, but even if a small win C is made during the time saving state, the same effect as described above is performed during the small win game, and a small win is performed. A larger right-handed instruction display is performed than in the case of a hit A or a small hit B. - 特許庁In addition, different performances may be executed depending on whether the small win C is achieved during the normal state or the small win C during the time saving state, and the size of the right-handed instruction display may be changed.

Thus, in this example, the special variable winning ball device is in the open state when the display result of the small win A or the small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of the small win C is derived and displayed. The effect executed when controlled by is different. Specifically, when the small hit A or the small hit B, the characters 090IW105 indicating that the small hit is being played during the small hit game are displayed (Fig. 9-9 ( K)), characters 090IW109 saying "Aim for V!" are displayed to notify that a game ball is to be shot aiming at the V winning hole of the special variable winning ball device (FIG. 9-11 (F)). Therefore, when the display result of the small hit is derived and displayed, it is possible to suitably execute the effect.

Also, in this example, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided so that a game ball passing through a right-handed path in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the right side of the game area can enter. Then, a launch promotion display relating to the launch promotion of the game ball to the right-handed path is performed, and when the display result of the small win A or the small win B is derived and displayed, and the display result of the small win C is derived and displayed. The launch promotion display is performed in different manners from time to time. Specifically, when the small hit C is different from the small hits A and B, it is easy to generate a big hit. (see FIG. 9-11(F)) is displayed. Therefore, the game can be favorably progressed.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-8(E), it is possible to execute an effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state as a forewarning effect of a small win. That is, the character 090IW102 of "Saving time?" is displayed to suggest that the development effect is executed and the control to the time saving state is performed. Therefore, since the variations of the pre-reading notice effects are increased, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Modification)
Next, a modification of the effect executed in this characterizing portion 090IW will be described. Hereinafter, in the modified example, in FIG. 9-2, when the display result of the small win A or the small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of the small win C is derived and displayed, the special variable winning By changing the opening pattern of the ball device, the easiness of winning the game ball into the V winning hole is changed, and an example of controlling whether or not to control to the time saving state was given, but in the modified example, a small hit The special variable winning ball device is opened according to the same pattern when the display result of A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed. By varying the pre-opening time of the device, the easiness of winning a game ball into a V winning opening is varied to control whether or not to control to a time-saving state. The description of the parts common to those in FIG. 9-2 is omitted.

FIGS. 9-13 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the opening pattern of the small winning game. It should be noted that the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing plate is common between the small win A or the small win B (with time saving) and the small win C (no time saving).

As shown in FIG. 9-13 (A), in the case of a small hit A or B (with time reduction), after the small hit game is started at timing S1, after the pre-opening period t1 (fanfare time) elapses, at timing S2 A special variable winning ball device is controlled to an open state. By setting the pre-opening period t1 in this manner, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in an open state when the V winning opening opening/closing plate is controlled to be in a closed state. By repeating the operation of opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds, closing the special winning opening for 1 second, and then opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds again, the special winning opening is opened 10 times with one small win. be released.

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (B), in the case of a small hit C (no time reduction), after the small win game is started at timing S1, a pre-opening period t2 (fanfare time) shorter than the pre-opening period t1 is set. After a lapse of time, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to open at timing S2. By setting the pre-opening period t2 in this manner, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in an open state when the V winning opening opening/closing plate is controlled to be in an open state. Then, in the same pattern as in FIG. 9-13 (A), by repeating the operation of opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds, closing the special winning opening for 1 second, and then opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds again, A special winning opening is opened 10 times with one small hit.

As described above, in this example, when the display result of the small win A or the small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of the small win C is derived and displayed, the same pattern is used for the special variable winning balls. The device can be controlled in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to the time saving state, and it is possible to prevent the fact that which display result to be a small hit is derived and displayed is detected in advance.

Further, in this example, when the display result of the small win A or B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of the small win C is derived and displayed, the V winning opening opening/closing plate performs the same operation. The special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in an open state when the display result of the small win A or the small win B is derived and displayed and when the display result of the small win C is derived and displayed. The period to is different. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control the time saving state.

(Other variations)
It should be noted that, in this characteristic portion 090IW, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of small wins that cannot be won by a game ball in the V winning hole. Then, as a plurality of types of small hits, a small hit that shifts to a time-saving state when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening even though it has won a special winning opening, and a small winning that enters the special winning opening but enters the V winning opening A small hit that does not shift to a time-saving state when the ball does not win a prize is provided. Then, a small hit that shifts to a time-saving state when a game ball does not enter the V winning opening even though it has won a special winning opening, and when a game ball has won a special winning opening but does not enter the V winning opening. It is possible to configure so as to execute a different performance for a small hit that does not shift to the time saving state immediately. Either one of the effect during fluctuation and during the small winning game state may be different, or both may be different.

In addition, in each of the characteristic portions and modifications described above, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always exemplified by the transition via the big hit state or the small hit state, but the present invention It is not limited to this, for example, when a time saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) may be made without operating the special variable winning ball device 7. .

In addition, as the above-described time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be used as part of the winning symbols or may be used as part of the small winning symbols.

In addition, when performing the lottery processing related to the derivation display of the time saving pattern, the lottery may be executed using a special random number for the time saving pattern lottery in these lottery processing, or the lottery random number of the lost pattern and the big hit pattern The lottery may be performed using random numbers for other lotteries such as lottery random numbers for small winning symbols, random numbers for judging big win lottery, and lottery random numbers for falling lottery.

Further, these time-saving patterns may be a plurality of types of patterns, and may be used together with a combination of patterns displayed as other patterns, which are lost patterns.

In addition, in the case of performing the lottery of the time-saving design, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving design does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving design in all the setting values are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different probabilities between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Also, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing time-saving symbols, even if a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the start opening (first start winning opening, 2nd starting prize opening) is acceptable.

In addition, regarding the winning of the time-saving design lottery, when using a special random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the lottery of the time-saving design is a small hit design. When a random number is used, a specific small hit pattern random number is used as the winning value, and when the random number for the falling lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, the random number for the falling lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time-saving design may be won when the game ball passes through the time-saving area.

In addition, regarding the winning in the case of lottery of time-saving patterns, if random numbers are used for the lottery of time-saving patterns, a specific random number will be the winning value. A jackpot pattern random number value can be used as a winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performances other than the big hit probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the setting value cannot be changed.

Further, the judgment timing of the lottery result of the time saving pattern may be executed at the timing after the big hit judgment. In addition, the time-saving pattern lottery is executed only in the low-probability low-base state, without executing it in the time-saving state (high base) or high probability, regardless of which random value is used for the lottery. . However, when the time-saving pattern is derived and displayed in the state of the time-saving state, even if the number of times of time-saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each game machine.

In addition, as for the number of times of time saving when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of times of time saving according to the winning value (symbol) and each game state. Moreover, it is also possible to make the condition for providing time saving different for each time saving pattern.

Moreover, when the number of times of shortening of working hours differs according to the shortening of working hours pattern, it is possible to change the sorting lottery of the shortening of working hours pattern between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

Further, even when the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving given may differ according to the game state at that time. However, it is required that it is predetermined for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result of "zero number of times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving pattern in the low-probability low base state.

Also, a derivation lottery for time saving end patterns (time saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times of time saving may be the number of times until the time saving end patterns are derived and displayed after the start of time saving or until the big win patterns are derived and displayed. In other words, without setting the number of times of time saving, in principle, it may be unlimited.

In addition, the number of times of time saving and the provision conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving pattern and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of the big hit.

Further, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the timing to be controlled to the time saving state is the time when the pattern fixing time of the time saving pattern has passed. However, when a small winning pattern random number is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, and when the small winning is won and shifts to the time saving state, the timing of controlling to the time saving state is the end of the small winning operation.

Also, in the case of lottery using structures, the timing of control to the time-saving state is the timing of the completion of the operation of the structures in the game state (for example, small winning state) in which the structures are operated.

In addition, in the case of a game machine controlled to a high-probability low-base state over a predetermined number of variable display times after a big hit (so-called specified number-of-times probability variable machine (ST machine)), a high-probability low-base state when the amusement center is opened. , and after the high-probability low-base state is executed a specified number of times of variable display and ends, control may be performed to the time-saving state.

In addition, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed when the time saving limiter function is installed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated.

Also, the design fixing time of the time saving pattern may be different from the design fixing time of the other patterns.

In addition, in this example, it is possible to configure so as to control to the time-saving state (so-called ceiling) when the number of fluctuations of the pattern in the normal state reaches a predetermined number. Specifically, a counter is provided to count the number of fluctuations until the time-saving state is controlled, and the counter starts counting when the RAM is initialized (when the clear switch is operated, when the settings are changed, etc.) or when the big hit ends. do. Then, when the counted number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times, control is performed to reduce working hours. The counting method is to determine whether or not the number of times of variation has reached a predetermined number by subtracting the value set in the counter for each variation and determining whether or not the count value has reached 0. Alternatively, the value of the counter may be incremented for each change, and it may be determined whether or not the number of times of change has reached a predetermined number. In addition, you may determine the predetermined number of times until it controls to a time saving state by lottery. As a result, the player does not know the timing of control to the time-saving state, so the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the predetermined number of times n, which is the number of changes in the pattern until it is controlled to the time saving state, is, for example, when the denominator of the jackpot probability is P (for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/319, P = 319). It is possible that 2.5P≤n≤3.0P. In addition, the predetermined number of times N, which is the number of changes in the pattern until the time-saving state is controlled, is, for example, when the denominator of the jackpot probability is P (for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/319, P = 319). It is possible to have 0.4P≦N≦3.8P. Note that these are examples, and P is not limited to these ranges.

Also, the initialization of the RAM (at the time of operating the clear switch, at the time of setting change, etc.) and the setting of the predetermined number of times P at the time of the big hit may take over the number of times before the initialization. In this case, since it can be expected that the number of fluctuations reaches the predetermined number of times P soon after the game is started and the time-saving state is controlled, the operating rate of the pachinko game machine can be increased.
On the other hand, in the initialization of the RAM (at the time of operating the clear switch, at the time of setting change, etc.) and the setting of the predetermined number of times P at the time of the big win, the number of times before initialization may not be inherited. In this case, any player can play under fair conditions.

In addition, when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times and is controlled to the time saving state, the time saving state may be terminated when the number of fluctuations reaches the upper limit number of times, or the time saving state may be continued until the next big hit. good.

Note that counting of the number of fluctuations may be restarted when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number. In the case of this configuration, for example, if an upper limit number of times of the time saving state is provided and the upper limit number of times is larger than the predetermined number of times until the time saving state is controlled, the count value reaches the predetermined number of times during the time saving state. Since the upper limit number of times is set again, the time saving state can be continued until the next big hit while setting the upper limit number of times.

It is also possible not to count the number of fluctuations during the time saving state. In this case, when the upper limit number of times of the time saving state is provided, the time saving state ends when the number of fluctuations reaches the upper limit number of times.

In addition, when the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the first number, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the time saving state, and if the lottery is not won, the time reduction is performed when the number of fluctuations reaches the second number. You may make it control to a state (what is called a pattern which reaches a ceiling via a false ceiling).

In addition, when the ceiling is provided in the characteristic part IW090, and when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is controlled. The counter value continues counting without resetting. In the case of a small win C (without time reduction), when a big win does not occur, the value of the counter is not reset and continues counting. As a result, when a small win A or a small win B (with time saving) occurs, the count value may reach a predetermined number of times during the time saving after the small winning game ends, and the time saving state may be extended. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the development after the end of the small winning game. In addition, even if a small win C (no time reduction) occurs and no big win occurs, there is a possibility that control will be performed in a time saving state immediately after the small win game ends, so there is a sense of expectation for the development after the small win game ends. can have.

As described above, the characteristic portion 090IW discloses the configuration of the game machine shown in (means 1) to (means 8) below.

(Means 1)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern),
A state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in a normal state;
It has a special area (for example, a V prize opening), and is controlled to a first state (for example, open state) in which game media can easily enter, and a second state (for example, closed state) in which game media cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Possible variable means (for example, a special variable winning ball device),
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion that executes step S76 in the production control CPU 120)
When a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed, the variable means can be controlled to the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, a game control the part that executes step S118 in the microcomputer 100),
The special display results are a first special display result (for example, a display result of a small win A or a small win B) and a second special display result different from the first special display result (for example, a small win C). display results), and
The state control means is
When the game medium does not pass through the special area when the first special display result (for example, the display result of the small win A or the small win B) is derived and displayed in the normal state, the special state is entered. Control (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, step 090IWS462 when Y at step 090IWS461a in the game control microcomputer 100, step 090IWS467a when Y at step 090IWS468 part),
In the normal state, if the game medium does not pass through the special area when the second special display result (for example, the display result of the small win C) is derived and displayed, the special state is not controlled ( For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, when step 090IWS467 in the game control microcomputer 100 is N, steps 090IWS461a and step 090IWS462 and steps 090IWS467a and step 090IWS468 are not executed),
When the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed, the ease with which the game medium passes through the special area differs (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-2 part shown),
The effect executing means performs different effects when the variable means is in the first state depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed or when the second special display result is derived and displayed. It is executable (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the part that executes steps 090IWS887b, 887c in the effect control CPU 120, the part shown in FIG. 9-9 (K) and FIG. 9-11 (F)).
According to such a configuration, when the special display result is derived and displayed, an effect can be preferably executed.

In this example, an example was given in which the state is shifted to the time-saving state after the end of the small winning game on the condition that the player has won the special winning slot but has not won the V prize, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the game ball does not enter the special winning hole in the case of a small hit, the state may be shifted to the time saving state after the small win game is completed.

(Means 2) In means 1,
Depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed or when the second special display result is derived and displayed, the ratio of execution of the specific effect in the effect during variable display is different (for example, FIG. 9- 3. As shown in FIG. 9-4, the development effect is performed at the time of the small win A or the small win B, and is not performed at the time of the small win C).
According to such a configuration, inconsistency between the look-ahead foretelling effect and the effect after the advantageous state or the special state can be avoided, so the look-ahead foretelling effect can be preferably executed.

(Means 3) In means 1 or 2,
The variable winning device is provided so that a game medium passing through a predetermined path (for example, a right-handed path) can enter,
Launch promotion display means for performing a launch promotion display (for example, right-handed instruction display) relating to promotion of launching of the game medium to the predetermined path. For example, as shown in FIG. part),
The launch promotion display means performs the launch promotion display in different modes when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, FIG. 9). -7, the part that executes steps 090IWS887b and 887c in the effect control CPU 120, the part shown in FIGS. 9-9 (K) and 9-11 (F)).
According to such a configuration, the game can be favorably progressed.

In addition, in this example, the special variable winning ball device is opened so as not to win the V prize at the time of the small win A or the small win B that shifts to the time saving state after the end of the small win game on the condition that the V prize is not won. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a small win may be provided in which the state is shifted to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game under the condition that the V prize is not won, and the special variable winning ball device is opened to facilitate the V prize.

(Means 4) In any one of means 1 to 3,
The variable winning means is controllable to the first state by different patterns when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, part shown in Figure 9-2).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to the special state.

(Means 5) In any one of means 1 to 4,
The variable winning means can be controlled to the first state by the same pattern when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the special state is to be controlled, and it is possible to prevent any special display result to be derived and displayed from being detected in advance.

(Means 6) In any one of means 1 to 5,
The variable winning means has a movable member (for example, a V winning opening opening/closing plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed. ),
When the first special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member is in a state of obstructing passage of the game medium to the special area,
When the second special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member is in a state that does not hinder the passage of the game medium to the special area ( For example, the part shown in FIG. 9-2).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to the special state.

(Means 7) In any one of means 1 to 6,
The variable winning means has a movable member (for example, a V winning opening opening/closing plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed. ),
The period until the variable winning means is controlled to the first state differs between when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed. 9-13).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to the special state.

(Means 8) In any one of means 1 to 7,
A plurality of types of special display results in which the game medium does not pass through the special area,
The plurality of types of special display results are the special display result controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area, and the special display result controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area. said special display result not controlled by state;
Controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area When the special display result is derived and displayed, and when the game medium does not pass through the special area, the special state is controlled. A different effect is executed when the special display result that is not displayed is derived and displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to the special state.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 113IW)
Next, the characterizing portion 113IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characterizing part 113IW, as a game state, it is controlled in either a normal state, a time saving state, or a probability variable state (also controlled in a time saving state). In this example, in the time saving state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, the average normal figure fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, compared to the normal state Increases the probability of winning in the normal game. For example, in the normal state, the probability of hitting the normal pattern is 10%, while in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the normal pattern is increased to 90%, and the game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port). easier to do. In addition, not only such an aspect, for example, in the time saving state, compared with the normal state, by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) It may be configured so that game balls can easily win prizes.

In addition, in this example, in the variable probability state, the probability of becoming a big hit (big hit probability) is increased compared to the normal state and the time saving state. In addition, in this example, when it is controlled to a probability variable state, it is also controlled to a time saving state.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the variation display result is a big hit and is controlled to the variable probability state or the time saving state after the end of the big win game, even if the variation display result is a loss, the time saving losing pattern is derived and displayed. It may be controlled to a time saving state based on what has been done.

Furthermore, in this example, after the gaming machine is powered on (when the RAM clearing process is executed) or after the occurrence of a big win, even if the fluctuation display is finished a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example), the next big win will not occur. Even if does not occur, it may be controlled to a short working hours state (relief working hours). This relief time reduction is provided in order to rescue a player who did not get a big win despite playing the game for a long period of time (for example, to suppress the amount invested in the game). , is a game state called "play time".

Hereinafter, the time-saving state controlled based on the occurrence of a big hit is "time-saving state A" or "time-saving state via a big hit", and the time-saving state controlled based on the time-saving design being stopped is "time-saving state B" or "time saving state via time saving loss", in this example, after turning on the power to the game machine (when RAM clear processing is executed) or after a big hit occurs, a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) The time-saving state controlled when the next big hit does not occur even after the variable display is ended may be called "time-saving state C" or "time-saving state via relief time-saving state".

In addition, in the time saving state, (1) control to increase the normal pattern per probability, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, and (3) open time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Part of the control in (4) may not be performed. For example, the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the time-saving loss, and the time-saving state via the relief time-saving via (1) to (4) may be different in which control is performed, may be the same.

Also, for example, the normal pattern probability in the non-time saving state (normal state) is set to 100% (no normal pattern deviation), or the normal pattern probability is substantially reduced to 100% by making the normal pattern deviation probability extremely low, In the time-saving state, without performing the control of (1) (that is, without changing the probability per normal pattern from the non-time-saving state), (2) to (4) Some or all of the controls may be performed. good.

In addition, it is preferable to define the number of times of fluctuation n until the relief time reduction is controlled and the number of times of reduction of time N in the relief time reduction as follows.

2.5P≤n≤3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750-900, and the number of time reductions N is 120-1140. In this example, since the jackpot probability differs for each set value s, the number of fluctuations ns (set value s: 1 to 6) for each set value is as follows. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "1" is about 1/319, the number of variations n1 is 797.5-957. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "2" is about 1/310, the number of variations n2 is 775-930. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "3" is about 1/300, the variation count n3 is 750-900. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "4" is about 1/290, the number of variations n4 is 725-870. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "5" is about 1/280, the number of variations n5 is 700-840. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "6" is about 1/270, the number of variations n6 is 675-810. The following description will be made assuming that "800", which can be applied to any set value, is set as the number of fluctuations n. Similarly, "800" is set as the number of times of shortening of working hours N, which is applicable when any set value is set.

In addition, as the number of fluctuations n, a value that can be applied regardless of the set value is set, but it is applicable when the set value "1" with the lowest jackpot probability is set. It is sufficient to set the value to be obtained (as described above, the number of fluctuations n1 is 797.5 to 957). That is, a value such as "900" may be set as the number of fluctuations n.

Similarly, as the number of times of shortening time N, a value that can be applied when any setting value is set is set, but when the setting value "1" with the lowest jackpot probability is set Any value can be set.

In this example, the number of times of variation n and the number of times of saving time N are the same value 800, but the number of times of variation n> the number of times of saving time N may be the same, and the number of times of variation n < the number of times of saving time N good.

(Variation pattern table)
10-1 and 10-2 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 113IW. Among them, FIG. 10-1(A) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table A for big hits excluding relief rush time variation. Also, FIG. 10-1(B) shows a specific example of the deviation pattern table B in the normal state. Further, FIG. 10-1(C) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table C for losing during the time-saving state controlled via the big hit. In addition, FIG. 10-1(D) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table D for the loss during the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss.

In addition, FIG. 10-1(E) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table E for deviation during the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving. Also, FIGS. 10-2(F) and (G) show specific examples of variation pattern tables F and G for deviations within 10 variations immediately before the relief time is shortened. Of these, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 10-2 (F) is a variation pattern table immediately before relief time reduction selected when the number of pending memories (for example, the number of total pending memories) is 3 or less. In addition, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 10-2 (G) is a variation pattern table immediately before relief time reduction selected when the number of pending memories (eg, the number of total pending memories) is 4 or more.

It should be noted that, if the shift occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern tables F and G shown in FIGS. 10-2 (F) and (G) are used to select the fluctuation pattern. In the period from when the RAM is cleared to when the jackpot hits, the variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table B shown in FIG. is.

Also, FIG. 10-2(H) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table H for the loss in the probability variation state. However, in this example, even if the variable probability state or the time saving state, if the number of pending storage is not 1 or more (if there is no pending storage), the variation pattern table B is used to determine the variation pattern.

Also, FIGS. 10-2(I) and (J) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables I and J for failure in short-time relief rush fluctuation. Of these, the variation pattern table I shown in FIG. 10-2 (I) is a variation pattern table selected when it is in the non-time saving state (normal state). Further, the variation pattern table J shown in FIG. 10-2 (J) is a variation pattern table that is selected in the time saving state.

It should be noted that if the relief time-saving rush fluctuation is lost, the fluctuation pattern table I and J shown in FIGS. In the period from being hit to hitting the jackpot, even if it is lost in the relief rush fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 10-1 (B) is used to select the fluctuation pattern.

Also, FIGS. 10-2(K) and (L) show specific examples of the variation pattern tables K and L for big hits in the short-time relief rush variation. Of these, the variation pattern table K shown in FIG. 10-2 (K) is a variation pattern table selected when it is in the non-time saving state (normal state). In addition, the variation pattern table L shown in FIG. 10-2 (L) is a variation pattern table that is selected in the time saving state.

It should be noted that, if the relief time-saving rush fluctuation is a big hit, a fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables K and L shown in FIGS. In the period from the start to the big hit, the variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table A shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10-1 (A), in this example, when a big hit is achieved, the variation patterns are variation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PB2. -3 (super reach β). It should be noted that the variation pattern for the big hit has a special figure variation time that is longer by 10000 ms than the variation pattern for the loss that performs the same ready-to-win effect. After performing a reach effect of the same length as the loss variation, a blessing effect to congratulate the big hit, and a re-lottery effect to make it look as if the lottery is being held again (for example, 10R big hit A) This is because a re-lottery effect is performed in which the big hit pattern shown is temporarily stopped and changed to the big hit pattern showing the 10R big hit B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), in this example, when there is a deviation in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach) , variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (C), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time saving state controlled via the big hit, the variation pattern PA1-2 (super shortened variation), variation Pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (D), in this example, if the deviation occurs during the time reduction state controlled via the time reduction deviation, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation), Variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (E), in this example, if the deviation occurs during the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the variation pattern PA1-4 (ultra ultra-shortening variation) , variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 10-1 (C), FIG. 10-1 (D), and FIG. 10-1 (E), in this example, during the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (super shortening fluctuation) and fluctuation Pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) and fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) are determined at a high rate, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state. Furthermore, even in the same time-saving state, when the time-saving state is controlled via the time-saving deviation, compared to the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot, the selection probability of the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation) is 80. %, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, during the time-saving state controlled via the relief time-saving, the selection rate of the variation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-ultra-shortening variation) is as high as 99%, and when the time-saving state is controlled via the time-saving loss or the jackpot In comparison, the average fluctuation time is shorter.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (F), in this example, if the shift occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of pending memories (for example, the number of total pending memories) is 3 or less. For example, as a fluctuation pattern, fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) Either The probability of being determined and being determined to the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation) is as high as 90%. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (G), in this example, if the shift occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of pending memories (for example, the number of total pending memories) is 4 or more. For example, as a fluctuation pattern, fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) The probability of being determined and being determined to the variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation) is as high as 90%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (H), in this example, if there is a deviation during the probability variable state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation), the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach ), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 (C) and (E), when determining the variation pattern of the loss variation, the time saving state via the relief time saving is shorter than the time saving state via the jackpot gaming state The selection rate of variation patterns having variation time is high. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the relief time is reached after playing a game for a long period of time.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 (C) and (E), when determining the variation pattern of the loss variation, the time saving state via the relief time saving is more reach than the time saving state via the jackpot gaming state The selection rate of variation patterns accompanied by production is low. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the relief time is reached after playing a game for a long period of time.

As shown in FIG. 10-2 (H), in this example, in the probability variable state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation) is determined with a high probability of 90%, and the average variation time is further averaged than in the time-saving state. is getting shorter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (I), in this example, if the relief time-saving rush fluctuation in the non-time-saving state is missed, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (time-saving rush loss). be done. When the variation pattern PA3-1 is determined, a time-saving rush effect is performed to notify transition (entering) to a time-saving state via relief time-saving.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (J), in this example, if the relief time-saving rush fluctuation in the time-saving state results in a deviation, the variation pattern is determined as a variation pattern PA3-2 (time-saving promotion is lost). be. When the variation pattern PA3-2 is determined, a reduction in working hours promotion effect is performed to inform the transition to the reduction in working hours state via the reduction in working hours (promotion). Hereinafter, the transition from the time saving state via the time saving loss to the time saving state via the relief time saving may be referred to as “promoting”.

In addition, both the time-saving rush effect and the time-saving promotion effect are effects that are performed when control is performed to the time-saving state C, but the content of the effect is different. Specifically, in the time saving production, the character string indicating control to the time saving state C is displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 10-12 (G)), while in the time saving promotion production, the time saving state C is displayed. A character string indicating control and promotion is displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 10-15(D)). In addition, in the time-saving rush production, a right-handed notification image is displayed to promote right-handed hitting (see FIG. 10-12 (H)), while in the time-saving promotion production, the right-handed notification image is not displayed. (See FIG. 10-15(D)). In this way, when it is controlled from the normal state to the time saving state C, and when it is controlled (promoted) from the time saving state B to the time saving state C, the notification mode of controlling to the time saving state C is different. ing. As a result, the player can be given a special feeling when the time saving state is promoted, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, when it is controlled from the normal state to the time saving state C and when it is controlled (promoted) from the time saving state B to the time saving state C, the notification mode of controlling to the time saving state C is common. good too. For example, in any case, the variation pattern PA3-1 may be selected to perform the time-saving rush effect. As a result, an increase in the number of variation patterns and the number of effect data can be suppressed, and the storage capacity can be saved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (K), in this example, when the big hit is achieved in the relief time-saving rush fluctuation in the non-time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is changed to the fluctuation pattern PA3-3 (time-saving rush fake jackpot). It is determined. When the variation pattern PA3-3 is determined, after the time-saving rush production for notifying the transition to the time-saving state via the relief time-saving (entering) is performed, it is notified that it is a big hit, and the blessing production. Or a re-lottery performance will be held. The production performed after the time-saving rush production is performed may be a production that can be executed even when another variation pattern is selected, but the production that is not performed when another variation pattern is selected. , which can make the player feel unexpectedness and special feeling.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (L), in this example, when the big hit is achieved in the relief time-saving rush fluctuation in the non-time-saving state, the variation pattern is changed to the variation pattern PA3-4 (time-saving promotion fake jackpot). It is determined. When the variation pattern PA3-4 is determined, after the time-saving promotion production for notifying the shift to the time-saving state via the relief time-saving (promotion) is performed, it is informed that it is a big hit, and the blessing production. Or a re-lottery performance will be held. The production performed after the time-saving promotion production is performed may be a production that can be executed even when another variation pattern is selected, but the production that is not performed when another variation pattern is selected. , which can make the player feel unexpectedness and special feeling.

It should be noted that the length of the fluctuation time is different when the relief time short rush fluctuation becomes a misalignment and when the relief time short rush fluctuation becomes a big hit, but the fluctuation pattern with the same length of fluctuation time, or a common A variation pattern may be selected. This makes it possible to save storage capacity.

The method of setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2 is an example, and various aspects can be considered.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (E), during the time saving state via the relief time saving, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 of the ultra-super shortening fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is high, and the fluctuation display Since the digestion speed is fast, there are few types of executable notice effects and pre-reading notice effects. For example, when it is in the time saving state via the relief time saving, the effect of displaying the effect image at the end of the display screen of the image display device 5, the effect of lighting the lamp or LED, the predetermined effect sound, and the normal An effect such as outputting a different variable stop sound is executed.

In addition, in this example, the case of providing a variation pattern table E dedicated during the time saving state via the relief time reduction is shown, but the variation pattern table E dedicated during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction is not provided, for example, via the jackpot It may be configured to determine the variation pattern using the variation pattern table C (see FIG. 10-1 (C)) during the time saving state.

In addition, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 10 times or less, the fluctuation pattern tables F and G (see FIGS. 10-2 (F) and (G)) are shown. , is not limited to such aspects. For example, it may be configured to switch the variation pattern table so that the reach ratio gradually decreases as the number of remaining variations until the relief time is reduced decreases, or the number of divisions such as 100 times or 200 times of remaining variations Only in the case of , the variation pattern table may be switched to suggest the number of remaining variations.

(test terminal processing)
10-3 and 10-4 are flowcharts showing processing examples related to the output of each test signal in the test terminal processing. Incidentally, the test terminal process is executed in the game control timer interrupt process.

In the test terminal processing, CPU 103 first clears the bit of each signal in the test signal output buffer of the output port buffers (step 113IWS31). Then, if it is during the jackpot pattern confirmation period (Y of step 113IWS32), if it is during the jackpot period including the fanfare period and the ending period (Y of step 113IWS33), or if any time saving flag is set ( Y at step 113IWS34), the bit of firing position designating signal 3 in the test signal output buffer is set (step 113IWS35). The time saving flag includes a time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state A, a first time saving flag B indicating the time saving state B, and a time saving flag C indicating the time saving state C. be

If it is not during the jackpot pattern determination period, it is not during the jackpot period including the fanfare period and the ending period, and none of the time-saving flags is set (N in step 113 IWS34), the bit of the firing position designation signal 1 in the test signal output buffer is set (step 113IWS36).

In addition, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in the normal state, while the firing position designation signal 3 is output when the pattern stop period is started (Y in step 113IWS32), the time-saving losing pattern is stopped in the normal state. If it is displayed, the time saving flag B is set when the pattern stop period of the time saving lost pattern ends, so the firing position designation signal 3 is output at the end of the pattern stopping period (step 113 of IWS34). Y). That is, it is configured such that the switching timing of the firing position designation signal is different depending on the trigger for the shift control to the time saving state.

Also, here, by switching the output of the firing position designation signals 1 and 3, it is possible to notify the external device (testing device) of the information indicating the game state in which the player is expected to perform the shot. However, the set/reset control of a single firing position designation signal informs the external device (testing device) of the information indicating the game state in which the player is expected to play. It is good also as possible composition. For example, if the result of step 113IWS34 is N, step 113IWS36 is skipped and step 113IWS37 is performed, or step 113IWS31 is not performed and the firing position is specified instead of step 113IWS36. By performing processing for clearing the bit of the signal 3, information indicating the game state in which the player is expected to make a shot depending on whether or not the bit of the firing position designation signal 3 is set is obtained. A configuration that can notify an external device (test device) may be used.

In addition, when the CPU 103 is in the period of finalizing the jackpot pattern in the first special pattern (Y in step 113IWS37A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special pattern 1 hit signal (step 113IWS37B), and sets the bit of the pattern 1 data bit2 ( Step 113 (IWS37C).

In addition, when the CPU 103 is in the time-saving lost design determination period in the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS37D), it sets the bit of the special symbol 1 time-saving lost signal (step 113IWS37E), and sets the bit of the symbol 1 data bit1. (step 113IWS37F). It should be noted that the processing of steps 113IWS37E and S37F can be output even if the relief time reduction number counter becomes zero. As will be described later, if the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the relief time saving rush fluctuation, it is preferentially controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving rather than the time saving state via the time saving loss, but in that case also time saving A signal indicating that the lost symbol has been stopped and displayed is properly output to the outside.

In addition, when the CPU 103 is in the time-saving no design confirmation period in the first special design (Y of step 113IWS37G), it sets the bit of the design 1 data bit0 (step 113IWS37H).

In addition, when the CPU 103 is in the period of finalizing the big hit pattern in the second special pattern (Y in step 113IWS38A), it sets the bit of the special pattern 2 hit signal (step 113IWS38B) and sets the bit of the pattern 2 data bit2 ( Step 113 (IWS 38C).

In addition, when the CPU 103 is in the period of time-saving lost design determination in the second special design (Y of step 113IWS38D), it sets the bit of the special design 2 time-saving time-loss signal (step 113IWS38E), and sets the bit of the design 2 data bit1. (step 113IWS38F). It should be noted that the processing of steps 113IWS38E and S38F can be output even if the relief time reduction number counter becomes zero. As will be described later, if the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the relief time saving rush fluctuation, it is preferentially controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving rather than the time saving state via the time saving loss, but in that case also time saving A signal indicating that the lost symbol has been stopped and displayed is properly output to the outside.

In addition, when the CPU 103 is in the time-saving no design confirmation period in the second special design (Y of step 113IWS38G), it sets the bit of the design 2 data bit0 (step 113IWS38H).

Further, when the CPU 103 reaches the relief time reduction number based on the variation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS39A), it sets the bit of the special symbol 1 relief number arrival signal (step 113IWS39B). Further, when the CPU 103 reaches the relief time reduction number based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS39C), it sets the bit of the special symbol 2 relief number arrival signal (step 113IWS39D). Specifically, when the time saving flag C is set, the flag is set according to which data of "first" and "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, and based on the flag, which special It is possible to specify whether or not the relief time reduction number of times has been reached based on the variation of the symbols. In this example, when the number of relief time reduction times is reached based on the variation of the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 relief number reaching signal is instantaneously output, but the relief is based on the variation of the first special symbol. The special symbol 1 relief number arrival signal may be output continuously during the period controlled to the time saving state via time saving. Similarly, in this example, when the relief time reduction number of times is reached based on the variation of the second special symbol, the special symbol 1 relief number arrival signal is instantaneously output, but based on the variation of the second special symbol. The special symbol 2 relief number reaching signal may be output continuously during the period controlled in the time saving state via the relief time saving.

In addition, when the CPU 103 is controlling the variable probability state based on the variation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS40A), it sets the bit of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal (step 113IWS40B). Also, when the CPU 103 is in control of the variable probability state based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS40C), it sets the bit of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal (step 113IWS40D). Specifically, when the probability variation flag is set, the flag is set according to which data of "first" and "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, and based on the flag, which special symbol It is possible to specify whether it is controlled to a probability variable state based on the variation of .

Further, when the CPU 103 is in control of the time saving state based on the variation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS41A), it sets the bit of the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal (step 113IWS41B). Further, when the CPU 103 is controlling the time saving state based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y of step 113IWS41C), it sets the bit of the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal (step 113IWS41D). Specifically, when the time saving flag is set, the flag is set according to whether the special symbol pointer is set to either "first" or "second" data, and based on the flag, which special symbol It is possible to specify whether it is controlled to a probability variable state based on the variation of .

Further, when the time saving flag A is set (Y in step 113IWS42A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the winning easy state designation signal 1 (step 113IWS42B). Further, when the time saving flag B is set (Y of step 113IWS42C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the winning easy state designation signal 2 (step 113IWS42D). Further, when the time saving flag C is set (Y of step 113IWS42E), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the win easy state designation signal 3 (step 113IWS42F). In addition, as will be described later, when a big hit occurs in the time saving state, each time saving flag is reset at the stop timing of the big hit variation, and the time saving flag A can be set at the end of the big hit, so in the time saving state A When the 10R big win A occurs, the winning easy state designating signal 1 is temporarily turned off during the period from the stop timing of the big win variation to the big win end timing.

Then, the CPU 103 outputs the contents of the test signal output buffer to the output port (step 113IWS43), thereby transmitting each signal as the test signal to the test signal terminal. By outputting the test signal in this manner, the internal state of the gaming machine can be identified on the testing device side.

(Customer waiting demonstration effect control processing)
FIG. 10-5 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting demonstration effect control process. The customer waiting demonstration effect control process is performed after step S161 in the effect control process process and before steps S170 to S177. That is, the customer waiting demonstration effect control process is a process performed each time the effect control process process is performed. In the customer waiting demonstration effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 performs a telop display execution lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the telop display effect when 10 seconds have passed since receiving the customer waiting demo designation command. (Y of step 113 IWS 250, S251). Specifically, a telop display execution lottery table corresponding to the set value is used to determine whether or not to execute the telop display effect.

FIGS. 10-6A and 10-6B are explanatory diagrams showing the telop display execution lottery table. In the telop display execution lottery table, a determination value corresponding to the presence or absence of execution of the telop display effect is assigned for each remaining number of times until relief time reduction, but in the example shown in FIGS. 10-6 (A) and (B) , the percentages of the assigned decision values are shown for ease of explanation. The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for a telop display execution lottery, and determines a decision item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

FIG. 10-6(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display execution lottery table used when the setting value "1" is set. FIG. 10-6(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display execution lottery table used when the setting value "6" is set. Illustration of the telop display execution lottery table used when the set values "2" to "5" are set is omitted.

When the telop display execution lottery table (set value “1”) shown in FIG. 10-6 (A) is used, if the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 201 or more, the telop display effect is executed 30% , and 70% of the decision is made not to execute the telop display effect. When the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is determined at a rate of 40% to execute the telop display performance, and it is determined at a rate of 60% not to execute the telop display performance. When the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is decided at a rate of 50% to execute the telop display performance, and it is decided at a rate of 50% not to execute the telop display performance. When the remaining number of times until the relief time saving is 10 or less, execution of the telop display performance is determined at a rate of 55%, and not execution of the telop display performance is determined at a rate of 45%.

When the telop display execution lottery table (setting value “6”) shown in FIG. 10-6 (B) is used, if the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 201 or more, the execution of the telop display effect is 60%. , and 40% of the decision is made not to execute the telop display effect. When the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 101 or more and 200 or less, execution of the telop display performance is determined at a rate of 70%, and not execution of the telop display performance is determined at a rate of 30%. When the number of remaining times until relief time reduction is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is decided at a rate of 80% to execute the telop display performance, and it is decided to not execute the telop display performance at a rate of 20%. When the remaining number of times until the time saving is reduced is 10 or less, execution of the telop display performance is determined at a rate of 85%, and not execution of the telop display performance is determined at a rate of 15%.

In this way, the execution ratio of the telop display effect is higher when the number of remaining times until the time saving is 10 or less than when the number of times remaining until the time saving is 11 or more. As a result, it is possible to improve interest by making the player expect to reach the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction, and to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player due to the end of the game just before the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached. can.

Also, in this manner, the telop display effect is executed at a higher rate when the set value "6" is set than when the set value "1" is set. As a result, the player can predict the set value based on the execution frequency of the telop display effect.

In addition, it is configured to execute the telop display effect at a higher rate as the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is smaller. As a result, the player can predict the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened according to the execution frequency of the telop display effect.

In addition, about the remaining number of times until relief time reduction, it is possible to specify by the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. That is, before the command for specifying the number of times of relief time 2 indicating that it is 200 times until relief time reduction is received, the lottery is performed as the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 201 or more, and 200 times until relief time reduction After receiving the relief time reduction number 2 designation command indicating that there is a relief time reduction number 2 designation command indicating that it is 100 times until relief time reduction is received, before the relief time reduction number 2 designation command is received, the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 101 or more and 200 or less, and after receiving a command specifying the number of times of relief time reduction 2 indicating that it is 100 times until relief time reduction, the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 100 or less. I do.

When it is decided to execute the telop display effect, the effect control CPU 120 performs a telop display mode determination lottery process for determining the effect mode of the telop display effect (step 113IWS253). Specifically, the effect mode of the telop display effect is determined using a telop display mode determination lottery table corresponding to the set value.

FIGS. 10-6C and 10-6D are explanatory diagrams showing a telop display mode determination lottery table. In the telop display mode determination lottery table, a judgment value corresponding to the telop display mode of the telop display effect (frame color of the telop display area: blue, red) is assigned for each remaining number of times until the relief time is reduced. In the examples shown in -6(C) and (D), the ratio of the assigned judgment values is shown for the sake of simplification of explanation. The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for a telop display mode determination lottery, and determines a determination item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

FIG. 10-6(C) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display mode determination lottery table used when the setting value "1" is set. FIG. 10-6(D) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display mode determination lottery table used when the setting value "6" is set. Illustration of the telop display mode determination lottery table used when the set values "2" to "5" are set is omitted.

When the telop display mode determination lottery table (set value “1”) shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 40%, and displaying the frame color of the telop display area in blue is determined at a rate of 60%. If the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is determined at a rate of 70% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. is determined at a rate of 30%. If the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is determined at a rate of 80% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. is determined at a rate of 20%. When the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less, it is determined at a rate of 85% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Determined by percentage.

When the telop display mode determination lottery table (set value “6”) shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 70%, and displaying the frame color of the telop display area in blue is determined at a rate of 30%. If the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is determined at a rate of 80% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. is determined at a rate of 20%. If the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is decided at a rate of 90% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. is determined at a rate of 10%. If the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less, it is determined at a rate of 95% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Determined by percentage.

In this way, when the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 10 or less than when the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 11 or more, the percentage of displaying the frame color of the telop display area in red is higher. is configured to be As a result, it is possible to improve interest by making the player expect to reach the number of relief time reduction fluctuations.

Also, in this way, when the setting value "6" is set, the frame color of the telop display area is displayed in red at a higher rate than when the setting value "1" is set. It is configured. As a result, the player can predict the set value according to the effect mode of the telop display effect.

Also, in this way, the frame color of the telop display area is displayed in red at a higher rate as the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is smaller. As a result, the player can predict the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time is shortened according to the effect mode of the telop display effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 starts the telop display effect for displaying the decided telop display area (step 113IWS254).

Also, when three minutes have passed since receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the demonstration movie (Y in step 113 IWS 255, S256).

It should be noted that the display of the telop display and the demo movie displayed here ends when the game ball passes through the start opening, when the next variation starts, or when the player's operation is detected. It is something to do.

FIG. 10-7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of pre-reading notice setting processing. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-7, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a new start winning command is received (step 113 IWS 1011). End the setting process.

The start winning command is a command for the game control microcomputer 100 to determine the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern when there is a start winning to the winning ball device 6A or the variable winning ball device 6B. This is a command that indicates the winning judgment result obtained by extracting a numerical value and prefetching the display result and fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random number. The start winning command is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 when the winning ball device 6A or the variable winning ball device 6B starts winning. Examples of the start winning command include a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a start winning designation command, and a total pending memory number designation command.

The symbol designation command is an effect control command indicating whether or not a big hit will occur, and whether or not the big hit will be determined among the results of determination at the time of winning. The variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is in the winning determination result. The start winning designation command is an effect control command indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening has started winning. The total reserved memory number designation command is an effect control command that designates the total number (total reserved memory number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number.

In the present embodiment, based on the variation category command, whether it is a variation with super reach, a variation with normal reach, a variation with pseudo run, or a variation with pseudo run, re-fluctuation It is possible to identify whether it is a variation with a pseudo-run or undetermined. Undetermined means that the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number acquired at the time of starting winning is different according to the reserved storage number at the start of variation corresponding to the starting winning.

The starting winning command received from the game control microcomputer 100 is temporarily stored in a starting winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Specifically, in the command analysis process (step S75), the effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order in which they are received in the first empty storage area of the start winning command storage area. Then, each command stored in the start winning command storage area is stored in the first storage area 1 each time the variable display of the decorative pattern is started (every time the total pending memory number subtraction designation command is received). It is deleted from the existing one, and the contents of the start winning command storage area are shifted.

In step 113IWS1011, when a new start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying a new pending display (step 113IWS1012). Then, it is determined whether or not a prefetching flag indicating that the prefetching notice effect is being executed is set (step 113, IWS1013), and if it is set, the prefetching notice setting process is terminated. If it is not set, it is determined whether or not it is controlled to the time saving state (step 113IWS1014), and if it is controlled to the time saving state, the process proceeds to step 113IWS1016.

If it is not controlled to the time saving state, the number of pending memories and the remaining number of times until the relief time saving are compared (step 113 IWS 1015), and if the number of pending memories is a larger value than the remaining number of times until the relief time saving, then proceed as it is End the warning setting process. If the number of pending memories is equal to or less than the remaining number of times until relief time reduction, it is determined whether the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 10 times or less (step 113 IWS 1016). When the remaining number of times until the relief time saving is 10 times or less, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated as it is. When the number of remaining times until the relief time saving is not less than 10 times, a prefetching effect execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the prefetching foretelling effect. Specifically, it determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect by using the pre-reading notice effect execution lottery table.

In the pre-reading notice effect execution lottery table, whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is executed for each winning determination result (big hit, time saving loss, no time saving loss) and the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect in the case of execution (first mode, second mode) ) is assigned a judgment value.

The pre-reading notice effect of the first mode is the effect of displaying in red the number of times of change until the change of the notice target of the pre-reading notice effect starts, and the pre-reading notice effect of the second mode is the notice of the pre-reading notice effect. It is an effect that counts down the number of times of change until the target change starts in blue letters.

For example, when the judgment result at the time of winning is a big hit, it is decided to perform the first mode pre-reading notice performance at a rate of 70%, and not to perform the pre-reading notice performance at a rate of 30%. When the result of determination at the time of winning is that the time is short, it is decided to perform the second mode of pre-reading foretelling performance at a rate of 40%, and it is determined not to perform the fore-reading foretelling performance at a rate of 60%. When the judgment result at the time of winning is that there is no reduction in working hours, it is decided to perform the first mode pre-reading notice effect at a rate of 4%, and the second mode pre-reading notice effect is decided to be performed at a rate of 6%, 90% of the time, it is decided not to perform the pre-reading notice effect.

In this way, since the first mode of pre-reading foretelling performance can be executed in the case of a big win and in the case of no time saving, it is a pre-reading foretelling performance suggesting control for a big win. In addition, since the second aspect of the look-ahead foretelling performance can be executed in the case of time saving and the time of no time-saving, it is a look-ahead foretelling performance suggesting control for time saving.

When it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays the pre-reading display area and the countdown display on the image display section 5 (step 113IWS1019), and sets the pre-reading flag (step 113IWS1020).

In this way, by performing the processing of step 113IWS1015, if the number of pending memories is a value larger than the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction, that is, the retention time stored before reaching the relief time reduction fluctuation It is configured to limit (prohibit) the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect whose announcement target is the reserved memory corresponding to the variation performed after being controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving. As a result, it is possible to limit the execution of the pre-reading forewarning effect before and after the relief time saving control, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the problem of the effect.

In addition, by performing the processing of step 113 IWS1016, when the number of remaining times until relief time reduction is 10 times or less, it is configured to limit (prohibit) the execution of the look-ahead notice effect. As a result, the countdown effect corresponding to the relief time saving control and the pre-reading notice effect are not executed in duplicate.

For example, in a game machine that can perform a countdown display for reaching the number of times of relief time reduction fluctuations and a countdown display as a pre-reading notice effect, countdown display for reaching the number of times of relief time-saving fluctuations and pre-reading notice effects If the countdown display and the countdown display of are made executable, it is assumed that the effect will become complicated. In particular, when the effect indicating the remaining number of times until relief time reduction and the pre-reading notice effect are both effects with countdown display, it is difficult to understand which countdown display to pay attention to, so the effect of the effect is reduced. It is conceivable that Therefore, it is possible to prevent reduction in the performance effect by configuring so as not to overlap the performance showing the remaining number of times until relief time saving and the look-ahead forewarning performance.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 10-8 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 113IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result (stop symbol) is determined (step 113IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 113IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the decoration pattern is stopped) A display result determining means for determining the pattern) is realized. Incidentally, when a pseudo-run is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120, in step 113IWS802, sets a chance symbol (for example, like "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-run. , a combination of a jackpot pattern that does not become a reach and a pattern that is shifted by one pattern) is also determined. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 113IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not the hit is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the decorative symbols to be stopped based on only the variation pattern command. .

At step 113 IWS 802, when the received display result specifying command indicates "10R jackpot A", the effect control CPU 120 selects a decoration pattern in which three patterns are the same even number pattern as a stop pattern. combination (10R jackpot A pattern) is determined. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates "10R big hit B", the effect control CPU 120 combines decorative patterns (10R big hit B pattern) in which 3 patterns are the same odd number patterns as the stop pattern. to decide.

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decoration patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the ready-to-win effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined. In addition, even if it is lost, in the case of "time saving lost", a combination of decorative symbols of the lost symbols including special symbols (for example, star symbols) is determined. It should be noted that it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of missing symbols including different special symbols (for example, heart-shaped symbols and diamond-shaped symbols) according to the time-saving type.

The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for decorative patterns, a stop pattern (a combination of patterns in which the left, middle, and right are all the same pattern) that reminds us of a big win is called a big hit pattern. Also, a stop symbol that reminds us of a loss is called a lost symbol.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs a notice effect setting process for setting a notice effect indicating the reliability of controlling to the jackpot game state (step 113IWS802A). Specifically, in the notice effect setting process, it is determined whether or not to execute the notice effect using the notice effect execution lottery table according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction, and when it is decided to execute the notice effect In (1), the performance mode of the announcement performance to be executed is determined by using the announcement performance mode determination lottery table corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, and the execution of the announcement performance of the determined performance mode is set. Although illustration is omitted, the process table including the advance notice effect set here is selected in steps 113IWS804, S806 and S807, which will be described later.

In the announcement effect execution lottery table, a judgment value corresponding to the presence or absence of execution of the announcement effect is assigned for each variable display result (big win, loss). The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for the announcement effect execution lottery, and determines a decision item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

When the notice effect execution lottery table (the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction > 10) is used, if the variable display result is a big hit, it is determined at a rate of 70% that the notice effect is executed, and the notice effect is executed. 30% of the decisions are not made. If the result of the variable display is a failure, it is decided at a rate of 10% to execute the notice effect, and it is decided at a rate of 90% not to execute the notice effect.

When the notice effect execution lottery table (remaining fluctuation count ≦ 10 until relief time reduction) is used, if the variable display result is a big hit, it is decided at a rate of 70% to execute the notice effect, and the notice effect is executed. 30% of the decisions are not made. If the result of the variable display is a failure, it is decided at a rate of 1% to execute the advance notice effect, and at a ratio of 99% it is decided not to execute the notice effect.

In this way, it is easier to execute the advance notice effect in the case of the big hit variation than in the case of the loss variation.

In addition, in this way, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 or less, the notice effect is performed when the variable display result is wrong, compared to the case where the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is greater than 10. It has a low execution ratio. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during a period in which the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 10 or less.

In the notice effect mode determination lottery table, determination values corresponding to the notice effect effect mode (character color to be displayed: blue, red) are assigned for each variable display result (big hit, lose). The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for the preliminary announcement effect mode determination lottery, and determines a decision item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

When the announcement effect mode determination lottery table is used, if the variable display result is a big hit, red is determined as the color of the character displayed in the announcement effect at a rate of 70%, and the color of the character displayed in the announcement effect. and blue is determined at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is wrong, red is determined as the color of the character displayed in the advance notice performance at a rate of 10%, and blue is determined as the color of the character displayed in the notice performance at a rate of 90%.

When the announcement effect mode determination lottery table is used, if the variable display result is a big hit, red is determined as the color of the character displayed in the announcement effect at a rate of 70%, and the color of the character displayed in the announcement effect. and blue is determined at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is wrong, red is determined as the color of the character displayed in the advance notice performance at a rate of 1%, and blue is determined as the color of the character displayed in the notice performance at a rate of 99%.

In this manner, red is more likely to be selected as the color of the character to be displayed in the advance notice effect than in the case of the big win variation rather than the loss variation.

Also, in this way, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 or less, the color of the character when the variable display result is out is greater than when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is greater than 10. As a result, red is easily selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during a period in which the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 10 or less.

Next, if the prefetching flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 updates the countdown display in the prefetching notice effect (steps 113IWS802B, S802C). Then, it is checked whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700 (step 113 IWS 803). Whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, or 700 times, for example, the relief time reduction number 2 designation command It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is received.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, or 700 times, the effect control CPU 120 is the remaining time until the relief time reduction. A process table is selected that includes a fan effect corresponding to the number of fluctuations (step 113IWS804). For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100 times), the remaining number of fluctuations "100 times" Select a process table that includes the corresponding teasing effect. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "07 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 700 times), the remaining number of fluctuations "800 times selects the process table including the inciting effect corresponding to ". Then, the process proceeds to step 113 IWS808.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is none of 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, or 700 times, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the relief time reduction. It is checked whether or not the number of remaining fluctuations is 10 times or less (step 113IWS805). In addition, whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less is determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 10 or less. can be determined by

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including countdown effects and effect effects according to the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction. (step 113 IWS 806). For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "0A (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 10 times), the count number until relief time reduction " 10", select the process table including the countdown effect. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 1 time), the count until relief time reduction Select a process table that includes a countdown effect corresponding to the number "1". Then, the process proceeds to step 113 IWS808.

In this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is determined based on the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Although shown, it is not limited to such embodiments. For example, when configuring to transmit a background designation command that designates a background image, configure the EXT data of the background designation command to set a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and transmit. may On the side of the effect control CPU 120, the number of remaining fluctuations may be determined based on the EXT data of the received background designation command, and a fanning effect or a countdown effect may be executed.

In addition, in this example, even if it reaches the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction, when it becomes a big hit fluctuation, it shows the case of using the same big hit fluctuation pattern as usual, but only such a mode Alternatively, a variable display may be executed using a variable pattern designating a ready-to-win effect with a short variable time.

Further, in this example, if the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, an effect presentation of displaying an effect image on the image display device 5 is performed. For example, effect production is performed such that the display range of the effect image on the image display device 5 is widened as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is small.

Also, the processing of steps 113IWS803 to S806 can be performed regardless of the gaming state. As a result, even when it is controlled in the time saving state B, it is possible to execute the fanning production, the countdown production, and the effect production according to the remaining number of times in the same way as when it is controlled in the normal state, and in the time saving state B It is also possible to give the North Seki for the reduction of relief time and improve the interest.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not less than 10 times (N of step 113IWS805), the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (step 113IWS807). Then, the process proceeds to step 113 IWS808.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS808).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (parts for effect) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. In addition, the process timer set value is set with a variable time in the mode of variation. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decoration pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Also, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80 . Also, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, in the process table used when performing the effect control for the variation pattern involving the ready-to-win effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed. Process data indicating to display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the simulated run and the sliding effect. may

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 113IWS809). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 113IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls such that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 113IWS810).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 113IWS811).

(Effect processing during variable display)
FIGS. 10-9 and 10-10 are flowcharts showing the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 113IWS841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 113IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 113 IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next process timer set value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 113 IWS844). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data which are set next (step 113IWS845).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received (step 113IWS846). Specifically, it is checked whether or not the first fixed A command reception flag or the second fixed A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation A specified command or the second symbol confirmation A specified command is received, the effect control CPU 120 is a mode transition effect (effect to inform that it shifts to a time saving state (time saving mode)) and right hitting A process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 113 IWS847). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS848). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 113IWS849). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to the fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 113IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS861A.

In addition, in this example, when the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time saving is lost in the normal state and the case where the relief time is shortened. However, in step 113 IWS 847, if the time saving is lost during the normal state, the process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for the time saving loss and the right-handed notification is selected, and if the relief time is shortened, the relief time saving is selected. A process table is selected according to the mode transition effect and the right hitting notification. Whether or not it is a case where the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received as a relief time reduction, for example, the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "00 ( H)” can be determined.

If neither the first design determination A designation command nor the second design determination A designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first design determination B designation command or the second design determination B designation command. (step 113IWS856). Specifically, it is checked whether or not the first fixed B command reception flag or the second fixed B command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol determination B designation command or the second symbol determination B designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 113 IWS858.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (step 113IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received (Y of step 113IWS856), or when the variable time timer times out (Y of step 113IWS857), the effect control CPU 120 normally (step 113 IWS858). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS859). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 113IWS860). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 second to a fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 113IWS861). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS861A.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the pattern confirmation designation command is received, also when the variable time timer times out (see step 113IWS857), the processing after step 113IWS858 is shifted to the pattern confirmation period. Normally, however, if the pattern confirmation designating command is not missed, there is no case where it is judged as Y in step 113IWS857 and the processing after step 113IWS858 is performed.

At step 113IWS861A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not there is a target change for the pre-reading notice effect (step 113IWS861A). For example, the value of the number of pending memories when the pre-reading notice effect is started is set as the execution count K of the pre-reading notice effect, and the execution count K is subtracted by 1 at the start of the fluctuation, and the change when the subtraction result becomes 0 is the pre-reading notice. It can be determined that it is a target change for production. If it is the target change of the look-ahead advance notice effect, the look-ahead flag is reset (step 113IWS861B), and the process proceeds to step 113IWS862. In this way, the look-ahead flag is set when the look-ahead notice effect is started, the look-ahead flag is reset when the change of the fore-read notice target fluctuation of the look-ahead notice effect stops, and the pending memory that occurred while the look-ahead flag was set is targeted. A plurality of pre-reading foretelling effects are not performed redundantly by adopting a configuration in which the pre-reading foretelling effects are not performed. In addition, it is good also as the structure which can perform a plurality of pre-reading notice effects redundantly.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 113IWS862).

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode until transition to the time saving state C, which is a relief time saving, will be described. FIGS. 10-11 to 10-15 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until transition to the time saving state. In addition, in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-15, the effect screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

FIGS. 10-11 to 10-14 show specific examples of effects in the case of control from the normal state to the time-saving state C. FIG. FIGS. 10-15 show a specific example of an effect mode in the case of being controlled from the time saving state B to the time saving state C. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(A), the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is displayed every 100 rotations when the symbols are stopped. In this example, in the image display device 5, the decoration pattern 113IW100 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the small pattern 113IW101 is displayed in the upper right. Then, for example, when the remaining 700 rotations are left until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative symbol 113IW100 and the small symbol 113IW101 are stopped and the missing symbol (in this example, a combination of "134" symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, a remaining rotation number display 113IW102 saying "Relief time saving starts after 700 rotations!" is displayed on the upper left. At this time, the explanation of the effect of the relief time reduction is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the telop display 113IW103.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), for example, when the remaining 600 rotations until the shift to the relief time reduction, the decorative pattern 113IW100 and the small pattern 113IW101 are stopped and the design (in this example, "423" ) is derived and displayed. At this time, similarly to FIG. 10-11(A), a remaining rotation number display 113IW102 saying "Relief time saving start after 600 rotations!" is displayed on the upper left. At this time, the explanation of the effect of the relief time reduction is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the telop display 113IW103.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (A) and (B), it shows a case where every 100 fluctuations are performed to suggest the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the remaining number of times until the relief time is 400 to 700 times, the fanning effect is not executed, and the remaining number of times is 300 times or less (therefore, the remaining number of times is 300 times, 200 times, 100 times). can be configured to run.

In addition, instead of always executing the fanning production when the remaining number of fluctuations is reached, for example, when the command for specifying the number of relief time reduction times 2 is received, lottery processing based on random numbers is performed, and when it is decided to execute the fanning production The configuration may be such that the fan effect is executed in the mode shown in FIGS. 10-11(A) and (B). Further, in this case, it is desirable to configure such that as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened decreases, the execution ratio of the fanning effect increases.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (C) to 10-12 (E), after the remaining 10 rotations until the shift to the relief time reduction, the decorative pattern 113IW100 is not displayed when the pattern is stopped, and only the small pattern 113IW101 is displayed, and a countdown display 113IW104 corresponding to the remaining number of revolutions is displayed in the center of the screen. For example, in the countdown display 113IW104, a state of counting down from "10" to "1" is displayed each time the symbol variation display ends and the symbols stop. Each figure shows an example in which the missing symbols (in this example, a combination of symbols "653", "844", "278", and "216") are derived and displayed.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (C) to 10-12 (E), after the remaining 10 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction, the effect image of the display range according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is displayed. 10-12 (F) ~ FIG. 10-12 (H), as shown in FIG. 10-12 (F) to FIG. 10-12 (H), the variation in which the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 0 times, the time reduction rush production is performed. Then, the symbols are stopped and the missing symbols (in this example, a combination of symbols "254") are stopped and displayed. At this time, the decoration pattern may not be displayed, and the missing pattern may be displayed only in the small pattern. Incidentally, FIGS. 10-12 (G) and (H) show a period in which the missing symbols as small symbols are temporarily stopped, and the special symbols continue to fluctuate. FIGS. 10-13(I) to 10-14(M) show a period in which the winning symbols as small symbols are fixedly displayed, and the special symbols also stop changing.

In addition, in FIG. 10-12 (G), control to the time saving state C is notified by displaying on the image display device 5 a character string indicating that it is controlled to the time saving state 800 times. Then, in FIG. 10-12(H), an image for promoting hitting to the right is displayed on the image display device 5 for promoting hitting to the right. In addition, since it shows about the case of controlling from the normal state to the time saving state C here, the right hitting promotion image is displayed, but when controlling from the time saving state B to the time saving state C Right hitting is already done Therefore, the display of the right hitting notification image is restricted when the symbols are stopped (see FIG. 10-15 (D)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (I), when the game moves to the symbol fixing period, a mode effect start display 113IW105 saying "Super heat!" is displayed, and the mode change effect is started. In addition, after that, in the mode transition effect, the decoration pattern 113IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 113IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13(J), when the mode transition effect is started, an operation suggestion image 113IW106 that suggests operating (depressing) the push button 31B is displayed. For example, in the operation suggestion image 113IW106, an image prompting the user to press the push button 31B is displayed together with the characters "Press".

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-13(K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggesting image 113IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time elapses after the operation suggesting image 113IW106 is displayed, "V STOCK×1" is displayed, and the start of the relief time saving is notified. Also, a right-handed instruction display 113IW108 for instructing right-handed is displayed next to the small symbol 113IW101.

It should be noted that, in this example, even when a big hit is achieved, an effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK×1" can be executed in the same manner as in FIG. 10-13(K). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), in the start-up winning determination process (step S101), performs a prefetch determination process of whether or not it will be a big hit and the variation pattern type, and performs a prefetch determination. Send a prefetch determination result specifying command that can specify the result. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect (so-called holding continuous effect) in the same manner as in FIGS. For example, when it is specified that there is one jackpot in the pending memory based on the received look-ahead determination result designation command, the text display of "V STOCK x 1" is displayed to perform the pending continuous effect. to run. Further, for example, when it is specified that there are two big hits in the pending memory based on the received prefetch determination result specifying command, the holding by displaying the characters "V STOCK x 2" is displayed. Execute a series of performances.

On the other hand, when the relief time is shortened, after that, there is a high probability that a variable display with an extremely short variation time of 1.5 seconds will be executed during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction (see Figure 10-1 (E) ), the variable display is digested very quickly, and a big hit is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, in the variable display (in this example, the design confirmation period), which has become a relief time reduction, the character display "V STOCK × 1" shown in Fig. 10-13 (K) is displayed without checking the prefetch determination result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character display "V STOCK × 1" shown in Fig. 10-13 (K) has the same effect as the pseudo holding consecutive effect, and the relief time is shortened. It is a production that informs.

In addition, when the variation that reaches the relief time reduction is a big hit variation, for example, 30 seconds are secured as the variation time, and once the performance is executed so that the relief time is shortened, the performance to notify the big hit is executed. may

Although the display of the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 is started from the display timing of the character display 113IW107 of "V STOCK×1", the display start timing of the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 is limited to that shown in this example. do not have. For example, the display of the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 may be started at the timing of the fixed display of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 10-12(H), and various modes are conceivable.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (L), a mode selection screen 113IW109 for selecting a production mode for saving time is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes AD is displayed. Mode selection is performed by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. In addition, when a predetermined time has passed without selecting the presentation mode, the presentation mode in which the cursor is matched is automatically determined. Further, even when the mode selection screen 113IW109 is displayed, the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 remains displayed next to the small symbol 113IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (M), when the selection of the effect mode is completed, a start notification screen 113IW110 for notifying that the relief time saving is started is displayed. For example, the characters "Relief Time Shortening Rush" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation is started, it shifts to the time saving state C, and the relief time saving is started.

In this example, when the symbols are stopped, the number of rotations remaining until the relief time is shortened, the effect of the relief time shortening is explained, and the countdown is displayed.

In addition, in this example, the pattern confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds in the variable display that shortens the relief time, and the mode transition effect and right-handed notification are executed, but the pattern confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving as it is without performing the mode transition effect etc.

In addition, this example shows the case where the relief time reduction number counter is initially set to "800" at the time of executing the RAM clearing process or at the time of the big hit. , etc.), the selection buffer and story counter of the story may be cleared. In addition, it may be possible to configure a story to be set when the relief time saving is activated, or to configure a different story to be set depending on the game state.

Thus, FIGS. 10-11 to 10-14 show the case of being controlled from the normal state to the time saving state C, but in FIG. 10-15, when controlled from the time saving state B to the time saving state C A specific example of the presentation mode will be shown. For example, FIGS. 10-15 (A) and (B) showing display examples of the timing of 10 remaining rotations and 1 remaining rotation until the transition to the relief time reduction state in the time reduction state B show the remaining time until the transition to the relief time reduction in the normal state. In addition to the display of FIGS. 10-11 (C) and 10-12 (E), which show display examples of the timing of 10 rotations and 1 rotation remaining, a right-handed notification effect (right arrow image display) is performed. This hitting to the right notification effect is continuously performed while being controlled in the time saving state. It should be noted that the value of the time saving state counter in FIG. 10-15 (A) is 60, and the value of the time saving state counter in FIG. 10-15 (B) is 51.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 (C) and (D), in the variation in which the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0, the time reduction promotion effect is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-15(D), a character string indicating the promotion is displayed. At this time, unlike FIG. 10-12 (H), since the time-saving state has already been controlled, the right-handed notification image is not displayed again.

Note that the countdown effect and the effect effect are executed only when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction reaches 10 times, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by performing a countdown production and an effect production from a timing other than when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction reaches 10 times (by performing a so-called fake production), the player expects to enter the relief time reduction. It is also possible to let In that case, for example, the value of the time-saving number counter is 50, and the variation is terminated, the next variation is started, the countdown display and the effect display are started, and the countdown display and the effect display are performed over multiple variations, The countdown display and the effect display may end at a predetermined timing (in the illustrated example, the third variation after the start of the countdown display and the effect display). This fake effect is not limited to being performed when the value of the time saving number counter is 50, and may be performed when the value of the time saving number counter is 100 or 200.

Also, the execution ratio of the fake effect may differ depending on the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction, for example, the occurrence ratio may be higher in a period when the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is small. As a result, the player can feel that the relief time is approaching, and the interest can be improved. Also, this trick effect may not be performed when a variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, a variation pattern involving SP reach) is selected.

As described above, the characteristic portion 113IW includes the following inventions.

Conventionally, as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-95449, the number of changes in the pattern is counted, and the count result reaches a value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without the occurrence of a big hit. Based on that (that is, based on the variation of a special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without the occurrence of a big hit), there were some that were controlled to the probability variable state. Similarly, based on the fact that the count result reaches a specific value, the game state is controlled to a special state (for example, a time-saving state with a high execution frequency of pattern variations). However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, there is room for improvement in effect control in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display count. Therefore, in this characterizing portion 113IW, the following game machines (means 113-1) to (means 113-7) are described.

(Means 113-1) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is executed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of
Start condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first start winning opening or second starting winning opening) is established, and start condition (for example, neither the jackpot game state nor fluctuation) is established. Variable display execution means capable of executing variable display (for example, a portion that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100);
Reservation storage means (for example, first reservation storage number buffer, second reservation storage number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as reservation information when the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied;
a decision means capable of deciding to control in an advantageous state;
Before the determination by the determination means, determination means that can determine that it is controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a portion that executes step S101 in the game control microcomputer 100),
A specific suggestive effect (for example, a first-mode pre-reading forewarning effect) that suggests control to be in an advantageous state based on the determination result of the judging means. (Chance) may be stopped and displayed, a pending change effect that changes the color and shape of the pending display, a zone effect that displays a special background, etc.). (For example, the part that executes step 113IWS1019 in the effect control CPU120),
A state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the normal state;
and an update means capable of updating numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter),
The updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the first special When the pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes, the relief time reduction counter is updated),
In the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is performed. It is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established by
A special suggestive effect executing means (for example, steps 113, IWS804, S806, and S254 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special suggestive effect related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a fan effect, a countdown effect, an effect effect, and a telop display effect). part to execute),
The specific suggestion production execution means is
Of the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is established, it is possible to limit the execution of the specific suggestive effect for the notice target of the variable display after the variable display where the special condition is established (for example, , If Y in step 113IWS1015, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute 113IWS1019, thereby prohibiting the execution of the first mode prefetching notice effect that spans before and after the start of control to the relief time reduction),
Numerical information updated by the updating means is a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times (for example, 790 times) less than the special number (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "10"). A predetermined period until reaching a specific value. , to limit the execution of the specific suggestion effect (for example, if it is Y in step 113IWS1016 in the effect control CPU 120, by not executing step 113IWS1019, the pre-reading notice of the first mode in the fluctuation immediately before being controlled to the relief time reduction A game machine characterized by prohibiting execution of performance.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated while avoiding the occurrence of a problem in the production, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, in this example, if it is already controlled to the time saving state, it does not prohibit the execution of the pre-reading notice effect that spans before and after the start of the control to the relief time saving (If it is Y in step 113IWS1014, step 113IWS1015 is not performed) However, it is not limited to this, and even if it is controlled in the time saving state, it is possible to prohibit the execution of the look-ahead notice performance that extends before and after the start of the control to the relief time saving.

Further, in this example, the special suggestion effect is executed in a predetermined period until the numerical information updated by the updating means reaches a specific value from a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times smaller than the special number of times, and the specific suggestion is performed during the predetermined period. It was decided to limit the execution of the production. Specifically, the execution of the countdown effect is started from the timing when the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction reaches 10 times, and the execution of the prefetching notice effect is prohibited. As a result, since the special suggesting effect and the specific suggesting effect are not performed in duplicate, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming complicated and to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, in this example, the execution of the pre-reading forewarning effect straddling before and after the start of the control to the relief time reduction is prohibited, but the limitation method is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing multiple types of pre-reading notice effects, execution of some of the plurality of types of pre-reading notice effects is prohibited when it straddles before and after the start of control for saving time. On the other hand, other pre-reading notice effects may not be prohibited (executable) even when straddling before and after the start of control for saving time.

Similarly, in this example, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the variation immediately before the control to the relief time reduction is prohibited, but the limitation method is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing multiple types of pre-reading notice effects, some of the multiple types of pre-reading notice effects are prohibited from being executed in the fluctuation immediately before being controlled to save time, Other pre-reading forewarning effects may not be prohibited from being executed (executable) in the variation immediately before being controlled to the relief time saving.

(Means 113-2) In means 113-1, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving failure pattern) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed. ,
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed,
When the special display result is derived and displayed with the establishment of the special condition, the state control means can be controlled to a special state of an advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can reduce the time By giving priority to control to the time-saving state via relief rather than control to the time-saving state via time-saving, the time-saving design stops in the relief time-saving variation (relief time-saving number counter = 0 variation). If displayed, control to the time saving state via relief time saving),
A special suggestive effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special suggestive effect (for example, a second mode of pre-reading forewarning effect) suggesting that the special display result will be derived and displayed based on the determination result of the determining means. step 113 of executing IWS 1019 in
The special suggestive effect executing means is a predetermined value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "10") corresponding to a predetermined number of times (for example, 790 times) that the numerical information updated by the updating means is smaller than the special number of times. (For example, if Y in step 113IWS1016 in the production control CPU 120, by not executing 113IWS1019, in the fluctuation just before the relief time reduction is controlled It is also possible to prohibit the execution of the second aspect of the look-ahead forewarning effect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the production from becoming complicated, suppress the decline in interest, and increase the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 113-3) In means 113-1 or 113-2, the predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less) is the predetermined period The execution ratio of the special suggestion production may be higher (see FIGS. 10-6 (A) and (B)) than the period before (for example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 11 times or more). .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by making the player expect the special condition to be fulfilled, and to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player due to the end of the game just before the special condition is fulfilled.

(Means 113-4) In any one of means 113-1 to 113-3, the special suggestion effect execution means has a plurality of effect modes according to the number of times variable display is executed (for example, the remaining number of times until relief time reduction). It is also possible to have different ratios of which of them to execute the special suggestive effect (see FIGS. 10-6 (C) and (D)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect the fulfillment of the special condition and improve the interest.

In addition to the telop display effect, if it is configured to determine by lottery whether or not to execute the inciting effect, the countdown effect, and the effect effect that indicate the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction, depending on the remaining times until the relief time reduction The execution ratio may be different.

(Means 113-5) Any one of the means 113-1 to 113-4 is provided with an explanation effect execution means capable of executing an explanation effect regarding the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (Fig. 10-11 (A), See (B)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, it is good also as an execution ratio and the selection ratio of an effect|presentation mode differing according to the remaining number of times until relief time reduction also about an explanation effect|presentation. For example, it is possible to execute the explanation effect at a higher rate as the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is smaller. In addition, when the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less, by lowering the execution ratio of the explanation performance, the production effect of the countdown performance and the effect performance suggesting the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is reduced. It is also possible to suppress

(Means 113-6) In any one of the means 113-1 to 113-5, the special suggestive effect execution means is the special suggestive effect, which is the first variable display execution number that can be easily specified until the special condition is satisfied. A special suggestive effect (e.g., agitation effect, countdown effect) and a second special suggestive effect (e.g., effect effect, telop) in which it is difficult to specify the number of executions of variable display until the special condition is established from the first special suggestive effect display effect) and (see FIGS. 10-11(C) to 10-12(E)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Means 113-7) In any of the means 113-1 to 113-6, when the variable display is not executed and the hold information is not stored in the hold storage means, a predetermined image (for example, demo movie) (for example, the part that executes step 113 IWS 256 in the effect control CPU 120) that can display
The special suggestive effect executing means can execute a special suggestive effect (for example, a telop display effect) when a predetermined image is displayed (for example, a telop display effect and a demo movie effect can be executed in duplicate. (The execution order of the display of the predetermined image and the suggestive effect can be either first or simultaneously.) Depending on the number of times variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied , the rate at which the special suggestive effect is executed when the predetermined image is displayed may be different (see FIGS. 10-6(A) and (B)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special suggestive effect is executed, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, according to the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied, the selection ratio of the special suggestive effect is changed while the predetermined image is displayed (see FIGS. 10-6(C) and (D)). ) see)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the aspect of the special suggestive effect, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the game machine.

In addition, conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, the number of changes in the pattern is counted, and the count result reaches a value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without the occurrence of a big hit. Based on that (that is, based on the variation of a special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without the occurrence of a big hit), there were some that were controlled to the probability variable state. Similarly, based on the fact that the count result reaches a specific value, the game state is controlled to a special state (for example, a time-saving state with a high execution frequency of pattern variations). However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display count, the interest is insufficient when the special condition of the variable display count is satisfied. Met. Therefore, in this characterizing portion 113IW, the following game machines (means 114-1) to (means 114-8) are described.

(Means 114-1) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is executed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of
A state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in a normal state;
and an update means capable of updating numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter),
The updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the first special When the pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes, the relief time reduction counter is updated),
The state control means
Numerical information updated by the updating means is a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times of execution of the variable display. is controllable to a special state when established,
Controllable to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, time saving pattern) is derived and displayed in the normal state,
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed,
The state control means determines the degree of advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition based on the establishment of the special condition when the special state of the advantage corresponding to the derivation display of the special display result is established. Can be controlled in a special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on reaching the fluctuation of the relief time reduction while being controlled in the time reduction state via the relief time reduction, to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction control (elevate)),
When a special condition is satisfied, a notification effect executing means (for example, step 113 IWS 806, S809, S845 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a time saving rush effect, a time saving promotion effect) to notify the establishment of the special condition. part),
The notification effect executing means can execute the notification effect based on the establishment of the special condition when the special state of the advantage corresponding to the derived display of the special display result is established (for example, A gaming machine characterized in that the performance control CPU 120 executes a time-saving promotion performance when the variation pattern PA3-2 is selected.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling by the notification effect when the special condition is satisfied while the special state is controlled to the advantage level corresponding to the derived display of the special display result, Interest can be improved.

(Means 114-2) In means 114-1, the notification effect executing means can execute the notification effect when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state, and when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state, the special condition When the special condition is established, the effect mode of the notification effect is different (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs steps 113IWS806, S809, and S845, so that when it is controlled from the normal state to the time saving state C, the time saving rush It is also possible to execute the performance and execute the time reduction promotion performance when it is controlled from the time reduction state B to the time reduction state C).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of specialness and improve interest by performing the notification effect in a manner suitable for the situation.

In addition, in this example, the change in which the relief time reduction number counter in the normal state = 0 and the variation in which the relief time reduction number counter in the time reduction state = 0 are performed during the fluctuation (time reduction rush production, time reduction promotion production) However, the execution timing of the notification effect is not limited to during fluctuation. For example, during the pattern confirmation period from stopping the symbol to starting the next variation, the variation in which the relief time reduction counter in the normal state = 0 and the variation in which the relief time reduction counter in the time reduction state = 0 The effect mode of the notification effect to be performed may be different. In that case, a common presentation may be performed during the variation.

(Means 114-3) In means 114-1 or 114-2, the launch promotion notification for promoting the launch of the game medium toward the special path (for example, the display of the right hitting notification image shown in FIG. 10-12 (H) ) can be executed (for example, step 113IWS806, S809, S845 in the effect control CPU 120),
The launch promotion notification means is capable of executing the launch promotion notice when the special condition is met in the normal state, while restricting the execution of the launch promotion notice when the special condition is met in the special state (for example, for effect control The CPU 120 displays a right-handed notification image based on control from the normal state to the time saving state C (see FIG. 10-12 (H)), and based on being controlled from the time saving state B to the time saving state C does not display the right-handed notification image (see Fig. 10-15 (D)).In addition, in Fig. 10-15 (D), the right-handed promotion image (below the small pattern The displayed rightward arrow) is displayed, but this hitting to the right promotion image is different from the hitting to the right notification image displayed based on being controlled to the time saving state C.) As a matter of fact, good too.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the complication of the presentation.

If the execution of the launch promotion announcement is restricted when the special condition is satisfied in the special state, even if the launch promotion announcement is prohibited as shown in Fig. 10-15(D), Alternatively, the launch promotion notification may be executed in a more passive manner than when the special condition is met in the normal state. For example, the launch promotion notification may be performed by reducing the display range or making the arrow transparent. In addition, when the special condition is established in the normal state, the image display device 5 that attracts the player's attention is notified of the promotion of shooting, and when the special condition is established in the special state, the image display device 5 attracts the attention of the player. It is also possible to use a light-emitting member or speakers 8L and 8R lower than the target to perform the launch promotion notification.

Further, the launch promotion notification means provides, as the launch promotion report, a first launch promotion report (for example, FIG. Reference rightward arrow) and a second launch promotion notification (for example, rightward arrows in FIGS. 10-15 (A) to (D)) that promotes the launch of the game medium toward the special path during special state control. , can be executed in different modes, and when a special condition is satisfied in the special state, the first launch promotion notification may not be executed, but the second launch promotion notification may be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complication of the presentation while performing notification according to the situation.

(Means 114-4) In any one of means 114-1 to 114-3, when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state and when the special condition is satisfied in the special state, the effect mode of the notification effect is common. (For example, the effect executed when being controlled from the normal state to the time saving state C and the effect executed when being controlled from the time saving state B to the time saving state C may be common).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of variation patterns and the number of effect data, and reduce the storage capacity.

(Means 114-5) In any one of means 114-1 to 114-4, when the normal state shifts to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, the variable display executed after the establishment of the special condition is subject to notice. While limiting the specific suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 113IWS1015 if step 113IWS1014 is N), a special state with a low advantage based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, When moving from a time saving state B with 100 times of time saving to a special state with a high degree of advantage (for example, time saving state C with 800 times of time saving), a specific suggestion that the variable display to be executed after the special condition is established is targeted for notice. Effect can be executed (for example, effect control CPU 120 can execute step 113IWS1019 if step 113IWS1014 is Y).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform the specific suggestive effect appropriately while suppressing the occurrence of a problem in the effect.

(Means 114-6) In any of the means 114-1 to 114-5, in a special state, a special suggestion effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , a portion that executes step 113 IWS 806 regardless of whether it is in the time saving state).

According to such a configuration, in the special state, it is possible to make the player expect the establishment of the special condition, thereby improving interest.

In addition, it is good also as the production|presentation aspect of special suggestion production|presentation being different by a normal state and a time saving state. For example, the character color of the countdown effect, and the effect color and pattern of the effect effect effect may be different.

(Means 114-7) In any one of means 114-1 to 114-6, a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern other than the variation patterns PA1-2 to PA1-4) is more variable than the predetermined variable display pattern. Variable display pattern determination means (eg, game control micro A portion for performing step S111 in the computer 100),
The variable display pattern determining means determines that the display result of the variable display is non-display in the special state controlled when the special condition is established, rather than in the special state controlled based on the derivation display of the special display result. In the case of the specific display result, the ratio of determining the shortened variable display pattern may be high (see FIGS. 10-1(D) and (E)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. For example, it is assumed that the player will be stressed if the deviation of the variation pattern with a long variation time is selected at a high rate even though the relief time is shortened after playing the game for a long time. Therefore, the stress given to the player can be reduced by structuring so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is likely to be selected in the deviation variation of the time saving state via the relief time saving.

(Means 114-8) In any one of means 114-1 to 114-7, a plurality of variable displays including specific variable display patterns (for example, variable patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to execution of ready-to-win effect Variable display pattern determination means for determining the variable display pattern from the pattern (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a portion that performs step S111),
The variable display pattern determining means determines that the display result of the variable display is non-display in the special state controlled when the special condition is established, rather than in the special state controlled based on the derivation display of the special display result. In the case of the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern may be low (see FIGS. 10-1(D) and 10-1(E)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. For example, it is assumed that the player will be stressed if the rate of reaching out is selected even though the relief time is shortened after playing the game for a long time. The stress given to the player can be reduced by structuring that it is difficult to select the fluctuation pattern of reach loss in the time saving state.

In addition, conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, the number of changes in the pattern is counted, and the count result reaches a value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without the occurrence of a big hit. Based on that (that is, based on the variation of a special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without the occurrence of a big hit), there were some that were controlled to the probability variable state. Similarly, based on the fact that the count result reaches a specific value, the game state is controlled to a special state (for example, a time-saving state with a high execution frequency of pattern variations). However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, there is room for improvement in control in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display count. Therefore, in this characterizing portion 113IW, the following game machines (means 115-1) to (means 115-4) are described.

(Means 115-1) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is executed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of
A first passage area (e.g., first start winning) provided at a position through which a game medium passing through a specific path (e.g., left side area) out of a plurality of paths through which a game medium (e.g., game ball) can move mouth) and
A second passage area (for example, a second starting prize opening) provided at a position where game media passing through a special path (for example, the right area) different from the specific path can pass;
As the variable display of the identification information, the variable display of the first identification information based on the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening), and the second starting condition (for example, the second Variable display execution means (for example, steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing variable display of the second identification information based on the establishment of the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening) part) and
A state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the second starting condition is more likely to be established than in the normal state;
and an update means capable of updating numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter),
The updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the first special When the pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes, the relief time reduction counter is updated),
The second start condition is established based on the passage of the game medium through the second passage area,
The state control means
Numerical information updated by the updating means is a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times of execution of the variable display. is controllable to a special state when established,
It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the derived display of the specific display result as the display result of the variable display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can save time by performing step 113IWS537 control to state A),
A special state controlled after an advantageous state (for example, a time saving state via a big hit (time saving state A)) and a special state controlled when a special condition is established (for example, a time saving state via relief time saving (time saving state C ))) and a special output means (for example, the part that performs steps 113IWS42B and S42F in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a special output (for example, the output of easy-to-win state designation signals 1 and 3) ,
In the special state, a specific output means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 in , a portion for performing step 113 IWS35),
The specific output means can execute a specific output in common with the special state controlled after the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is established (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, A game machine characterized by performing step 113IWS35 in common when any time saving flag is set.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally identify the trigger to be controlled to the special state, and it is possible to standardize the specific signal. For example, it is possible to specify externally whether the trigger to be controlled to the time saving state is the occurrence of a big hit or the relief time saving.

In addition, in this example, a signal output that can distinguish between the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the relief time saving state is output to the test device, and either the time saving state via the jackpot or the time saving state via the relief time saving It is assumed that it is possible to commonly output a signal that can specify that it should be hit to the right even when it is controlled by A signal output that can distinguish between the time-saving state and the time-saving state via the relief time-saving, and it is possible to specify that it should be hit right when it is controlled to either the time-saving state via the jackpot or the time-saving state via the relief time-saving. A signal may be output in common. As a result, the hall management computer will be able to analyze operational factors such as the speed reduction arrival rate for relief and the customer base of players when the relief time reduction is reached, as well as standardize signals. be able to.

(Means 115-2) In means 115-1, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving failure pattern) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed. ,
The special output means is a special state that is controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed (for example, a time saving state via time saving (time saving state B)) and a special state that is controlled when the special condition is established ( For example, it is possible to execute a special output (for example, the output of easy-to-win state designation signals 2 and 3) that can be distinguished from the time saving state (time saving state C) via relief time saving (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 , steps 113 (IWS42D, S42F)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally specify the trigger to be controlled to the special state. For example, it is possible to specify externally whether the trigger to be controlled to the time saving state is the time saving failure pattern stop or the relief time saving.

(Means 115-3) In the means 115-1 or 115-2, the state control means is in a special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving design) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed. is controllable to
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed,
When the special display result is derived and displayed with the establishment of the special condition, the state control means can be controlled to a special state of an advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can reduce the time By giving priority to control to the time-saving state via relief rather than control to the time-saving state via time-saving, the time-saving design stops in the relief time-saving variation (relief time-saving number counter = 0 variation). If it is displayed, it may be controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 115-4) In any one of means 115-1 to 115-3, the state control means, when a special display result (for example, time-saving failure pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state is controllable to a special state in
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed,
When the special display result is derived and displayed together with the establishment of the special condition, signal control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, It is also possible to provide a portion for performing step 113 (IWS37E) when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed even if it is a change that leads to relief time-saving.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the outside of the display result.

In addition, the contents shown in this characteristic portion 113IW may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 105-1) to (means 107-15).

(Means 105-1) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is executed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) based on the derived display of is controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. and update means capable of updating numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) based on the execution of variable display, and the state control means is specified as the display result of the variable display. It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the derived display of the display result, and the numerical information updated by the update means is a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times of variable display execution. A specific value corresponding to (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter: 0) can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is satisfied, and the update means executes the variable display of the first identification information. When the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 saves time when the first special symbol fluctuates and when the second special symbol fluctuates. The number counter is updated), and there are multiple types of advantageous states including a specific advantageous state (eg, 10R jackpot A) and a special advantageous state (eg, 10R jackpot B), and control to any of the plurality of advantageous states. The degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on whether the Higher than the advantage of the special state to be controlled (for example, after the 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to the time saving state of 100 times, and after the 10R jackpot B, it is mainly controlled to the time saving state until the next jackpot occurs ), the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state (for example, after the 10R jackpot A, it is mainly 100 It may be controlled to the time-saving state of 800 times as the time-saving state via the relief time-saving state.According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief of the player.

(Means 105-2) When controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, the control is controlled to an advantageous state. After that, the special state of special advantage (for example, the time-saving state that continues until the next big hit occurs) has a different ratio of control (for example, when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). are different, and a special condition is established when the control is performed in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the control is performed in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The number of executions of the variable display for the purpose is common to the special number of times (for example, after a big hit based on the variation of the first special symbol and after a big hit based on the variation of the second special symbol) The number of times of variation required to save time may be 800 times in common).According to such a configuration, when performing variable display of the first identification information and when performing variable display of the second identification information While increasing interest by exhibiting different game properties in and, gambling properties are excessive due to the special number of times being common in the case of performing the variable display of the first identification information and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information. can be suppressed.

(Means 105-3) An unfavorable setting value (for example, set value "1") with a first probability (for example, approximately 1/319) of controlling to an advantageous state, and controlling to a more advantageous state than the first probability a second probability (e.g., about 1/270) that is likely to A special condition is more likely to be established when a disadvantageous set value is set than when an advantageous set value is set, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is Higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, after the 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to the time saving state of 100 times, and as a time saving state via the relief time saving, 800 times It may be controlled to the time saving state.According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantageous setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is The player can be rescued more effectively by having a higher degree of advantage than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state.

(Means 105-4) A setting means is provided which can set one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and after being controlled to an advantageous state, any one of the plurality of types is provided. Whether the special state of advantage is controlled is common when any set value is set (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is common regardless of which set value is set. There is, and the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is met is common when any set value is set (for example, the length of the time saving state via the relief time saving is any Regardless of whether the setting value is set or not, it may be common.According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property due to the setting value to be set, and to realize a sound game. be able to.

(Means 105-5) When controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, When the special condition is satisfied in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is satisfied in response to the variable display of the second identification information, the ratio of which advantageous state is controlled is different. , the advantage of the special state that is controlled after the special condition is established is common (for example, when controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving based on the fluctuation of the first special pattern, the second special pattern In the case of controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving based on the fluctuation of the time saving state, both may be controlled to the time saving state of 800 times.According to such a configuration, the variable display of the first identification information While exhibiting different game characteristics depending on whether the second identification information is variably displayed or when the second identification information is displayed, which set value is set for the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established? It is possible to provide an appropriate degree of relief while suppressing an increase in the gambling property by being common at times.

(Means 105-6) A predetermined variable display pattern (for example, variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern PA1-2) whose variable display period is shorter than the predetermined variable display pattern ~PA1-4) and variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100), variable display pattern determining means , the special state that is controlled when the special condition is established is more advantageous than the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, and if the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result, the shortened variable The ratio of determining the display pattern is high (for example, in the loss variation, in the time saving state via the relief time saving, the variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 10-1 (E), and in the time saving state via the jackpot 10-1(C) and 10-1(H) to select the variation pattern using the variation pattern tables C and H shown in FIG. 10-1). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by shifting to a special state with a high game speed (for example, a short time state with a short fluctuation time) based on the fact that the game has been played for a long period of time. .

(Means 105-7) Variable display pattern determination means ( For example, a part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display pattern determination means controls after the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is controlled to an advantageous state. When the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result, the ratio of determining to the specific variable display pattern is lower than the special state that is set (for example, in the deviation fluctuation, in the time saving state via the relief time saving, Figure 10-1 A variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table E shown in (E), and a variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table H shown in FIG. . According to such a configuration, the decline in interest is suppressed by shifting to a special state with a high game speed (for example, a time-saving state in which the frequency of occurrence of reach is suppressed) based on the fact that the game has been played for a long period of time. be able to.

(Means 105-8) The updating means can update specific numerical information (for example, time saving number counter) different from numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state control means can update the special By setting information (for example, a time saving flag), it is possible to control the special state, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated, and in the special state, the specific numerical information is displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, , 100 times) corresponding to a predetermined value (for example, the value of the time saving counter: 0), the special state is ended, and even if the power supply is stopped, the numerical information and the specific numerical value updated by the updating means A backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding information and setting information of special information, and a backup when a predetermined condition (for example, the output signal from the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on) is satisfied. and an initialization means capable of initializing the contents stored in the storage means, wherein the initialization means initializes the setting information of the special information and the specific numerical information and initializes the numerical information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Not (for example, while resetting whether or not the time saving flag is set and the value of the time saving number counter, the value of the relief time saving number counter may not be reset). According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player even when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Means 106-1) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is executed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) based on the derived display of is controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. Possible state control means, updating means capable of updating numerical information (for example, relief time reduction counter) based on the execution of variable display, and starting conditions (for example, first start winning opening or second starting winning opening a variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a winning of a game ball into the mouth and the establishment of a start condition (for example, neither a jackpot game state nor fluctuation), and a start condition; hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage number buffer, a second hold storage number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as hold information when is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied; When a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information and hold information and a predetermined condition (for example, that the output signal from the clear switch is on when the power is turned on) are met, initialization means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means; numerical information updated by the updating means based on the storage contents of the backup storage means when power supply is started; and suspension information stored by the suspension storage means (for example, a part that executes step S6 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is such that the numerical information updated by the updating means is variably displayed. When the special condition is satisfied by becoming a specific value (e.g., the value of the relief time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to the special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times of execution, it is possible to control to a special state and restore After the control is executed, the special state can be controlled when the special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the restored hold information, and the update means executes the variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated when the variable display of the second identification information is performed and when the second identification information is displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is relieved when the first special symbol fluctuates and when the second special symbol fluctuates It is possible to update the time saving number counter). According to such a configuration, while optimizing the control by initialization, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player when power failure occurs.

(Means 106-2) Control is performed in an advantageous state when the variable display of the first identification information is used as a trigger, and when the control is performed in an advantageous state with the variable display of the second identification information as a trigger. After that, the special state of special advantage (for example, the time-saving state that continues until the next big hit occurs) has a different ratio of control (for example, when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). are different, and a special condition is established when the control is performed in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the control is performed in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The number of executions of the variable display for the purpose is common to the special number of times (for example, after a big hit based on the variation of the first special symbol and after a big hit based on the variation of the second special symbol) The number of times of variation required to save time may be 800 times in common).According to such a configuration, when performing variable display of the first identification information and when performing variable display of the second identification information While increasing interest by exhibiting different game properties in and, gambling properties are excessive due to the special number of times being common in the case of performing the variable display of the first identification information and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information. can be suppressed.

(Means 106-3) An unfavorable set value (for example, set value "1") with a first probability (for example, about 1/319) of controlling to an advantageous state, and controlling to a more advantageous state than the first probability a second probability (e.g., about 1/270) that is likely to A special condition is more likely to be established when a disadvantageous set value is set than when an advantageous set value is set, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is Higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, after the 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to the time saving state of 100 times, and as a time saving state via the relief time saving, 800 times It may be controlled to the time saving state.According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantageous setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is The player can be rescued more effectively by having a higher degree of advantage than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state.

(Means 106-4) Setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, Whether the special state of advantage is controlled is common when any set value is set (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is common regardless of which set value is set. There is, and the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is met is common when any set value is set (for example, the length of the time saving state via the relief time saving is any Regardless of whether the setting value is set or not, it may be common.According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property due to the setting value to be set, and to realize a sound game. be able to.

(Means 106-5) When controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, When the special condition is satisfied in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is satisfied in response to the variable display of the second identification information, the ratio of which advantageous state is controlled is different. , the advantage of the special state that is controlled after the special condition is established is common (for example, when controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving based on the fluctuation of the first special pattern, the second special pattern In the case of controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving based on the fluctuation of the time saving state, both may be controlled to the time saving state of 800 times.According to such a configuration, the variable display of the first identification information While exhibiting different game characteristics depending on whether the second identification information is variably displayed or when the second identification information is displayed, which set value is set for the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established? It is possible to provide an appropriate degree of relief while suppressing an increase in the gambling property by being common at times.

(Means 106-6) A predetermined variable display pattern (for example, variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern PA1-2) whose variable display period is shorter than the predetermined variable display pattern to PA1-4), wherein the variable display pattern determining means selects a special state to be controlled when the special condition is established. , When the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result, the ratio of deciding to the shortened variable display pattern is higher than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in the deviation fluctuation, the relief time reduction Select a variation pattern using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 10-1 (E) in the time-saving state via, and change using the variation pattern table H illustrated in FIG. 10-2 (H) in the time-saving state via the big hit. pattern). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by shifting to a special state with a high game speed (for example, a short time state with a short fluctuation time) based on the fact that the game has been played for a long period of time. .

(Means 106-7) variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to execution of ready-to-win effects; The variable display pattern determination means is such that the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. In this case, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is low (for example, in the off variation, in the time saving state via the relief time saving, the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 10-1 (E) is used to select the variation pattern. , In the time-saving state via the big hit, the variation pattern may be selected using the variation pattern table H shown in FIG. 10-2 (H)). According to such a configuration, the decline in interest is suppressed by shifting to a special state with a high game speed (for example, a time-saving state in which the frequency of occurrence of reach is suppressed) based on the fact that the game has been played for a long period of time. be able to.

(Means 106-8) The update means can update specific numerical information (for example, time saving number counter) different from numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state control means can update the special numerical information By setting information (for example, a time saving flag), it is possible to control the special state, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated, and in the special state, the specific numerical information is displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, , 100 times) corresponding to a predetermined value (for example, the value of the time saving counter: 0), the special state is ended, and even if the power supply is stopped, the numerical information and the specific numerical value updated by the updating means A backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding information and setting information of special information, and a backup when a predetermined condition (for example, the output signal from the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on) is satisfied. and an initialization means capable of initializing the contents stored in the storage means, wherein the initialization means initializes the setting information of the special information and the specific numerical information and initializes the numerical information when a predetermined condition is established. Not (for example, while resetting whether or not the time saving flag is set and the value of the time saving number counter, the value of the relief time saving number counter may not be reset). According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player even when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Means 107-1) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is executed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) based on the derived display of is controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. and updating means capable of updating numerical information (for example, a relief time-saving counter) based on the execution of variable display, wherein the state control means updates the numerical information updated by the updating means. can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by becoming a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed. The updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 When the first special pattern fluctuates and the second special pattern fluctuates, the relief time reduction counter is updated), suggestive production related to the establishment of special conditions (for example, fanning production, countdown production, effect production, telop display production) Executable suggestive effect executing means is further provided, and the suggestive effect executing means has a different ratio of which of the plurality of effect modes to execute the suggestive effect in accordance with the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, a countdown effect). In , the selection ratio of the numerical value to be displayed is different (the numerical value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is selected at a rate of 100%, but the value to be displayed according to the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is selected by lottery ), the effect display range is different in the effect production (it is displayed at a rate of 100% in the range according to the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction, but depending on the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction The display range may be determined by lottery), and in the telop display effect, the color of the telop display area is different (see FIGS. 10-6 (C) and (D)))). , a mode that suggests a period until the special condition is satisfied (see FIGS. 10-11 and 10-12). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect mode of the suggestive effect, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-2) The effect mode of suggestive effect (for example, countdown effect) is a mode in which the number of execution times of variable display until the special condition is satisfied can be specified (see FIGS. 10-11 and 10-12). You can do it. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the number of times the variable display is performed until the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 107-3) The suggestive effect is a effect of displaying a specific image (for example, an effect effect of displaying an effect image), and the specific image has color and size (size of a single image, and size of a plurality of images). (including the size of the display range) is displayed in a plurality of different modes, and the period until the special condition suggested by which mode is displayed differs (Fig. 10-11 and Fig. 10- 12). According to such a configuration, interest can be enhanced by making the user pay attention to the aspect of the specific image.

(Means 107-4) Start condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first start winning opening or second starting winning opening) is established and start condition (for example, neither the jackpot game state nor fluctuation) variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the establishment of the 1 reserved memory number buffer, second reserved memory number buffer), and a predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) that can be displayed when variable display is not executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved memory means and image display means, wherein the suggestive effect execution means can execute a suggestive effect (for example, a telop display effect) when a predetermined image is displayed (for example, a telop display effect and a demo movie effect can be performed. The execution order of the display of the predetermined image and the suggestive effect may be either first, or they may be executed at the same time.), variable display until special conditions are satisfied (See FIGS. 10-6A and 10-6B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-5) Start condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first start winning opening or second starting winning opening) is established and start condition (for example, neither the jackpot game state nor fluctuation) variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the establishment of the 1 reserved memory number buffer, second reserved memory number buffer), and a predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) that can be displayed when variable display is not executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved memory means and image display means, and the suggestive effect execution means can execute a suggestive effect (for example, a telop display effect) when a predetermined image is displayed (for example, a telop display effect and a demo movie effect can be performed. The execution order of the display of the predetermined image and the suggestive effect may be either first, or they may be executed simultaneously.), variable display until the special condition is satisfied (See FIGS. 10-6(C) and 10-6(D)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the presence or absence of the mode of the suggestive effect, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-6) Start condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first start winning opening or second starting winning opening) is established and start condition (for example, neither the jackpot game state nor fluctuation) variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the establishment of the 1 reserved memory number buffer, second reserved memory number buffer), and a predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) that can be displayed when variable display is not executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved memory means and an image display means, wherein the suggestive effect execution means detects that the operation means (for example, the batting operation handle 30) is operated while the predetermined image is displayed, Based on at least one of detecting that the game medium has passed through the winning opening or the second starting winning opening), a suggestive effect (for example, a dialogue effect by voice output) can be executed. good too. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a suggestive effect to the player actually playing the game, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-7) Setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, wherein the suggestive effect executing means is set to any of the set values. The ratio of execution of the suggestive effect (for example, telop display effect) may differ depending on whether or not the character is present (see FIGS. 10-6(A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

(Means 107-8) Setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, wherein the suggestive effect execution means is set to any of the set values. Depending on the state, the ratio of execution of the suggestive effect (eg, telop display effect) may differ depending on the specific mode (eg, “red”) (see FIGS. 10-6(C) and (D)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance interest by drawing attention to the aspect of the suggestive effect, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

(Means 107-9) A setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the set setting value can be executed. setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part in the effect control CPU 120 of the first modification that executes the setting suggestion effect as the effect during fluctuation), and the setting suggestion effect execution means is set to any set value Depending on whether it is set, the ratio of executing the set suggesting effect may differ, and the suggesting effect executing means may have a common ratio of executing the suggesting effect regardless of the set value. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by making the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and it is possible to suppress complication of the control.

(Means 107-10) A setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggesting effect suggesting the set set value. setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part in the effect control CPU 120 of the first modification that executes the setting suggestion effect as the effect during fluctuation), and the setting suggestion effect execution means is set to any set value Depending on whether it is set, the ratio of executing the set suggestive effect differs depending on the special mode (for example, the second mode), and the suggestive effect execution means is set to any set value in the specific mode (for example, " Red”) may have a common ratio of execution of suggestive effects. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by making the player pay attention to the aspect of the suggestive effect, and to suppress complication of the control.

(Means 107-11) Suggestion effect executing means, in a specific period after the start of power supply, either when the initialization process is executed when the power supply is started or when the recovery process is executed The ratio of executing the suggestive effect (for example, the display of the initial number according to the number of times until the relief time is shortened) may be different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-12) Variable display pattern determination means (eg, game control microcomputer) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including special variable display patterns (eg, variation patterns PA3-1, PA3-2) 100 for executing step S111), the variable display pattern determining means can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and can determine the special variable display pattern before the special condition is satisfied. Not determined (for example, the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 can be varied only for variations in which the value of the relief time reduction counter has become 0), and when variable display is performed by a special variable display pattern , It is good also as further having a specific information production|presentation execution means which can perform specific information production|presentation (for example, time saving rush production|production) which informs that it is controlled by a special state. According to such a configuration, the player can be notified that the special condition is controlled to the special state by the establishment of the special condition, and the change in the game state can be clearly notified to the player, so that the player can enjoy the interest when the special condition is established. can be improved.

(Means 107-13) A predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern PA1-1 to PA1-4 not accompanied by a reach effect) and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a reach effect variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3, PB2-1 to PB2-3), the variable display pattern determination means comprising: The specific variable display pattern can be determined (see FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2) in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and when the specific display result is not the specific display result. When the display result of the display becomes the specific display result, the ratio of determining to the specific variable display pattern is higher than the predetermined variable display pattern (see FIG. 10-1(A)), and the predetermined period before the special condition is established ( For example, a variable period in which the remaining number of times until relief is 10 times or less) is more variable than the period before the predetermined period (for example, a variable period in which the remaining number of times until relief is 11 times or more) When the display result of the display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is low (for example, when the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 11 times or more, the fluctuation shown in FIG. 10-1 (B) Select a variation pattern using the pattern table, and when the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 10 times or less, the selection ratio of the variation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3 in FIGS. 10-2 (F) and (G) A variation pattern may be selected using a variation pattern table changed to 0%). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(Means 107-14) A notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed while the variable display is being executed, wherein the notice effect execution means displays the variable display. The advance notice effect can be executed in both cases where the result is the specific display result and when the result is not the specific display result, and the specific display result is better when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result. When the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is higher than in the case where the above does not occur, and the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result in the predetermined period before the special condition is established than in the period before the predetermined period. In addition, it may be possible that the proportion of execution of the advance notice effect is low. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(Means 107-15) Announcement effect executing means capable of executing an announcement effect for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed while variable display is being executed (for example, step 113IWS802A in effect control CPU 120 is executed) and the forewarning effect executing means has a specific mode (for example, "red") and a predetermined mode in both cases of the display result of the variable display being the specific display result and the case of not being the specific display result. (e.g., "blue"), and when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, the ratio of executing the notice effect in the specific mode is higher than the predetermined mode, and the special condition is established. In the predetermined period before the predetermined period, when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the rate of executing the advance notice effect according to the specific mode may be lower than in the period before the predetermined period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 116IW)
Next, the characterizing portion 108IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characterizing portion 108IW, the game state is controlled to one of a low probability/low base state (normal state), a low probability/high base state, a high probability/high base state, and a high probability/low base state. In this example, in the high base state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, the average normal figure fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and compared to the normal state And the probability of becoming a "permanent hit" in the general game will increase. For example, in the normal state, the probability of hitting the normal pattern is 10%, whereas in the time-saving state, the probability of hitting the normal pattern is increased to 90%, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first start winning port) described later has a game ball. becomes easier to win. In addition, not only in such a mode, for example, in the high base state, compared with the normal state, by extending the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab, the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first start winning opening) It may be configured so that the game ball can easily win a prize. Also, in the configuration provided with the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) shown in FIG. You may make it easy for a game ball to win a prize.

Also, in this example, in the high-probability state, the probability of a big win (jackpot probability) is increased compared to the low-probability state. Hereinafter, in this example, the high base state is also referred to as a time saving state, and the high probability state is also referred to as a probability variable state.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the variation display result is a big hit and is controlled to the time saving state (high base state) after the end of the big win game, even if the variation display result is a loss, the time saving loss pattern is displayed. It may be controlled to the time saving state (high base state) based on the derived display. Hereinafter, the time-saving state (high-base state) controlled after the change display result becomes a big hit and the big-hit game ends is also called the time-saving state via the big hit, and the time-saving state controlled based on the fact that the time-saving losing pattern is derived and displayed. (High base state) is also referred to as a time saving state via time saving.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the next big hit does not occur after the power is turned on to the game machine or after the big win occurs, even if the fluctuation display is completed a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example), the time is reduced. It may be controlled to a state (high-base state) (hereinafter, the time-saving state (high-base state) controlled under such circumstances is also referred to as a time-saving state via a relief time-saving state, or simply a relief time-saving state. ”). In addition, in this example, after the relief time reduction occurs, even if the fluctuation display is completed a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) without the occurrence of the next big hit, it is configured so that the relief time reduction is not controlled again. However, it is not limited to such a configuration, and when the variable display of a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) is completed without the next big hit occurring even after the relief time reduction occurs, the relief time reduction is controlled again. It may be configured so that there is a case where Also, for example, even if the next big hit or time saving does not occur even after the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 800 times) after the time saving error occurs, it is controlled to the time saving state (relief time saving). It may be configured so that there is a case where

In addition, in the high base state, (1) control to increase the normal pattern per probability, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, (3) variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first start winning opening) and variable Control to lengthen the opening time of the winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol can be performed, but these (1) to (4) All the controls may be performed, or some of the controls (1) to (4) may not be performed. For example, the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the time-saving loss, and the time-saving state via the relief time-saving via (1) to (4) may be different in which control is performed, may be the same.

Further, for example, in the low base state, the probability per normal pattern may be 1/1, or the probability of deviation is extremely low and the probability per normal pattern may be substantially 1/1. In other words, when the relief time is shortened, even if the control in (1) is not performed, some or all of the above (2) to (4) are performed to achieve a high base state. may

In addition, it is preferable to define the number of times of fluctuation n until the relief time reduction is controlled and the number of times of reduction of time N in the relief time reduction as follows.
2.5P≤n≤3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750-900, and the number of time reductions N is 120-1140. As will be described later, in this example, when the set value "6" with the highest jackpot probability is set, the jackpot probability is about 1/270. It becomes 1026. Further, in the case of the set value "1", which has the lowest jackpot probability, since the jackpot probability is about 1/319, the number of variations n is 797-957, and the number of times of time saving N is 127-1212. In this example, both the number of times of fluctuation n and the number of times of reduction of working hours N are set to "800", and the above-mentioned regulations are satisfied even when set to any of the set values. It should be noted that it is not limited to the configuration shown in this example, and may be configured to satisfy the above regulation at least in the case of the set value "1" with the lowest jackpot probability.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 108IW, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol at the same time.

(First embodiment)
Next, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 116IW will be described.

(Working time reduction type)
FIG. 11-1 is an explanatory diagram showing the time saving type in the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 116IW. In this example, the time saving state (high base state) is a time saving state A that is a time saving state (low probability / high base state) via a big hit, and a time saving state (low probability / high base state) that is a time saving state via a time saving loss. It is possible to distinguish between state B and time saving state C which is a time saving state (low probability / high base state) via relief time saving.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-1, in this example, when the 6R jackpot A occurs in the normal state (low base state) and is controlled to the time saving state (high base state), the number of time saving times is 100 times When the 6R jackpot A is generated during the time saving state (high base state) and controlled to the time saving state (high base state), the time saving state is controlled to 200 times. That is, in this example, the advantage of the time saving state controlled after the big win game is configured to differ according to the game state when the big win occurs. With such a configuration, the degree of advantage can be varied according to the game state, and interest can be improved. In this example, when any one of the 6R jackpots B to D occurs, regardless of whether the state of occurrence is the normal state or the time-saving state, the time is shortened until the next jackpot occurs after the jackpot game. state (high base state).

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-1, in this example, when the time saving deviation occurs during the normal state and is controlled to the time saving state (high base state), the time saving state (high base state) with the number of time saving times of 100 times state). On the other hand, when the time saving deviation occurs during the time saving state (high base state), the number of times of working time saving is not updated. That is, in the time saving state (high base state), when the remaining number of times to be controlled to the time saving state (high base state) is 50 times, even if the time saving deviation occurs, control to the time saving state (high base state) The remaining number of times to be played remains 50 times and is not updated. Therefore, in this example, the time saving deviation that occurred during the time saving state (high base state) is substantially invalidated. In addition, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time saving is off during the variable probability state (high probability state).

It should be noted that the method of controlling the number of times of working hours reduction when the working hour saving is not performed is not limited to that shown in FIG. 11-1. For example, when a time saving deviation occurs during the time saving state (high base state), the remaining number of times controlled to the time saving state (high base state) is set again (for example, set to 100 times). Alternatively, if the time-saving deviation occurs only during the time-saving state (high-based state) via the time-saving deviation of the time-saving state (high-based state), it is controlled to the time-saving state (high-based state). A configuration may be adopted in which the remaining number of times to hold is set anew. Further, for example, even if the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving is controlled to 100 times in the normal state, and the number of times of time saving is controlled to 0 times in the time saving state (that is, time saving state to a normal state). Various modes are conceivable as a method of controlling the number of times of time saving when such time saving is lost.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1, in this example, in the normal state and the time saving state, when the relief time saving is to be performed, the time saving state is controlled to the time saving number of times 800 times. Thus, in this example, the time saving state via the relief time saving is more advantageous than the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the time saving loss because the number of times of time saving is large.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this example, if the relief time reduction occurs during the time reduction state (high base state) via the jackpot or the time reduction loss, while the number of time reductions is updated, the relief time reduction When time saving deviation occurs during the time saving state (high base state) including, the number of times of working time saving is configured not to be updated. With such a configuration, in this example, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the time saving state via relief time saving, and to increase the degree of relief of the player (for example, suppress the investment amount of the player).

In this example, after being controlled to the time saving state of 800 time saving times by the relief time saving, even if the variable display of 800 times is finished without generating a big hit, the relief time saving is not controlled again.

Here, the relief time reduction arrival rate for each set value will be described. Relief time saving arrival rate is the rate of being controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by changing n times (800 times in this example) without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the relief time saving arrival rate K is as follows. It can be calculated as follows.
K = (1-ML) ⁿ = {(P-1)/P} ⁿ
(K = reduction time arrival rate, P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of operations)

Specifically, for example, if the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 8.1%, and if the setting value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is Since it is about 1/310, the relief time-saving arrival rate K is 7.5%, and if the set value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the relief time-saving arrival rate K is 6.9%. If the set value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the relief short-time arrival rate K is 6.3%, and if the set value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280. The relief time-saving arrival rate K is 5.7%, and if the set value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the relief time-saving arrival rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the set value of the jackpot probability, the higher the relief time reduction arrival rate. As a result, the player can be rescued even if the set value has a low probability of big hit.

(Variation pattern table)
FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4 are explanatory diagrams showing variation patterns (variation times) of special symbols and decorative symbols in the first embodiment of the characterizing portion 116IW. EXT shown in FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4, 14 types of the first variation pattern #A to #N for the first special design and the decorative design, and the second variation pattern for the second special design and the decorative design Thirteen types #A to #M are used.

When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the case of low probability / low base state (normal state), the first special symbol for low probability / low base state shown in FIG. 11-2 (A) The fluctuation pattern table A for is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-2 (A), when the low probability / low base state (normal state), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the first variation pattern #A ~ # F is determined.

Also, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the case of high probability / low base state (first probability variable state), for high probability / low base state time shown in FIG. 11-2 (B) The first special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), when the high probability / low base state (first probability variable state), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the first variation pattern #G to #I.

In the first special symbol variation pattern table B shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), compared with the first special symbol variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 11-2 (A), each first variation pattern # G The fluctuation time designated by ~#I is extremely long, 10 minutes or 5 minutes. Therefore, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the high probability/low base state (first probability variation state), the variation display of the long variation of 10 minutes or 5 minutes is performed. be done.

Also, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the case of high probability / high base state (second probability variable state), high probability shown in FIG. 11-2 (C) / for high base state The first special symbol variation pattern table C is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-2 (C), in the case of high probability / high base state (second probability variable state), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the first variation pattern #A In addition to ~#F, either of the first variation patterns #J and #K is determined.

As shown in FIG. 11-2 (C), in the case of high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is lost or hits, the second When the one-reserved storage number is 0, the first variation patterns #J and #K having a variation time of 10 seconds are determined. On the other hand, if the first reserved memory number is 1 or more, the first variation patterns #A and #D having a variation time of 5 seconds are determined.

Also, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the case of the low probability / high base state, the first special symbol variation for the low probability / high base state shown in FIG. 11-3 (D) A pattern table D is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (D), in the case of the low probability / high base state, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in addition to the first variation patterns #A to #F One of the first variation patterns #J, #K, and #L is determined.

As shown in FIG. 11-3 (D), in the case of the low probability/high base state, if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is lost or a small hit, the first reserved memory number is 0 , the first variation patterns #J and #K having a variation time of 10 seconds are determined. On the other hand, if the first reserved memory number is 1 or more, the first variation patterns #A and #D having a variation time of 5 seconds are determined. As will be described later, the low-probability/high-base state ends when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times. It is determined to be the first variation pattern #L (special variation pattern) of 5 seconds.

Also, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, if the variable display is a relief time reduction (when the value of the relief time reduction number counter, which will be described later, becomes 0), FIG. 11-3 (E) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (E), in the case of a variable display that shortens the relief time, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, either the first variation pattern #M or #N is determined by

As shown in FIGS. 11-2 to 11-3, the first variation patterns #M and #N are not used for the variable display that does not reduce the relief time, and are used only for the variation display that shortens the relief time. This is a time-only variation pattern. In this example, when it is determined to be the first variation pattern #M (relief time-saving rush failure), as described later, it is controlled to a time-saving state (that is, a low probability / high base state as a relief time-saving) ) is executed (for example, see FIGS. 11-23 (B) and (C)). With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the relief time is shortened and the control is performed to the time shortening state (low probability/high base state), and to improve the interest when the relief time is shortened. be able to.

In addition, when it is determined to the first variation pattern #N (relief time-saving rush fake jackpot), it is time-saving to inform that it is controlled to a time-saving state (that is, controlled to a low probability / high base state as a relief time-saving) After executing an effect common to the rush effect (see, for example, FIGS. 11-23(B) and (C)), an effect for informing that a big win will occur is executed. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the rescue time has been shortened, the player is notified of the big win, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and the interest can be improved.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of high probability / low base state (first probability variable state), the second for high probability / low base state time shown in FIG. 11-4 (A) A special symbol variation pattern table A is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), in the case of high probability / low base state (first probability variable state), when the second special symbol variation display is executed, the second variation pattern #A In addition to ~#F, either of the second variation patterns #J and #K is determined.

As shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), in the case of high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), if the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is lost or hits, the second When the number of 2 reserved memories is 0, the second variation patterns #J and #K with a variation time of 10 seconds are determined. On the other hand, if the second reserved memory count is 1 or more, the second variation patterns #A and #D having a variation time of 5 seconds are determined.

Also, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is not a high probability / low base state (first probability variable state), the high probability / low base state shown in FIG. 11-4 (B) A second special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), when the high probability / low base state (first probability variable state) is not performed, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the second variation pattern # G ~ #I is determined.

In the second special symbol variation pattern table B shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), compared with the second special symbol variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), each second variation pattern # G The fluctuation time designated by ~#I is extremely long, 10 minutes or 5 minutes. Therefore, in this example, in the state (low probability / low base state, high probability / high base state (second probability state), low probability / high base state) other than high probability / low base state (first probability variable state) When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the variation display of the long variation with the variation time of 10 minutes or 5 minutes is performed.

Also, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the variable display is a relief time reduction (when the value of the relief time reduction counter, which will be described later, becomes 0), FIG. 11-4 (C) The second special symbol variation pattern table E for the relief time reduction establishment time shown in is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-4 (C), in the case of a variable display that shortens the relief time, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, either the second variation pattern #L or #M is determined by

As shown in FIG. 11-4, the second variation patterns #L and #M are not used for the variation display that does not result in a relief time reduction, but are used only for the relief time reduction variation display. is. In this example, when it is determined to be the second variation pattern #L (relief time-saving rush failure), as described later, it is controlled to a time-saving state (that is, a low probability / high base state as a relief time-saving) ) is executed (for example, see FIGS. 11-23 (B) and (C)). With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the relief time is shortened and the control is performed to the time shortening state (low probability/high base state), and to improve the interest when the relief time is shortened. be able to. In addition, when it is determined to the second variation pattern #M (relief time-saving rush fake jackpot), it is time-saving to notify that it is controlled to a time-saving state (that is, controlled to a low probability / high base state as a relief time-saving) After executing an effect common to the rush effect (see, for example, FIGS. 11-23(B) and (C)), an effect for informing that a big win will occur is executed. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the rescue time has been shortened, the player is notified of the big win, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and the interest can be improved.

In this example, the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the loss time saving, and the time saving state via the relief time saving use the same variation pattern table in all cases (that is, the average variation time is the same ), but is not limited to such an aspect. For example, different variation pattern tables may be used (that is, the average variation time is different) in the time saving state via the big hit, the time saving state via the loss time saving, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. For example, the time-saving state via relief time-saving is more likely to be determined by a variation pattern with shortened variation time than the time-saving state via jackpot or lost time-saving, and the average variation time is shortened. good too. With such a configuration, when the relief time is shortened (that is, when the big hit does not occur for a long time), the period until the next big hit is controlled is shortened, so that the interest is reduced. can be suppressed. Also, for example, in the time-saving state controlled via the relief time-saving, unlike the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving loss or via the jackpot, it is determined to be a variation pattern that becomes a reach (or a particularly highly expected reach) at the time of loss. (or a lower percentage is determined) so that the average fluctuation time is shorter. With such a configuration, when the relief time is shortened (that is, when no big hits occur for a long time), the reach (or the reach with a particularly high degree of expectation) does not cause a loss, so the decline in interest is suppressed. can be done.

(First special symbol normal processing)
FIGS. 11-5 to 11-7 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 116IW. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is the case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. In addition, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is the value indicating step S110A, it means that the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed in the first special symbol display device 4A.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the character product control process flag indicates the normal character product control process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 061IWS50A). In addition, when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role control process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is neither during the big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small winning game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the normal accessory control process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 061IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is checked. If the first pending memory number is 0, a first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS52A).

If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102, (step 061IWS53A), decrease the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (subtract 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter), and shift the contents of each storage area (step 061IWS54A). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is changed to the first reserved memory number=n− Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's like That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so the order in which each random number value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiably preserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 061IWS55A). In this example, the set value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 061 IWS 55A. A set value command is also sent when

The timing of transmitting the set value command is not limited to that shown in this example. It may be configured to

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS56A). Specifically, if the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that it is in a low probability / low base state, and the low probability / low base background designation command is executed, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on In some cases, it is determined that it is in a low probability / high base state, and a low probability / high base background designation command is issued. Determine high probability / high base background designation command, determine high probability / low base state when probability variable flag is on and high base flag is off and high probability / low base background designation command, Send.

In addition, regarding the processing of step 061IWS56A (and step 061IWS56B described later) of transmitting the background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120, the first special symbol normal processing (and the second special symbol normal processing described later) ), it may be executed after the update processing of the relief time reduction number counter and the high base number counter and the control processing regarding the high base flag are performed. That is, at the start of the fluctuation, when the relief time reduction counter is updated and controlled to the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) due to the establishment of the relief time reduction, immediately transmit the low probability / high base background designation command When the background is changed or the high base number counter is updated, the short time state (low probability / high base state) ends, and when it is controlled to the normal state, immediately send the low probability / low base background designation command. You may make it change a background by pressing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 061IWS5601A). If the variable probability flag is set, that is, if the variable probability state (high probability state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617A.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 061IWS5601A (and step 061IWS5601B described later), if the variable probability state (high probability state), step 061IWS5602A (and step 061IWS5602B described later) number of relief times after Do not update counters. Therefore, in this example, if the probability variation state (high probability state), even if the variation display is executed, the remaining variation count until the relief time reduction does not decrease, and if it is a non-probability variation state (low probability state) Only, when the variable display is executed, the number of remaining variable times until relief time reduction is reduced. In addition, not only the configuration of this example, but also when it is a variable probability state (high probability state), when the variable display is executed, the number of remaining variations until the relief time reduction may be uniformly reduced.

When the variable probability flag is not set, that is, when it is in a low probability state, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 061IWS5602A). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617A. If the value of the relief time saving number counter is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the relief time saving number counter value (step 061IWS5603A). In this example, the processing of step 061IWS5603A and the processing of step 061IWS5603B, which will be described later, are executed, so that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The value of the relief time reduction number counter is uniformly updated regardless of whether it is done. That is, in this example, the relief time reduction number counter can be updated at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is started and the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started. With such a configuration, in the configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, it is possible to optimize the update of the relief time reduction number counter.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 061IWS5604A). If the value of the relief time-saving number counter after subtraction is 126 or less (step 061IWS5604A N), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time-saving number counter to the EXT data, and saves time-saving. Control is performed to transmit the number 1 designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5605A). For example, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 1, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a command 9501 (H) as a relief time-saving number 1 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 126, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a command 957E (H) as a relief time-saving number 1 designation command.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is 0 (step 061IWS5606A). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617A. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction (step 061IWS5607A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets "800" to a high base frequency counter indicating the remaining total frequency of the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display that can be executed in the high base state. (step 061IWS5608A).

In this example, by the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later), when the value of the relief time reduction counter subtracted at the start of fluctuation becomes 0 and relief time reduction occurs, the time reduction state of 800 times of time reduction (low probability/high base state). In addition, if the state in which the relief time reduction occurred is a time reduction state (low probability / high base state) via a big hit or a time reduction loss, it will again be in a time reduction state (low probability / high base state) with 800 times of time reduction. controlled. Therefore, in this example, if the next big hit does not occur even if the variation display is executed 800 times after the RAM clearing process or after the big win game ends, the time saving is generated and controlled to the time saving state. It will be.

As described above, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-1, the time saving state via the relief time saving is more advantageous than the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the time saving loss. is high. Then, in this example, by the processing of steps 061IWS5606A ~ S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B ~ S5608B to be described later), if relief time saving occurs during the time saving state (high base state) via the big hit or time saving loss, time saving number of times is configured to be updated. For example, a time saving state (high base state) via a big hit or a time saving loss, and when the remaining number of times controlled to the time saving state (high base state) is 50 times, when a relief time saving occurs, a time saving state (high The remaining number of times controlled to the base state) is updated to 800 times. On the other hand, in this example, by the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A (and steps 061IWS061IWS2030B to S2031B) to be described later, if time saving deviation occurs during the time saving state (high base state) including relief time saving, the number of time saving is updated. configured to prevent For example, when it is a time saving state (high base state) via relief time saving and the remaining number of times controlled to the time saving state (high base state) is 500 times, even if time saving deviation occurs, the time saving state (high base state) remains at 500 and is not updated. With such a configuration, in this example, in the configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, it is possible to secure the advantage of the time saving state via the relief time saving. It is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player (for example, suppress the investment amount of the player).

In addition, in this example, the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later) and the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A (and steps 061IWS061IWS2030B to S2031B) described later reduce time in the variable display in which relief time reduction is established. When the deviation is derived and displayed, the time reduction is controlled to the time reduction state by the relief time reduction which is more advantageous than the time deviation. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established (time reduction outage) is started, from the normal state (low probability / low base state) to the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) Control to shift is performed (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A). Then, the time saving loss is derived and displayed by the variable display of the first special symbol in which the relief time saving is established, but at this time the time saving number is not updated due to the time saving loss (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). With such a configuration, even if the time saving deviation is derived and displayed in the variable display for saving time, it is possible to secure the advantage of the saving time state due to the saving time, and to increase the degree of relief for the player (for example, the player investment amount).

Also, in this example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter subtracted at the start of fluctuation becomes 0 and relief time reduction occurs, the value of the high base number counter is set to "800", but the value of the relief time reduction number counter is Not set. When the relief time reduction occurs, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is set to '800' when RAM clear processing is executed after the occurrence of the relief time reduction or when a big win occurs. Therefore, in this example, even if the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) without the occurrence of a big hit after the occurrence of the relief time reduction, the relief time reduction does not occur (that is, the relief time reduction of 800 times not controlled in rapid succession).

Specifically, when the variable display for 800 times of the number of times of saving time is executed without a big hit in the saving time, the saving time ends and the normal state (low probability / low base state) (i.e. No new relief short-time will occur). Further, even if the variation display is performed 800 times without the occurrence of a big hit in the shifted normal state, the relief time reduction does not occur. After the relief time reduction occurs, the relief time reduction occurs again. If the next big hit does not occur even if the variable display is executed, or after the relief time reduction occurs, the RAM clear processing is executed and the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "800", and after the RAM clear processing 800 This is a case where the next big hit does not occur even if the variable display is performed once.

In addition, not limited to the configuration of this example, for example, when the relief time reduction occurs, the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "800", and the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to 1 each time the variable display is performed in the relief time reduction. By subtracting, a new relief time saving is established at the same time as the relief time saving ends, and the relief time saving may be controlled continuously until the next big hit occurs.

In addition, for example, when the relief time reduction is established, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter, and the update processing of the relief time reduction counter is not executed during the relief time reduction, thereby generating a big hit in the relief time reduction. Even if 800 times of variable display is performed without doing so, it is not controlled to save time (that is, it is not controlled continuously to save time for 800 times of time saving), but a big hit occurs after the end of time saving. The relief time reduction may occur when the variable display is executed 800 times.

Further, for example, when the relief time reduction is established, the relief time reduction number counter is set to "800" and the high base number counter is set to "200", thereby preventing the occurrence of a big hit in the relief time reduction. When the variable display for the number of times of time saving is performed 200 times, the relief time saving ends and the normal state (low probability/low base state) is entered, and 600 times of variable display is performed without the occurrence of a big hit in the shifted normal state. When executed, a relief time reduction may occur.

In addition, in this example, the processing of step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later) is executed to set the same 800 times as the number of times of time saving, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until relief time saving occurs. It is not limited to such aspects. For example, in step 061IWS5608A (or step 061IWS5608B described later), the high base number counter may be set to a value greater than "800" or a value less than "800".

Moreover, in step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later), a value corresponding to a plurality of types of times of time reduction may be configured to be settable in the high base number counter. For example, when the relief time is shortened for the first time, the high base number counter is set to "100", and when the relief time is shortened for the second time, the high base number counter is set to "800". You may

Also, for example, a lottery process based on random numbers is configured to determine the number of times of time saving, and in step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later), a value corresponding to the number of times of time saving determined by the lottery process is set to a high base number counter. It may be configured to set In this case, for example, the number of times of time saving may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10%, and may be determined to be 800 times with a probability of 90%. In addition, when the number of times of time saving is determined by lottery processing, the number of times of time saving may be determined by using the type determination random number used to determine the jackpot type and time saving type, or the number of times of time saving may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a relief variation flag indicating that it is a variation display in which relief time reduction is established (step 061IWS5609A). By the process of step 061IWS5609A, in the first variation pattern setting process to be described later, it is possible to specify a variation display that establishes a relief time reduction, and to determine a variation pattern dedicated to the relief time reduction establishment.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to start lighting the right-handed display device 26 (step 061IWS5610A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5611A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS5610A to S5611A (and steps 061IWS5610B to S5611B to be described later), in this example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started when the relief time reduction is established. That is, in this example, in the low-probability/high-base state, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed in the normal variation time, while the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in the long variation. However, since it is a high base state, the probability of hitting a normal game is as high as 999/1000, and the frequency of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab being in the open state is high. Therefore, in order to cause the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning hole to win the game ball and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the game ball is shot at the right side of the game area (right hitting) is advantageous to the player, and the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated. It should be noted that if the right-handed indicator 26 is already lit, such as when a relief time-saving occurs in the time-saving state, the processing of steps 061IWS5610A to S5611A (and steps 061IWS5610B to S5611B described later) may be omitted.

If the value of the relief time-saving number counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 061IWS5604A), the game control microcomputer 100 uniformly sets 7F (H) as EXT data, and the relief time-saving number 1 designation command Then, the command 957F (H) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5614A). Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is in units of 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times) (step 061IWS5615A). Whether or not the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by confirming the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the number of fluctuations remaining until relief time reduction is the number of times in units of 100, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter to the EXT data, and the relief time reduction number 2 Control is performed to transmit the specified command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5616A). For example, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 100, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit the command 9601 (H) as the relief time-saving number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 800, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a command 9608 (H) as a relief time-saving number 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617A.

It should be noted that, in this example, count the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction on the side of the game control microcomputer 100, and shows the case where the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command are transmitted, but such It is not limited to any form. For example, the production control CPU 120 side counts the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction, and the production that suggests that the relief time reduction is established, or the production that suggests the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction (for example, the fanning production described later) or countdown effect) may be executed.

Also, for example, unlike the configuration of this example, in a configuration in which relief time reduction can occur continuously, a relief time reduction number 1 designation command or a relief time reduction number 2 designation command is transmitted only when the relief time reduction occurs for the first time. In such a configuration, when the relief time is reduced after the second time, the rescue time reduction number of times 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number of times 2 designation command may not be transmitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 061IWS5617A), and if it is "0", proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

In this example, since it is controlled to one of the low-probability/low-base state, low-probability/high-base state, high-probability/high-base state, and high-probability/low-base state, when in the high-base state, the low-probability It is controlled to either the /high base state or the high probability/high base state. However, in the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs (steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2269, S2269, and S2274), the number of executions of the variable display in the high base state is not managed, and the value of the high base number counter is set to "0". Therefore, when the value of the high base count counter is not "0", it is controlled to the low probability/high base state.

In the first embodiment, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the variable display in the high base state is managed at a low probability at the end of the jackpot game based on the 6R jackpot A. / When controlled to a high base state, when controlled to a low probability/high base state via a time saving loss, and when controlled to a low probability/high base state via a relief time saving. In this example, when controlled to the low probability / high base state, the total number of fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is predetermined times (100 times, 200 times or 800 times in this example) (See FIG. 11-1) Based on the execution, the low-probability/high-base state is ended and the normal state (low-probability/low-base state) is entered.

If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 061IWS5618A), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 061IWS5619A). If the value of the high base frequency counter has not become "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A. In this example, the process of step 061IWS5618A and the process of step 061IWS5618B, which will be described later, are executed, so that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The value of the high base number counter is updated regardless of whether or not it is done.

When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 061IWS5620A). In this example, if it is determined as Y in step 061IWS5619A (or step 061IWS5619B, which will be described later), the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times, 200 times or 800 times). (see FIG. 11-1) is determined to have been executed, and the process of step 061IWS5620A (or step 061IWS5620B described later) is executed to end the low-probability/high-base state and return to the normal state (low-probability/low-base state) is transferred to

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is extended until the end of variation (step 061IWS5621A). The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right-handed state by continuing the right-handed notification until the variable display ends.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the second special symbol is in the midst of a big hit variation (step 061IWS57A). Concretely, when the second big win flag indicating that the big win will be made is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the second special symbol is in the middle of the big win variation. When it is determined that the second special symbol is in the middle of the big hit variation, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A without performing the processing after step 061IWS58A. As a result, when the variation of the first special pattern is started during the big hit variation of the second special pattern, it is forcibly lost regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly detaching is not limited to the one described above. For example, in step 061IWS57A, when the second special symbol is in the midst of a big hit fluctuation, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) as a hit determination random number is performed, and by moving to step 061IWS59A, at the time of starting winning A win may be forcibly determined regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired.

Also, for example, when the second special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation at step 061IWS57A, without performing the processing of steps 061IWS58A to S63A, a random number value (fixed value) is set as a hit determination random number and a small value is set. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly lost regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

If the second special symbol is not in the middle of the big hit variation, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 061IWS58A), and executes the big hit determination module (step 061IWS59A). The big-hit determination module is a program that determines that a big-hit will be made when the hit-judgment random number matches a predetermined big-hit determination value. In step 061IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability-variable big-hit determination table or the probability-variable big-hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

As described above, in this example, the advantage of the time saving state controlled after the big win game is configured to differ according to the game state when the big win occurs. Specifically, when the 6R jackpot A occurs in the normal state (low base state) and is controlled to the time saving state (high base state), it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 times of time saving, and the time saving state ( When the 6R jackpot A occurs during the high base state) and is controlled to the time saving state (high base state), it is controlled to the time saving state of 200 times of the number of times of time saving. With such a configuration, in this example, step 061IWS59A (described later and step 061IWS59B) is performed by executing the jackpot determination module, and steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A (steps 061IWS5602B to S5608B described later). It is configured to be executed after update processing and high base flag setting processing.

Therefore, in this example, when the display result of the variable display in which the relief time reduction is established is a big hit, the advantage of the time reduction state controlled after the end of the jackpot game is determined assuming that a jackpot occurs in the time reduction state due to the relief time reduction. be. Specifically, when the display result of the variable display in which the relief time reduction is established is the 6R jackpot A, it is assumed that the 6R jackpot A occurs in the time reduction state due to the relief time reduction, and the time reduction state is set to 200 times after the end of the jackpot game. It is controlled (the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS2284, S2286 to S2287, which will be described later). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player by shortening the relief time (for example, suppress the amount invested by the player).

When it is determined to be a big win (step 061IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first big win flag indicating that a big win will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 061IWS61A). . Based on the hit type judging random number, it is determined which of the 6R big win A, 6R big win B, 6R big win C and 6R big win D is (step 061IWS62A), and the big win type is stored (step 061IWS63A). ), go to step 061IWS71A.

In addition, when the big hit is not determined at step 061IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step 061IWS64A). The small-hit determination module is a program that determines a small-hit if the random number for the hit determination (random number for the small-hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small-hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 061IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small win flag indicating that a small win will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol ( Step 061 IWS66A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the minor winning type based on the winning type determination random number (step 061IWS67A), and stores the minor winning type (step 061IWS68A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A. It should be noted that a plurality of types of small wins may be provided, each having a different opening pattern (that is, ease of winning) of the variable winning ball device 061IW17 (special winning opening), or only one type may be provided. . When there is one small hit type, the processing of steps 061IWS67A to S68A may be omitted.

In addition, when the small hit is not determined at step 061IWS65A, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 061IWS69A). If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if the variable probability state (high probability state)), the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A. In this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS69A (and step 061IWS69B described later), if the variable probability state (high probability state), step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) time-saving deviation determination processing It is decided to leave it as it is without shortening the time.

If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is in a low probability state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses a time-saving deviation determination table for determining whether or not time-saving deviation is used to determine time-saving deviation. A lottery process based on the random number is performed to determine whether or not the time saving is lost (step 061IWS70A). In this case, it is determined that the time saving is out of order with a probability of about 1/400. Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A.

It should be noted that, in this example, when a time saving deviation occurs during the time saving state (high base state), the number of time saving times is not updated (see steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A described later), so it is substantially invalidated. , Not limited to such a configuration, for example, when it is in the time saving state (high base state), step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B to be described later) Without executing the time saving loss determination process, it is assumed that there is no time saving as it is. may be configured to be determined by

Also, for example, among the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving, in the case of the time saving state via the relief time saving, step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) determination of time saving loss Without executing the process, in the case of the time saving state via the big hit and the time saving state via the time saving loss, the time saving loss determination process of step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) may be executed. In other words, in the case of the time saving state via the relief time saving, the time saving failure may not occur, and in the case of the time saving state via the big win and the time saving state via the time saving failure, the time saving failure may occur.

It should be noted that, in the case of providing a plurality of types of time-saving lag and configuring each to have a different degree of advantage (for example, the number of time-savings), for example, a value corresponding to the value of the random number for type determination stored in the random number buffer area The type is determined as the type of time saving. Also, in this case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the first start winning determination process (step S101A) and stored in advance in the first reservation storage buffer, and determines the time saving type. Moreover, in this case, in addition to the big hit type determination and the small hit type determination, even in the time saving type determination, the determination process may be performed using a common type determination random number.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time saving type (step 061IWS71A). In this case, for example, when the 6R big hit A is determined, the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "1", and when the 6R big hit B is determined, the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "3". If it is determined to be a 6R big win C, the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "5", and if it is determined to be a 6R big win D, the special symbol to be stopped is "7". If it is determined to be a small hit, the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "9", and if it is determined to be a time-saving loss, the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "2". If it is determined to be lost (no time saving), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "-". Further, the game control microcomputer 100 stores the determined special symbol stop symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 061IWS72A).

Then, in step 061IWS89A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 061IWS89A).

(First variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 11-8 is a flow chart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 116IW. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the relief variation flag is set (step 061IWS17091A).

If the relief variation flag is set, that is, if it is a variation display in which the relief time reduction is established, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the relief variation flag (step 061IWS17092A), and determines the variation pattern. As the variation pattern table, the first special symbol variation pattern table E for relief time reduction shown in FIG. 11-3(B) is selected (step 061IWS17093A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS1717A.

When the relief variation flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 061IWS1710A). If the variable probability flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1711A). If the high base flag is not set (that is, if the low probability / low base state), the game control microcomputer 100, as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, Figure 11-2 (A) is selected for the first special symbol variation pattern table A for the low probability/low base state shown in (step 061IWS1712A). If the high base flag is set (that is, if the low probability / high base state)), the game control microcomputer 100, as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, Figure 11-3 (D ) is selected for the first special symbol variation pattern table D for the low probability/high base state (step 061IWS1713A).

If the variable probability flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1714A). If the high base flag is not set (that is, if the high probability / low base state), the game control microcomputer 100, as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, Figure 11-2 (B) is selected for the first special symbol variation pattern table B for the high probability/low base state shown in (step 061IWS1715A). If the high base flag is set (that is, if the high probability / high base state), the game control microcomputer 100, as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, Figure 11-2 (C) is selected for the first special symbol variation pattern table C for the high probability/high base state shown in (step 061IWS1716A).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the variation pattern table to be used in steps 061IWS17093A, 061IWS1712A, S1713A, S1715A, and S1716A, and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. 11-2 and 11-3 is determined (step 061IWS1717A).

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1704A).

Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 061IWS1717A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time to the first variation time timer and sets the variation time. measurement is started (step 061IWS1705A), and the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 061IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 061IWS1707A).

By executing the above processing, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if the gaming state is a high probability / low base state, the first special symbol variation pattern table B is selected to perform the variation display of the long variation. On the other hand, if the game state is a state other than the high probability/low base state, the first special symbol variation pattern table A is selected and the normal variation time variation display is executed. Further, in the case of the variation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established, the first special symbol variation pattern table E is selected, and the variation display exclusively for the relief time reduction establishment is executed.

(First special symbol variation process)
FIG. 11-9 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role product control process (step S120) (step 061IWS1120A). In addition, when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role control process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is neither during the big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small winning game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the role product control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103, if not yet transmitted, determines whether or not to make a big hit, and the type of the big win. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit any display result designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variable time timer (step 061IWS1122A), and when the first variable time timer times out (step 061IWS1123A), performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 061 IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 061IWS1130A).

If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B is displaying the big hit symbol (step 061IWS1125A). Whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the big hit symbol is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing, It can be determined by confirming whether or not a second big hit flag indicating that a big hit will be made based on the variable display of the second special symbol is set.

If the second special symbol display device 4B does not derive and display the big winning symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the small winning symbol (step 061IWS1126A). Whether or not the small winning symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not a second small hit flag indicating a small hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol. If the second special symbol display device 4B does not derive and display the small winning symbol, the process is terminated as it is.

When the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the big winning symbol (Y of step 061IWS1125A), or when the minor winning symbol is derived and displayed (Y of step 061IWS1126A), the CPU 103 instructs the effect control CPU 120 to 1 Perform control to transmit a compulsory pattern determination designation command (step 061IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 061IWS1130A).

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS1125A to S1126A and S1129A, in this characteristic part 116IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, or when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit. In this case, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped to prevent a situation in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously generate a big win or a small win. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forced out, the variation of the decoration symbol is based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 061IWS1129A. As a result of the display, control is performed so as to forcibly stop and display the lost pattern.

In this example, when the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the stop symbol of the variable display that shortens the relief time, the control of transmitting the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is not performed. In addition, even when the stop symbol of the variable display that saves the relief time is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the control for transmitting the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is not performed (steps 061IWS1125B to S1126B described later, S1129B). That is, in this example, during the execution of the variable display of one of the special symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the relief time reduction is established by the execution of the variable display of the other special symbol, the one Do not forcibly stop the variable display of special symbols.

In this example, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped regardless of the display result. However, it is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small win during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, when the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is a big win, or In addition, in the case of a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage (for example, 6R jackpot B), the variation display of the first special symbol is not forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol variation processing may be ended as it is. . In this case, based on the fact that the variation display of the second special symbol has become a small hit, the value of the role product control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126), and the small winning game is played. transition to Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, step 061IWS1120A is judged as N, the processing of steps 061IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer of step 061IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big win with a high degree of advantage is being executed, the first special symbol is displayed during the small win game. The update of the variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, it is a case where the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and during the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit. If there is, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N of step 061IWS1127A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small win and the variation display of the first special symbol that results in a loss or a small win is being executed, the first variation is performed during the small win game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small winning game is finished, the update of the first variable time timer is resumed.

(First special symbol stop processing)
11-10 and 11-11 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 061IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 061IWS2011A). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 061IWS2012A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2013A).

In this example, the processing of steps 061IWS5617A to S5621A and S5617B to S5621B is executed, so that the time saving state ( (low probability/high base state) and transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state). 11-1), the right-handed display 26 is turned off.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 061IWS2014A). Incidentally, in this case, if the first compulsory design decision designation command is sent in step 061IWS1129A of the first special design variation process, regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation, the first special design is forced as the stop design. Derivation and display of the target missing pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step 061IWS2015A). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot start flag indicating the start of the jackpot (step 061IWS2016A). Also, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 061IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed indicator 26 (step 061IWS2018A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027A.

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, lighting of the right hand indicator 26 is started when a big hit is achieved in the variation display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big win game. , and the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

In this example, after the big-hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big-hit game is started based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, so the right-hand shot is made at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41. You may comprise so that lighting of the indicator 26 may be started.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N of step 061IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 061IWS2020A). When the 1st small hit flag is set, control which transmits the small hit start designation command vis-a-vis production control CPU120 is done (step 061IWS2021A). Also, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 061IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning opening preprocessing (step 061IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027A.

At step 061IWS2027A, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step 061IWS2027A).

When the first small hit flag is not set (N of step 061IWS2020A), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be a time saving loss (step 061IWS2030A). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined to be time-saving can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 061IWS72A.

If it is determined to be time saving, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS2031A). Then, if the high base flag is set (that is, in the low probability/high base state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS2036A.

If the high base flag is not set (in this example, the time saving is not lost in the variable probability state (high probability state), so if it is in the normal state (low probability / low base state)), the CPU 103 is the time saving A high base flag is set (step 061IWS2032A) based on the occurrence of a deviation. Also, the CPU 103 sets the high base number counter to "100" (step 061IWS2033A).

By the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A (and steps 061IWS2030B to S2033B described later), in this example, when a time saving deviation occurs in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the time saving state of 100 times of time saving (low probability / high base state), and when time-saving deviation occurs in the time-saving state (low probability / high-base state), the time-saving state (low probability / high-base state) continues, and the time-saving number (that is, the value of the high-base number counter) is Not updated.

In this example, by the processing of steps 061IWS2030A ~ S2033A (and steps 061IWS2030B ~ S2033B to be described later), if a time saving deviation occurs during the time saving state (high base state) including relief time saving, the number of time saving is not updated It is configured. With such a configuration, in this example, in the configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, it is possible to secure the advantage of the time saving state via the relief time saving. It is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player (for example, suppress the investment amount of the player).

It should be noted that, in this example, when a time saving deviation occurs in the time saving state (low probability / high base state), the time saving number (that is, the value of the high base number counter) is configured not to be updated, but in such a configuration Not limited, for example, if time saving occurs in the time saving state (low probability / high base state) of the time saving state (low probability / high base state) via the jackpot or time saving loss (or, and of the time saving state If the remaining number of times is less than 100 times due to the lack of time saving), the number of times of saving time (that is, the value of the high base number counter) is updated, and the number of times of saving time is 100 times (low probability / high base state). may be made.

In step 061IWS2033A (and step 061IWS2033B to be described later), a value corresponding to a plurality of types of times of time reduction may be configured to be able to be set in the high base number counter. For example, when the time saving is lost for the first time, the high base number counter is set to "100", and when the time saving is lost for the second time, the high base number counter is set to "200". You may

Also, for example, a lottery process based on random numbers is configured to determine the number of times of time saving, and in step 061IWS2033A (and step 061IWS2033B described later), a value corresponding to the number of times of time saving determined by the lottery process is set to a high base number counter. It may be configured to set In this case, for example, the number of times of time saving may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 90%, and may be determined to be 200 times with a probability of 10%. In addition, when the number of times of time saving is determined by lottery processing, the number of times of time saving may be determined by using the type determination random number used to determine the jackpot type and time saving type, or the number of times of time saving may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2034A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2035A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS36A.

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2034A to S2035A (and steps 061IWS2034B to S2035B described later), in this example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started when time-saving deviation occurs.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step 061IWS2036A).

In addition, in this example, when the time saving error occurs, the value of the relief time saving counter is not set to "800" (that is, the remaining number of times until the relief time saving is not reset). First, the value of the relief time-saving number counter is set to "800" (that is, the remaining number of times until the relief time-saving is reset) even when the time-saving loss occurs, such as when the big hit occurs or when the relief time-saving occurs. good too.

As shown in FIGS. 11-10 to 11-11, in this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, and when time-saving deviation occurs, the right side of the game area for the player It is configured to be able to execute a right-handed notification prompting a player to shoot a game ball. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, the gate notification prompting the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the passage gate 41 can be executed as the right hitting notification. may

In addition, in the state where the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in the second special pattern, right-handed notification and gate notification are not executed, and right-handed notification and gate notification are executed when the game ball wins in the first start winning hole in that state. (In this case, since it is in the gate passage waiting state, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning opening, the first special symbol variable display is not started immediately, and the first reservation storage is performed). You may

Conversely, when the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability/low base state) (that is, when there is a possibility that a right-handed operation is being performed), the degree of recognition It may be configured to perform a left-handed notification prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the left of the game area by a low-volume mode (for example, low-volume sound output or small screen display). . On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port (or special winning port provided on the right side of the game area) is detected (that is, the right-handed operation is intended If it is assumed that the player is being hit on a regular basis), it may be configured to perform the left-handed notification by a mode with a high degree of recognition (for example, outputting a loud sound or displaying on a large screen). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately perform the launch notification. In particular, according to the above configuration, for a player who accidentally shoots a game ball to the right side of the game area, a slight left-handed notification is given in a mode in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine is low. For a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation, a left-handed notification may be given in a mode in which the degree of awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to prompt the game store clerk to return to the left-handed operation to the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation.

Further, in the above case, when the number of game balls detected on the right side of the game area, such as the passage gate 41 or the second start winning hole, reaches a certain number, it may be configured to perform left-handed notification. In addition, in the passage gate 41, when a game ball is detected multiple times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left hitting notification is performed, and the second start winning opening (or provided on the right side of the game area) In the special winning opening), when a specific number (for example, 1) or more game balls that are smaller than a predetermined number are detected, left-handed notification may be performed.

It should be noted that in this characteristic portion 116IW, a demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied. When it is detected that a game ball has entered a special winning hole provided on the right side, the execution of the demonstration display being executed may be terminated and left-handed notification may be performed.

(Second special symbol normal processing)
FIGS. 11-12 to 11-14 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol normal processing in the first embodiment of the characterizing portion 116IW. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner in the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the character product control process flag indicates the normal character product control process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 061IWS50B). In addition, when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role control process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is neither during the big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small winning game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role product control process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 061IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is checked. If the second pending memory number is 0, a second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS52B).

If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102, (Step 061IWS53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step 061IWS54B). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is changed to the second reserved memory number=n− Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved memory number is extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's like That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so the order in which each random number value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 061IWS55B). In this example, the set value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 061 IWS 55B. A set value command is also sent when

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS56B). It should be noted that the specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 061IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 061IWS5601B). If the variable probability flag is set, that is, if the variable probability state (high probability state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617B.

When the variable probability flag is not set, that is, when it is in a low probability state, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 061IWS5602B). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617B. If the value of the relief time saving number counter is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the relief time saving number counter value (step 061IWS5603B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 061IWS5604B). If the value of the relief time-saving number counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 061IWS5604B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time-saving number counter to the EXT data, and saves time-saving. Control is performed to transmit a number 1 designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5605B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is 0 (step 061IWS5606B). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617B. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a high base flag based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction (step 061IWS5607B). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets "800" to a high base frequency counter indicating the remaining total frequency of the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display that can be executed in the high base state. (step 061IWS5608B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a relief variation flag indicating that it is a variation display in which relief time reduction is established (step 061IWS5609B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to start lighting the right-handed display device 26 (step 061IWS5610B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5611B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

If the value of the relief time-saving number counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 061IWS5604B), the game control microcomputer 100 uniformly sets 7F (H) as EXT data, and the relief time-saving number 1 designation command Then, the command 957F (H) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5614B). Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is in units of 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times) (step 061IWS5615B). If the number of fluctuations remaining until relief time reduction is the number of times in units of 100, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter to the EXT data, and the relief time reduction number 2 Control is performed to transmit the specified command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5616B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 061IWS5617B), and if it is "0", proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 061IWS5618B), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 061IWS5619B). If the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 061IWS5620B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is extended until the end of variation (step 061IWS5621B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the first special symbol is in the middle of a big hit variation (step 061IWS57B). Concretely, when the first big win flag indicating that the big win will be achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the first special symbol is in the midst of the big win variation. When it is determined that the first special symbol is in the middle of the big hit variation, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71B without performing the processing after step 061IWS58B. Thus, when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the variation of the big hit of the first special symbol, it is forcibly lost regardless of whether or not the judgment value of the big hit is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly detaching is not limited to the one described above. For example, in step 061IWS57B, when the first special symbol is in the middle of a big hit fluctuation, a process of setting a random value (fixed value) as a hit determination random number is performed, and by moving to step 061IWS59B, any time at the time of start winning Regardless of whether or not the random number for the hit determination has been obtained, the game may be forcibly lost.

Also, for example, when the first special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation at step 061IWS57B, without performing the processing of steps 061IWS58B to S63B, a random value (fixed value) is set as a hit determination random number and a small value is set. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly lost regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

If the first special symbols are not fluctuating in the jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 061IWS58B), and executes the jackpot determination module (step 061IWS59B). The big-hit determination module is a program that determines that a big-hit will be made when the hit-judgment random number matches a predetermined big-hit determination value. In step 061IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability-variable big-hit determination table or the probability-variable big-hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

When it is determined to be a big win (step 061IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big win flag indicating that a big win is to be made based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step 061IWS61B). . Based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined which of the 6R big win A, 6R big win B, 6R big win C and 6R big win D is (step 061IWS62B), and the big win type is stored (step 061IWS63B). ), go to step 061IWS71B.

Also, if the game control microcomputer 100 does not make a big hit at step 061IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step 061IWS64B). The small-hit determination module is a program that determines a small-hit if the random number for the hit determination (random number for the small-hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small-hit determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 061IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that a small hit will be made based on the variation display of the second special symbol ( Step 061 IWS 66B). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the minor winning type based on the winning type determination random number (step 061IWS67B), and stores the minor winning type (step 061IWS68B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71B. It should be noted that a plurality of types of small wins may be provided, each having a different opening pattern (that is, ease of winning) of the variable winning ball device 061IW17 (special winning opening), or only one type may be provided. . When there is one small hit type, the processing of steps 061IWS67B to S68B may be omitted.

In addition, when the small hit is not determined at step 061IWS65B, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 061IWS69B). If the variable probability flag is set, that is, if the variable probability state (high probability state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS71B. In this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS69B, if it is in a probability variable state (high probability state), without performing the time saving loss determination process of step 061IWS70B, it is decided to be out without time saving as it is It is determined.

If the probability variation flag is not set, that is, if the probability state is low, the game control microcomputer 100 uses a time-saving loss determination table for determining whether or not time-saving loss, random numbers for time-saving loss determination A lottery process based on the above is performed, and it is determined whether or not the time saving is lost (step 061IWS70B). In this case, it is determined that the time saving is out of order with a probability of about 1/400. Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time saving type (step 061IWS71B). In this case, for example, when the 6R big hit A is determined, the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "1", and when the 6R big hit B is determined, the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "3". If it is determined to be a 6R big win C, the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "5", and if it is determined to be a 6R big win D, the special symbol to be stopped is "7". If it is determined to be a small hit, the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "9", and if it is determined to be a time-saving loss, the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "2". If it is determined to be lost (no time saving), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "-". In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 stores the determined stop symbol of the special symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 061IWS72B).

Then, in step 061IWS89B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 061IWS89B).

(Second fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIGS. 11-15 are flowcharts showing the second variation pattern setting process in the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 116IW. In the second variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the relief variation flag is set (step 061IWS17091B).

If the relief variation flag is set, that is, if it is a variation display in which the relief time reduction is established, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the relief variation flag (step 061IWS17092B), and determines the variation pattern. As the variation pattern table, the second special symbol variation pattern table C for the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 11-4(C) is selected (step 061IWS17093B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS1717B.

If the relief variation flag is not set, it is checked whether the probability variation flag is set (step 061IWS1710B). If the variable probability flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1711B). If the high base flag is not set (that is, if the high probability / low base state), the game control microcomputer 100, as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, Figure 11-4 (A) Select the second special symbol variation pattern table A for the high probability/low base state shown in (step 061IWS1712B). If the probability variation flag was not set (N of step 061IWS1710B), or if the high base flag was set (Y of step 061IWS1711B), the game control microcomputer 100 determines the variation pattern. As the variation pattern table, the second special symbol variation pattern table B for the time other than the high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 11-4(B) is selected (step 061IWS1713B).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 061IWS1712B and S1713B and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the second special symbol determination buffer. 11-4 is determined (step 061IWS1717B).

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1704B).

Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the second special symbol is determined in step 061IWS1717B, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time to the second variation time timer, and sets the variation time. (Step 061IWS1705B), and start the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (Step 061IWS1706B). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol variation process (step 061IWS1707B).

By executing the above processing, in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if the gaming state is a high probability / low base state, the second special symbol variation pattern table A is selected to perform the normal variable time variable display. On the other hand, if the game state is a state other than the high probability/low base state, the second special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and the variation display of the long variation is executed. Further, in the case of the variation display of the second special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established, the variation pattern table C for the second special symbol is selected, and the variation display dedicated to the relief time reduction establishment is executed.

(Second special symbol variation process)
FIG. 11-16 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the value of the role product control process flag indicates the normal role product control process (step S120) (step 061IWS1120B). In addition, when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role control process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and neither the big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the small winning game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). .

If the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the role product control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103, if not yet transmitted, determines whether or not to make a big hit, and the type of the big win. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit any display result designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 061IWS1122B), and when the second variable time timer times out (step 061IWS1123B), performs control to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 061 IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 061IWS1130B).

When the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A is deriving and displaying the jackpot symbol (step 061IWS1125B). Whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing, It can be determined by confirming whether or not a first big hit flag indicating that a big hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol is set.

If the first special symbol display device 4A does not derive and display the big hit symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A derives and displays the small winning symbol (step 061IWS1126B). Whether or not the small winning symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not a first small hit flag indicating that a small hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol is set. If the first special symbol display device 4A does not derive and display the small winning symbol, the process is terminated as it is.

When the first special symbol display device 4A derives and displays the jackpot symbol (Y of step 061IWS1125B), or when the first special symbol display device 4A derives and displays the small winning symbol (Y of step 061IWS11256), The CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 061IWS1130B).

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS1125B to S1126B and S1129B, in this characteristic part 116IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, or when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit. In this case, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped to prevent the occurrence of a big hit or a small hit at the same time with the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, when the second special symbol variation display is forced out, the decoration symbol variation is based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 061IWS1129B. As a result of the display, control is performed so as to forcibly stop and display the lost pattern.

In this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped regardless of the display result. However, it is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when the variation display of the first special symbol results in a small win during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is a big win and a big win with a high degree of advantage. In the case of the type (for example, 6R jackpot C), the second special symbol variation process may be terminated without forcibly stopping the variation display of the second special symbol. In this case, based on the fact that the variation display of the first special symbol has become a small hit, the value of the role product control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126), and the small winning game is played. transition to Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, step 061IWS1120B is judged as N, the processing of steps 061IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second variable time timer of step 061IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes a probability variable big hit is being executed, the second variation time timer is set during the small winning game. is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, it is a case where the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit. If there is, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N in step 061IWS1127B). Therefore, even when the variation display of the first special symbol results in a small win and the variation display of the second special symbol that results in a loss or a small win is being executed, the second variation is performed during the small win game. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and the small winning game is finished, the update of the second variable time timer is resumed.

In this example, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the player enters the game ball in the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first starting winning hole to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. In order to perform the shooting operation (left hitting) of the game ball aiming at the left side of the area, in principle, the game ball enters the second start winning hole provided on the right side of the game area and the second special symbol is displayed. Variation display is not performed, but the player erroneously performs the shooting operation (or intentionally displays the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the variation display of the first special symbol, even if the long variation is performed. It is possible that the variable display of the second special symbol is performed (aiming). In other words, there is a risk that a big-hit symbol will be derived and displayed in a variable display that the player does not intend, or that the player will intentionally aim for the second start winning hole.

Therefore, in this example, during the execution of the variable display of one of the special symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, based on the fact that the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other special symbol, In the variable display of the one special symbol, it is configured to be able to forcibly derive and display the missing symbol. For example, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), even if a winning to the second start winning port unintended by the player occurs and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the second special symbol If the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a small win, the variable display of 1 is forcibly stopped with a losing symbol. In addition, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the player intentionally performs a firing operation (right-handed) aiming to win a prize in the second start prize-winning port, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Even if it is, the variation display of the second special symbol is a long variation (for example, variation time 10 minutes), so the variation efficiency is extremely poor. Then, during execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forced to be a lost symbol. will be stopped. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the derivation display of the big win symbols in the unintended variable display of the special symbols, and to minimize the effect of the player's intentional strategy.

(Second special symbol stop processing)
11-17 and 11-18 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 061IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 061IWS2011B). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 061IWS2012B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 061IWS2014B). It should be noted that, in this case, when the second compulsory design determination designation command is transmitted in step 061IWS1129B of the second special design variation process, regardless of the determination result at the start of variation, the second special design is forced as a stop design. Derivation and display of the target missing pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second big hit flag is set (step 061IWS2015B). When the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag (step 061IWS2016B). Also, the CPU 103 clears the second big hit flag (step 061IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed indicator 26 (step 061IWS2018B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started when a big hit is achieved in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big win game. , and the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

When the second big hit flag is not set (N of step 061IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 061IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2021B). Also, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 061IWS2022B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning opening preprocessing (step 061IWS2026B). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 061IWS2027B).

When the second small hit flag is not set (N of step 061IWS2020B), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be a time saving loss (step 061IWS2030B).

If it is determined to be time saving, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS2031B). Then, if the high base flag is set (that is, in the low probability/high base state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS2036B.

When the high base flag is not set (that is, in the normal state (low probability/low base state)), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag (step 061IWS2032B). In addition, the CPU 103 sets "100" in the high base count counter (step 061IWS2033B).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed display device 26 (step 061IWS2034B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2035B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS36B.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 061IWS2036B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 061IWS2037B).

(external output signal)
FIGS. 11-19 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of external output signals externally output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In this example, in step S23, a process of outputting a signal as shown in FIGS. 11-19 to an external device such as a hall management computer is performed. As shown in FIGS. 11-19, in this example, as the external output signals, the jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, jackpot 3 signal, jackpot 4 signal, fluctuation stop signal, security signal, door open signal, prize ball signal, and An out-ball signal is output. Among them, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal output to the outside during the jackpot game. Also, the big win 2 signal is a signal that is externally output during the big win game and during the high base state. Also, the big hit 3 signal is a signal that is externally output during the time-saving pattern fixing period. Also, the big hit 4 signal is a signal that is externally output at the start of the variable display that shortens the relief time. Further, the fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is externally output at the start of the symbol fixing period. Also, the security signal is a signal that is externally output when an error is detected. Further, the door open signal is a signal that is externally output when the door is detected to be open. Also, the prize ball signal is a signal that is externally output when 10 prize balls are released. Also, the out-ball signal is a signal output to the outside when 10 out-balls are detected. An external device such as a computer for hall management can measure the number of big wins by one signal of big wins, can measure the number of consecutive games by one signal of big wins and two signals of big wins, and can measure the number of consecutive games by three signals of big wins. It is possible to measure the number of times, and it is possible to measure the number of times of high base control via relief time reduction by 4 jackpot signals.

In this example, in addition to the case of shifting to the high base state at the end of the jackpot game, there is a case where the shift to the high base state occurs when the time saving losing pattern is derived and displayed, so the time saving losing pattern is derived and displayed. In this case, the external output of the big win 3 signals is started at the end of the symbol fixing period. In addition, since it may be shifted to the high base state even when the relief time is shortened, when the variation display for the relief time reduction is executed, the external output of the 4 jackpot signals is started at the start of the variation display. be done. It should be noted that, for example, when the shift to the high base state is triggered by the fact that the time-saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, the signal is output from a dedicated terminal different from the terminal for outputting the jackpot signal 2, thereby shortening the time. It may be possible to externally identify that the lost symbol has been derived and displayed, and that the state has been shifted to the time-saving state. Also, for example, the jackpot 2 signal is externally output during the jackpot game and the high probability/high base state, and the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal are output at the start of the low probability/high base state (or low probability/high base state). state), so that the high-probability/high-base state and the low-probability/high-base state can be distinguished externally.

In this example, when the relief time is shortened, the external output of the 4 jackpot signals is started in response to the start of the relief time reduction variable display, and the symbol determination period is started in response to the end of the variable display. A stop signal is output externally. With such a configuration, it is possible to output to the outside at appropriate timing a signal that can specify that the control to the high base state is performed based on the fact that the repair time is shortened. In addition, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside when the four jackpot signals and the fluctuation stop signal are output. In addition, the number of times the relief time has been shortened by outputting the 4 jackpot signals can be specified externally. In this way, in an external device such as a hall management computer, it is possible to identify the trigger, timing, and number of times that the high base state is controlled. It is possible to analyze the operation of the game machine in the game parlor, such as what kind of customer base the players are at the time.

It should be noted that, in this example, when the variable display to be relief time reduction is started, the high base flag is set to shift to the time reduction state (low probability/high base state), but for example, the relief time reduction When the variable display is stopped, or at the start or end of the pattern confirmation period, the high base flag is set and it is configured to move to the time saving state (low probability / high base state) Alternatively, when the high base flag is set and the state shifts to the time saving state (low probability/high base state), the external output of the 4 jackpot signals may be started.

The big win 3 signal and the big win 4 signal may be configured to be output even during the big win game. In addition, in this example, a case of outputting separate external output signals (3 jackpot signals and 4 jackpot signals) for the case of time saving and the case of relief time saving is shown. may be configured to output

Also, the big win 3 signal and the big win 4 signal may be configured to be output at the timing after the fluctuation stop signal is output during the symbol fixation period.

For example, a variation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period of the lost symbol, and the big hit 3 signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after outputting the variation stop signal, or a variation display that shortens the relief time. A variation stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern fixing period, and the big win 4 signal may be output during the pattern fixing period after the fluctuation stop signal is output. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside when the fluctuation stop signal and the big win 3 signal or the big win 4 signal are output at the same time.

Also, the big win 3 signal may be configured so as to be continuously output even during the high-base state after the time-saving loss. Also, the 4 jackpot signals may be configured to be continuously output even during the high base state through the relief time reduction. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably determine the type of time saving even during the high base state.

(Transition of game state)
Next, transition of the game state in the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 116IW will be described. FIGS. 11-20 are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the game state transitions in the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 116IW. In the first embodiment, in the low-probability/low-base state (normal state), the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a normal variable time, while the variable display of the second special symbol is long. Runs with variation. In addition, since it is in a low base state, the probability per normal pattern is as low as 1/1000, and the frequency of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab being in an open state is low. Therefore, in order to cause the game ball to enter the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first start winning hole and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area (left strike). Therefore, in the low-probability/low-base state (normal state), starting winnings to the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first starting winning opening mainly occur, and mainly the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big win occurs in the low probability/low base state, 6R big win A or 6R big win B mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, when the 6R big hit B occurs in the low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big win game, the high probability/ It shifts to a low base state (first variable probability state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when the 6R big win A occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the big win game is over, the state is shifted to the low probability/high base state, and the next big win occurs a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). ), the low probability/high base state is maintained (see steps 061IWS2284, S2286, and S2288).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-20, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), even if it is lost, when the time saving lost pattern is derived and displayed, the low probability / high base state (see step 061IWS2032A, S2032B). Furthermore, even if it is lost, if the relief time is shortened (after the RAM clearing process or after the big win game, the next big win does not occur and the number of fluctuations reaches 800 times), It is controlled to the low probability/high base state (see steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B).

When moving to the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in normal variation time, while the variation display of the first special symbol is performed in long variation. be. In addition, since it is in a low base state, the probability per normal pattern is as low as 1/1000, and the frequency of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab being in an open state is low. Therefore, in order to cause the game ball to enter the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second start winning hole and execute the variable display of the second special symbol, the player aims at the right side of the game area and shoots the game ball (right strike). Therefore, in the high-probability/low-base state (first variable probability state), the starting winning to the winning ball device 061IW6B mainly as the second starting winning opening occurs, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big win occurs in the high probability/low base state, a 6R big win C or a 6R big win D mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, when a 6R big hit C occurs in the high probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big win game, the high probability is again after the big win game ends. / Low base state (first variable probability state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204-S2206, S2253-S2260). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when a 6R big win D occurs in the high probability/low base state, after the big win game ends, the state is shifted to a high probability/high base state (second variable probability state), and the probability is high until the next big win occurs. / The high base state (second variable probability state) is maintained (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2269 and S2274).

When moving to the high probability / high base state (second probability variable state), the variation display of the first special symbol is performed in normal variation time, while the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in long variation. be. However, since it is a high base state, the probability of hitting a normal game is as high as 999/1000, and the frequency of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab being in the open state is high. Therefore, in order to cause a game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning hole and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the right side of the game area ( right hand). Therefore, in the high-probability/high-base state (second variable probability state), the starting winning to the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening occurs mainly, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big win occurs in the high probability/high base state, 6R big win A or 6R big win B mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, when the 6R big hit B occurs in the high probability/high base state, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big win game, the high probability/ It shifts to a low base state (first variable probability state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when the 6R big win A occurs in the high probability/high base state, after the big win game ends, the state is shifted to the low probability/high base state, and the next big win occurs a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example). ), the low probability/high base state is maintained (see steps 061IWS2284 to S2286 and S2288).

When shifting to the low-probability/high-base state, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed in normal variation time, while the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in long variation. However, since it is a high base state, the probability of hitting a normal game is as high as 999/1000, and the frequency of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab being in the open state is high. Therefore, in order to cause a game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning hole and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the right side of the game area ( right hand). Therefore, in the low-probability/high-base state, starting winnings to the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening are mainly generated, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big win occurs in the low probability/high base state, 6R big win A or 6R big win B mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, when the 6R big hit B occurs in the low probability/high base state, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big win game, the high probability/ It shifts to a low base state (first variable probability state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when the 6R big win A occurs in the low probability/high base state, after the big win game is over, the state is shifted to the low probability/high base state again, and the next big win occurs a predetermined number of times (200 in this example). times), the low probability/high base state is maintained (see steps 061IWS2284 to S2286, S2288).

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-20, in the low probability / high base state, when the relief time is shortened (after the RAM clear process or after the big hit game, the next big hit does not occur, and the number of fluctuations is 800 times ), it is controlled again to the low probability/high base state of 800 times of time saving (see steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A, S5607B to S5608B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-20, in the low probability/high base state, if the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are performed a predetermined number of times in total, the low probability/high base state and move to the low probability/low base state (normal state).

Specifically, when it is controlled to a low probability/high base state via time saving, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are executed a total of 100 times, the low The high-probability/high-base state is ended, and the low-probability/low-base state (normal state) is entered (steps 061IWS2030A-S2033A, S5617A-S5620A, S2030B-S2033B, S5617B-S5620B).

Further, when the low probability/high base state is controlled via the jackpot generated in the low base state, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed a total of 100 times. , ends the low-probability/high-base state and shifts to the low-probability/low-base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2288, S5617A-S5620A, S5617B-S5620B). Further, in the case of being controlled to the low-probability/high-base state via the jackpot that occurred in the high-base state, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed a total of 200 times. , ends the low-probability/high-base state and shifts to the low-probability/low-base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2287, S5617A-S5620A, S5617B-S5620B).

In addition, when it is controlled to a low probability/high base state via relief time reduction, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are executed a total of 800 times, the low probability/high Terminate the base state and shift to the low probability/low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS5607A-S5608A, S5617A-S5620A, S5607B-S5608B, S5617B-S5620B).

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-20, in this example, in the high probability / low base state (first probability variable state), the 6R jackpot C becomes again high probability / low base state (first probability variable state) Control or the 6R big hit D is controlled to a high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), so even if a big hit occurs, the probability variable state is restored with a probability of 100%. Therefore, in the high probability/low base state (first variable probability state), it can be said that the state (double loop) guarantees the occurrence of at least two more jackpots during the variable probability state. On the other hand, in the high probability / high base state (second probability variable state), if the 6R big hit B is controlled to the high probability / low base state and the probability variable state continues, but if it becomes the 6R big hit A, it is low. Probability / high base state and probability change state ends. Therefore, in the high probability/high base state (second variable probability state), it can be said that it is a state (one loop) in which only one more occurrence of a big hit is guaranteed during the variable probability state.

In this example, the case where 6R jackpots A to D, which are jackpots in all six rounds, are provided as the jackpot types is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in this example, when the 6R jackpot A is achieved, the control is performed to the low probability/high base state. A 4R jackpot A, which is a jackpot of 4 rounds, or a 10R jackpot A, which is a jackpot of 10 rounds, may be provided. Similarly, for example, even in the case of being controlled to the same high probability/high base state, a 4R jackpot D of 4 rounds of jackpots or a 10R jackpot D of 10 rounds jackpots may be provided. Well, various aspects are conceivable.

As shown in FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4 and 11-19, in this example, a low probability/low base state (normal state), a low probability/high base state, and a high probability/high base state (second 2 probability variation state), while the variation display of the first special symbol is performed in the normal variation time, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in the long variation. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a shorter variable time than the variable display of the second special symbol (or the ratio of execution is high). Therefore, in this example, the low probability / low base state (normal state), the low probability / high base state, and the high probability / high base state (second probability variable state), the variation display of the first special symbol is the second special This is a state in which there is a high percentage of variable display with a shorter variable time than the variable display of symbols (such a state is hereinafter also referred to as a first shortened state). In addition, in this example, in the first shortened state low probability / low base state (normal state), low probability / high base state, and high probability / high base state (second probability variable state), the first special symbol The ratio of the variable display to be the variable display with a shorter variable time than the variable display of the second special symbol is 100%, but the configuration is not limited to such a ratio. For example, in the first shortened state, the ratio of the variable display of the first special symbol to the variable display of a shorter variation time than the second special symbol variable display is lower than 100%, but at least the second shortened state described later It may be configured to be higher than

Also, in this example, in the high probability / low base state (first probability variable state), the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in long variation, while the variation display of the second special symbol is normal variation executed in time. In other words, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a shorter variable time than the variable display of the first special symbol (or executed at a higher rate). Therefore, in this example, the high probability / low base state (first probability variable state) is a state where the variable display of the second special symbol has a high rate of variable display with a shorter variation time than the variable display of the first special symbol ( Hereinafter, such a state is also referred to as a second shortened state). In addition, in this example, in the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state) which is the second shortened state, the variable display of the second special symbol is the variable display of the variable time shorter than the variable display of the first special symbol. is 100%, but the configuration is not limited to such a ratio. For example, in the second shortened state, the ratio of the variable display of the second special symbol to the variable display of a shorter variation time than the variable display of the first special symbol is lower than 100%, but at least higher than the first shortened state It may be configured to be higher.

In this example, in the first shortened state, the image display device 5 mainly performs the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbols, and in the second shortened state, the second special symbols are mainly displayed. In response to the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern.

As described above, in this example, during the execution of the variable display of one of the special symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the relief time reduction is established by the execution of the variable display of the other special symbol , is configured not to forcibly stop the variable display of the one special symbol. In such a configuration, for example, in the normal state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the long variation, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed to establish the relief time reduction, and the relief time reduction ( When controlled to the high base state), the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is continued without being forcibly stopped. Here, as control of relief time reduction (high base state), control to increase the probability of normal patterns, control to shorten the fluctuation time of normal patterns, and lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first start winning opening) That is, apart from the control related to normal symbols, control is performed to shorten the variation time of the second special symbol (that is, the variation display of the second special symbol is a variation display with a shorter variation time than the variation display of the first special symbol. control to the second shortened state with a high ratio), when the control related to the special symbol is performed, the variation time is shortened until the variation display of the second special symbol being executed (for example, variation time 10 minutes) is completed It is not possible to execute the variable display of the second special symbol that has been changed (that is, the variable efficiency has been improved), and the benefit of the relief time reduction cannot be received. In such a state, even if the game is controlled to shorten the relief time, the progress of the game is significantly delayed and the interest is reduced.

Therefore, in this example, when the relief time reduction is established, as the control of the relief time reduction (high base state), control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the first special symbol separately from the control related to the normal symbol (that is, the first special symbol The variable display is controlled to the first shortened state (in this example, low probability / high base state) where the ratio of the variable display of the variable time shorter than the variable display of the second special symbol is high) Control related to special symbols is configured to take place. With such a configuration, when the relief time reduction is established, it is controlled to the first shortened state (low probability / high base state), so even if the second special symbol variation display (long variation) during execution is continued , the variable display of the first special symbol in which the variable time is shortened (that is, the variable efficiency is improved) can be executed, and the benefit of saving time can be obtained. In addition, the game can be smoothly progressed when the relief time is shortened, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, the variable display (long variation) of the second special symbol being executed is continued even after shifting to the relief time reduction (high base state) of the first shortened state, but the first special symbol whose variation time is shortened When a big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of , the game is forcibly stopped with a losing symbol (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS1125B and S1129B, for example).

(Example of game state control)
Next, an example of game state control will be described. FIGS. 11-21 are time charts for explaining an example of game state control in the first embodiment.

Of FIGS. 11-21, in FIG. 11-21 (A), in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the variable display of the second special symbol that is out of time is started, and the second special symbol A control example of the game state when the variable display of the first special symbol in which the relief time saving is established (loss (no time saving)) is started during the execution of the variable display is shown.

As shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), when the variable display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established starts (T1 timing), the normal state (low probability / low base state) to the time reduction state (low probability/high base state) is performed (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A).

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established, the lost symbol is derived and displayed (T2 timing), but at this time, the second special symbol being executed is displayed. Forcibly lost symbols are not derived and displayed in variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), after the relief time reduction is established and the transition is made to the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) via the relief time reduction, the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established In the variable display of the second special symbol that was started before the variable display, the time saving lag is derived and displayed (T3 timing), but at this time the time saving number is not updated due to the time saving lag (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B) ). That is, the time saving state is maintained due to the relief time saving, which is more advantageous than the time saving deviation.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established is off (no time reduction), but the first special symbol variation in which the relief time reduction is established Even if the display result of the display is out of time saving, the control of the game state does not change. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special symbol (time saving deviation) is started (T1 timing), the normal state (low probability / low base state) to the time saving state (low probability / high base state) is performed (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A). Then, the time saving loss is derived and displayed by the variable display of the first special symbol in which the relief time saving is established (T1 timing), but at this time the time saving number is not updated due to the time saving loss (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). That is, the time saving state is maintained due to the relief time saving, which is more advantageous than the time saving deviation.

Of FIGS. 11-21, FIG. 11-21 (B) shows an example of control of the game state when the time saving state due to relief time saving ends at the start of the time saving variation display.

As shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), in the time saving state (low probability / high base state) due to the relief time saving, the high base number counter update process is executed at the start of the variable display that is out of time saving, and the value is 0. When it becomes (timing t1), control is performed to terminate the relief time saving and shift to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5617A to S5620A).

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), when the time saving deviation is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol (t2 timing), the time saving state due to the time saving deviation from the normal state (low probability / high base state ) is performed (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A).

(Variable display start setting process)
11-22 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result (stop symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 100IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the decoration pattern is stopped) A display result determining means for determining a pattern) is realized. Incidentally, when a pseudo-run is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120, in step 100IWS802, selects a chance symbol (for example, like "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol for the pseudo-run. , combinations of jackpot patterns that do not reach reach and patterns that are shifted by one pattern) are also determined. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 100IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the decorative symbols to be stopped based on only the variation pattern command. .

In step 100IWS802, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates 6R jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 generates a decoration pattern in which three patterns are the same even number pattern as a stop pattern. combination (usually a big hit pattern) is determined. In addition, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates 6R big hits B to D, the effect control CPU 120 selects a combination of decorative patterns in which 3 patterns are the same odd-numbered patterns as the stop pattern (probable variable jackpot pattern ). Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "small hit", the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of "135" decorative symbols (small hit symbol) as the stop symbol.

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decoration patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the ready-to-win effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined. In addition, even if it is lost, in the case of "time saving lost", a combination of decorative symbols of the lost symbols including special symbols (for example, star symbols) is determined. When a plurality of time saving classifications are provided, it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative patterns of losing patterns including different special patterns (for example, heart-shaped patterns and rhombic patterns) according to the time saving classifications.

However, in this example, even if time saving occurs in the high base state, it is substantially invalid, so when the high base state, the received display result designation command indicates "time saving" However, it is not a combination of decorative patterns of a lost pattern including a special pattern (for example, a star pattern), but a combination of decorative patterns in the case of "lost". In addition, in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, special symbols corresponding to the time saving failure are displayed even when the time saving failure occurs in the high base state.

The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for decorative patterns, a stop pattern (a combination of patterns in which the left, middle, and right are all the same pattern) that reminds us of a big win is called a big hit pattern. In addition, among the jackpot patterns, a stop pattern (combination of patterns in which the left, middle and right are all the same odd-numbered patterns) reminiscent of the probability variation jackpot is called the probability variation jackpot pattern. In addition, among the jackpot patterns, a stop pattern (combination of patterns in which the left, middle and right are all the same even-numbered patterns) reminiscent of a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is called a non-probability variation jackpot pattern. Also, a stop symbol that reminds us of a loss is called a lost symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs execution setting of the notice effect to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As the advance notice effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation and a effect image suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed when the count number becomes "0", and in step 108IWS802A, the timer effect is performed. may be set to execute.

In this example, the notice effect can be executed in both cases of the display result being a big hit and a case of losing. It is configured to run at a high rate. Therefore, execution of the advance notice effect suggests that the expectation of a big win is high.

In such a configuration, further, the predetermined period before the relief time reduction (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less) is the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the relief When the display result is wrong, the ratio of executing the notice effect is lower than the period when the remaining number of times until the time saving exceeds 10). With such a configuration, to suppress the deterioration of interest when a big hit is not achieved although the notice performance is executed in a predetermined period before the relief time reduction (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less). can be done. It should be noted that, regarding the pre-reading notice effect, the predetermined period before the relief time reduction (in this example, the period when the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less) is the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the relief It may be configured such that the proportion of execution of the pre-reading notice effect is lower than the period when the remaining number of times until the time saving exceeds 10) when the display result is wrong.

In addition, in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less), an effect (for example, a countdown effect) suggesting that the relief time is shortened is configured to be executable. In this case, by restricting the execution of the timer performance as the advance notice performance at this time, it is possible to avoid the display of a plurality of numerical values indicating the counter and to prevent mutual hindrance.

Further, in this example, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect with a red effect mode (for example, a red effect image is displayed) and a blue effect mode (for example, a blue effect image is displayed), In the case of a big hit, the ratio of execution of the advance notice effect in the red effect mode is higher than in the case of a loss. Therefore, execution of the advance notice effect in the red effect mode suggests that the expectation of a big win is high.

In such a configuration, further, the predetermined period before the relief time reduction (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less) is the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the relief When the display result is wrong, the ratio of executing the advance notice performance by the red performance mode is configured to be lower than the period when the number of remaining times until the time saving exceeds 10). With such a configuration, in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is reduced is 10 or less), although the notice performance is executed in the red performance mode, the interest when it does not become a big hit can suppress the decrease in It should be noted that, regarding the pre-reading notice effect, the predetermined period before the relief time reduction (in this example, the period when the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less) is the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the relief It may be configured so that the proportion of execution of the read-ahead foretelling performance of a mode with a high degree of expectation is lowered when the display result is wrong than during the period when the remaining number of times until the time saving exceeds 10.例文帳に追加

In addition, if it is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notice effects (and pre-reading notice effects) with different jackpot expectations, only the types of notice effects (and pre-reading notice effects) with high jackpot expectations can be used to save time. The execution may be restricted in a predetermined period before the event (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less). For example, when the degree of expectation for a big win is classified into five stages, the execution may be limited only to the advance notice effect (and the pre-reading advance notice effect) with the degree of expectation for a big win of the fourth level or higher. Also, for example, if the notice effect (and pre-reading notice effect) that suggests that the time saving is lost is configured to be executable, a predetermined period before the relief time reduction (in this example, the remaining time until the relief time reduction During the period when the number of times is 10 or less), the execution of the notice effect (and the look-ahead notice effect) suggesting that the time saving will be delayed may be restricted.

Also, for example, even if the remaining number of times until relief time saving is 10 or less, when the variable display that results in a big hit or time saving is executed, the execution of the notice effect (and the look-ahead notice effect) is not limited. good too.

In addition, in the time saving state due to the relief time saving, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect and the notice effect is limited (for example, the execution ratio is reduced (or not executed). In this case, the notice effect in the case of loss It may be configured to reduce (or not execute) the execution ratio of, or to reduce (or not execute) the execution ratio of the announcement effect of the type with high expectation.In addition, the number of pending memories If the value is larger than the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction, that is, it is a suspended memory stored before reaching the relief time reduction fluctuation, and after being controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction It may be configured to limit (prohibit) the execution of the pre-reading notice effect that targets the reservation memory corresponding to the fluctuation that occurs.This limits the execution of the pre-reading notice effect that spans before and after the control of the relief time reduction. Even if the number of pending memories is greater than the remaining number of times until relief, the time saving state (for example, via a big hit When it is in the time saving state or the time saving state via the time saving loss), it may be possible to execute a pre-reading notice performance whose notice object is the reserved memory corresponding to the fluctuation performed after being controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 0 (step 108IWS805). Whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 0 is determined, for example, by checking whether the EXT data value of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 0. I can judge.

When the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the display result is a big hit (step 108IWS806A). When the display result is not a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving rush effect that notifies control to a time-saving state by relief time-saving (step 100IWS806B). With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the game is controlled to the time-saving state as a relief time-saving state at an appropriate timing by the time-saving rush performance, and to improve the amusement at the time of the relief time-saving.

On the other hand, when the display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving rush appearance effect for notifying that the big win will be achieved after executing the effect in the same manner as the time-saving rush effect ( Step 100 IWS 806C). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the number of remaining fluctuations has become 0 until the relief time is shortened, the player is notified of the big win, so that the player can be given unexpectedness. Interest can be improved.

In addition, in this example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of times of relief time-saving fluctuation is reached, a time-saving rush appearance effect is executed using a dedicated fluctuation pattern (second fluctuation pattern #M). , Not limited to such an aspect, for example, it is not executed except when the number of times of relief time-saving fluctuation is reached, so that a full rotation production (that is, a big hit is confirmed) that fluctuates while three decorative patterns are aligned is executed. can be By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and special feeling, and to improve the interest.

In addition, for example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for the big hit as usual may be used, or a ready-to-win effect with a short fluctuation time may be specified. It may be configured to use a variation pattern.

Further, in this example, when the display result is lost when the number of times of relief time-saving fluctuation is reached, a dedicated relief time-saving fluctuation loss-use variation pattern is used, but not limited to such a mode, for example, A variation pattern for losing the same as usual may be used, or a variation pattern designating a ready-to-win effect with a short variation time may be used. By configuring in this way, it is possible to share the variation pattern before and when reaching the number of times of variation of the relief time reduction, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity. In this case, when the next variable display is started, the image display device 5 switches to the background image corresponding to the time-saving state (see steps 061IWS56A and S56B). It can be notified that it is controlled to the time saving state by time saving.

When the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812. It should be noted that, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, or 700 times, the effect control CPU120, until the relief time reduction A process table may be selected that includes a stimulating effect corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (for example, a mode of effect suggesting the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened). In addition, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less, the production control CPU 120 provides a countdown production according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction (for example, the relief time reduction) Production of a mode that counts down the number of remaining fluctuations until) and effect production (for example, production of a mode that the effect image changes according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened). can be

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (parts for effect) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. In addition, the process timer set value is set with a variable time in the mode of variation. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decoration pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Also, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 12 . Also, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, in the process table used when performing the effect control for the variation pattern involving the ready-to-win effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed. Process data indicating to display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the simulated run and the sliding effect. may

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 108IWS813). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 108IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls such that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode until transition to the time saving state C, which is a relief time saving, will be described. FIGS. 11-23 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of an effect mode until transition to the time-saving state in the first embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 11-23, the effect screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the example shown in FIG. 11-23, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (A), after the variable display immediately before the time-saving variable display is stopped, when the variable display that is time-saving is started, As shown in FIG. 11-23(B), a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) is started to make the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) displayed immediately before on the image display device 5 difficult to see. . At this time, the image display device 5 displays a right-handed instruction display 100IW108 instructing a right-handed player.

Then, when a predetermined period of time elapses, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (C), the blackout state is eliminated, and an image display (for example, 11-23(C), the display of "entering the chance mode"), the output of the effect sound, and the like are executed.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 11-23, since the time-saving rush effect is executed when the relief time-saving is started, the notification that the time-saving state is controlled based on the establishment of the relief time-saving is executed at an appropriate timing. You can do it, and you can improve your interest.

In addition, in the configuration shown in FIG. 11-23, when the variation display by the variation pattern (for example, the first variation pattern #M) dedicated to the relief time saving establishment is performed, the time saving rush effect is performed, so that the relief A game player can be clearly notified by the time-saving rush performance that the time-saving state is controlled based on establishment of the time-saving.

Further, in the configuration shown in FIG. 11-23, when the time saving rush effect is executed (that is, when the control of the time saving state by the relief time saving is started), since the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is displayed, appropriately A right hitting notification can be executed.

In addition, when the time saving state including the relief time saving ends and the state is shifted to the normal state, the image display device 5 may display a left-handed instruction display for instructing left-handed hitting.

In addition, in the time-saving effect, it may be possible to perform notifications that are generally performed during the ending period of the first game, such as a warning notification for forgetting to take a prepaid card and a warning notification to prevent addiction, or a game machine manufacturer's logo. may be displayed. In this case, the notification and logo display in the time-saving rush performance may be performed in the same mode as the notification and logo display in the ending period of the first win, or may be performed in a simplified mode. In addition, these notifications and logo display may be performed during the ending period of the first big win after shifting to the time saving state by relief time saving instead of performing the time saving rush performance.

In addition, when the display result becomes a big hit when reaching the number of times of relief time-saving fluctuation, when executing the time-saving rush appearance production, as shown in FIG. In the image display device 5, a blackout effect is started to make the previously displayed effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) difficult to see, and a right-hand hitting instruction display 100IW108 is displayed. be. Then, instead of the effect shown in FIG. 11-23(C), an effect is executed in which the blackout state is canceled and the jackpot symbols (for example, a combination of “777” symbols) are stopped and displayed. After that, it shifts to a big hit game. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes the establishment of the relief time saving, the player is notified of the big win, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and the interest can be improved.

In addition, the structure of this characterizing part 116IW is also executed as a jackpot game based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize (V prize) in a specific area (V prize area) in the jackpot during the small hit game. In the case of application to a game machine configured to be able to do so, when the display result of the variable display to save time becomes a small win, the fact that the small win will occur is reported after executing the time-saving rush appearance performance.例文帳に追加good too.

(Modification 1-3)
Next, the configuration of modification 1-3 will be described. In this example, in the variable display where the relief time reduction is established, it is configured to produce a time reduction rush effect that notifies that the control of the time reduction state (relief time reduction) is started, but the start of the variable display where the relief time reduction is established Since the control of the time-saving state (relief time-saving) is sometimes started, the time-saving rush performance may be executed in the variable display immediately before the variable display in which the relief time-saving is established.

In this case, for example, in the first special symbol normal process and the second special symbol normal process, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the update is "1", just before the variable display that the relief time reduction is established Set a fluctuation flag immediately before relief indicating that it is a fluctuation display, and in the first fluctuation pattern setting process and the second fluctuation pattern setting process, if the fluctuation flag immediately before relief is set, immediately before the fluctuation display in which the relief time reduction is established (For example, a variation pattern corresponding to the first variation pattern #M and the first variation pattern #N) used only for the variation display is determined. Then, in the variable display start setting process, when the remaining number of relief time saving is 1, the process table including the time saving rush performance is selected. With such a process, it is possible to execute the time-saving rush performance in the variable display immediately before the variable display in which the relief time-saving is established.

FIG. 11-24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of an effect mode until transition to the time saving state in Modification 1-3 of the first embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 11-24, the effect screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the modified example 1-3 shown in FIG. 11-24, the time saving rush effect is executed in the variable display immediately before the variable display in which the relief time saving is established. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (A), after the variable display two times before the variable display that shortens the relief time is stopped, the variable display immediately before the variable display that shortens the relief time is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (B), a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) that makes the effect display (for example, decorative symbols 100IW100, etc.) displayed immediately before on the image display device 5 difficult to see. be started. However, at this time, the right-handed hitting instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handed hitting is not displayed because the time-saving state has not yet been reached.

Then, when a predetermined period of time elapses, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (C), the blackout state is eliminated, and an image display (for example, 11-24(C), the display of "entering the chance mode"), the output of the effect sound, and the like are executed. At this time, the right-handed hitting instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handed hitting is not displayed because the time-saving state has not yet been entered.

After that, when the variable display for saving time is started, control of the time saving state is started, so as shown in FIG.

In the configuration of the modification 1-3 shown in FIG. 11-24, the time saving rush effect is executed immediately before the relief time saving is started, so the player prepares for the right-handed operation in preparation for the start of the relief time saving. can be done. In this respect as well, it is possible to perform notification of control to the time saving state at an appropriate timing based on the fact that the relief time saving has been established, and to improve interest.

Also, when the time-saving rush effect is executed in the variable display immediately before the variable display in which the relief time-saving is established, The variable display is performed using a variable pattern that is not With such a configuration, the fluctuation pattern can be made common between when and before the relief time reduction is established, and the data capacity can be reduced. In addition, for the variable display that executes the time-saving rush effect (variable display immediately before the variable display in which the relief time-saving is established), a variation pattern that is also used in other variable displays (that is, a variation pattern that is not exclusive to the relief time-saving establishment) is used. You may make it perform a variable display by pressing.

In addition, in the configuration of the modified example 1-3 shown in FIGS. 11-24, the time saving rush effect is executed immediately before the time saving is started, but the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 starts the variable display that the saving time is established. Since it is displayed when (that is, when control of the time saving state by relief time saving is started), it is possible to appropriately execute right hitting notification.

In addition, in the variable display immediately before the variable display in which the relief time saving is established, when the display result becomes a big hit, it is possible to execute the time saving rush appearance effect. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes the establishment of the relief time saving, the player is notified of the big win, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and the interest can be improved.

In addition, when the variable display in which the relief time reduction is established is executed, or when the variable display immediately before the variable display in which the relief time reduction is established is executed, the time reduction rush production and the time reduction rush appearance production can be executed. , Not limited to the gaming machine having the configuration shown in the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 116IW, for example, a high probability / low base state (small hit RUSH) in which small hits occur frequently as shown in the second embodiment It can also be applied to gaming machines with other configurations, such as gaming machines provided with

(Second embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment of the characteristic portion 116IW will be described. In this embodiment, the detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and mainly the parts different from the first embodiment will be described.

The game state in the second embodiment of the characteristic portion 116IW includes a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small win time) in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. KT state: normal state), low probability and first KT state (low probability/first KT state), and high probability and first KT state (high probability/first KT state). or in a high probability and second KT state (high probability/second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in an open state. There are very few cases where a game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball per 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, the control is performed so that small hits are likely to occur and the high base state is controlled so that the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended. In the second KT state among the KT states, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and the game ball easily wins the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side when a small hit occurs. Specifically, in the second KT state, the control is performed so that small hits are likely to occur and the low base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in the variable display of the first special symbol, the display result is a small hit when the display result is other than the big hit and the time saving loss (or the ratio of the small win is higher than the loss (no time saving) ) is configured as That is, in the variable display of the first special symbol, the display result is one of the big hit, the small hit and the time saving, and the display result is not lost (no time saving) (or it is a small hit rather than losing (no time saving). high percentage). However, in the non-KT state (normal state), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is made to win the game balls. is extremely difficult (or virtually impossible to win).

(Transition of game state in the second embodiment)
The transition of the game state in the second embodiment of the characterizing portion 116IW will be described. FIG. 12-1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the game state transitions in the second embodiment of the characteristic portion 116IW. First, in the characteristic portion 116IW, in the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in a normal variation time, whereas the second special symbol Since the fluctuation display of is executed by long fluctuation, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area (left hitting). Therefore, in the normal state, the starting winning to the first starting winning opening mainly occurs, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big win occurs in a low probability/low base state, a 10R probability variable big win, a 6R probability variable big win or a 6R normal big win mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs in a low probability/low base state, if a game ball enters V area 061IW104 during a jackpot game, a high probability/ It shifts to a low base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big win occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, if a 6R variable probability big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability/high base state (high probability/ 1KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big win occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the jackpot game ends, the transition is made to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and whether the next jackpot will occur. The low-probability/high-base state is maintained until 50 fluctuation displays are completed.

Also, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, time saving state (in this example, low probability / high base state (low probability / 1st KT state) via time saving loss and relief time saving via ). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-1, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), even if it is lost, if the time saving lost pattern is derived and displayed, the low probability / It is controlled to the high base state (low probability/first KT state) (for example, it corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS2032A and S2032B in the first embodiment). Furthermore, even if it is lost, if the relief time is shortened (after the RAM clearing process or after the big win game, the next big win does not occur and the number of fluctuations reaches 800 times), It is controlled to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) (for example, it corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B in the first embodiment).

In the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, and the first special symbol The timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started and the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started can update the relief time reduction number counter (for example, steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment corresponding to the part that executes the processing).

After transitioning to the KT state (high-probability/high-base state, low-probability/high-base state, high-probability/low-base state), in the second embodiment of this feature 116IW, the first special The variation display of the symbols is executed in the long variation, whereas the variation display of the second special symbols is executed in the normal variation time. (Right shot). Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning to the second start winning opening is mainly generated, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 10R probability variable big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 2R probability variable big hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, when a 10R probability variable big hit or a 2R probability variable big hit occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game. Then, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is entered after the end of the big win game, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big win occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when a 6R variable probability big hit occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during a big win game, a high probability is reached after the end of the big win game. /Transition to a high base state (high probability/1st KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big win occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in the second embodiment of the characteristic portion 116IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 6R probability variable jackpot is 50% in total, so once high probability / high When the base state is reached, the high probability/high base state loops at a rate of 50%.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, when the 10R probability variable big hit or the 2R probability variable big hit occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game. Then, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is entered after the end of the big win game, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big win occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when a 6R probability variable big hit occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during a big win game, a high probability is reached after the end of the big win game. /Transition to a high base state (high probability/1st KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big win occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. After the 6R normal jackpot occurs and the low-probability/high-base state is reached, when 50 fluctuation displays are completed without the next jackpot occurring, as shown in FIG. 12-1, Transition to low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, in the low probability/high base state, when the relief time is shortened (after RAM clear processing, After the jackpot game, when the number of fluctuations reaches 800 times without the occurrence of the next jackpot), it is controlled again to the low probability / high base state (first KT state) of 800 times of time saving (for example, (corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A and S5607B to S5608B in the first embodiment). In addition, the number of time reductions in the second embodiment is the remaining number of the total number of variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol that can be executed in the low probability/high base state (first KT state). corresponds to

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1, in the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, in the low probability/high base state, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times in total, the low-probability/high-base state is ended and the low-probability/low-base state (normal state) is entered.

For example, when it is controlled to low probability / high base state (low probability / 1st KT state) via time saving loss, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed a total of 100 times. Then, the low-probability/high-base state (low-probability/1st KT state) is ended, and the state shifts to the low-probability/low-base state (normal state) (for example, steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A in the first embodiment, (corresponds to the part that executes the processing of S5617A to S5620A, S2030B to S2033B, and S5617B to S5620B).

In addition, when it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / 1st KT state) via relief time reduction, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed a total of 800 times. Then, the low-probability/high-base state (low-probability/1st KT state) ends and shifts to the low-probability/low-base state (normal state) (for example, steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A, (corresponds to the part that executes the processing of S5617A to S5620A, S5607B to S5608B, and S5617B to S5620B).

In the example shown in FIG. 12-1, when the 6R normal jackpot occurs, it is configured to be controlled to the low probability/high base state of 50 times of time saving, but the first embodiment Similarly, according to the game state when the big win occurs, it may be configured so that the advantage of the time saving state to be controlled after the big win game is different. For example, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in the normal state (low base state), it is controlled to a low probability of 100 times of time saving / high base state, and when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in the high base state , You may be made to be controlled by the low probability/high base state of 200 time-saving times. In this case, as in the first embodiment, when the variation display that realizes the relief time reduction is a big hit, it is assumed that the big win occurs in the high base state, and the low probability of 200 times of time reduction after the end of the big win game. / It may be controlled to a high base state (for example, the execution of the jackpot determination module in steps 061IWS59A and S59B in the first embodiment, and the update of the relief time reduction counter in steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A and S5602B to S5608B processing and the setting of the high base flag). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, when the 10R probability variable big hit or the 2R probability variable big hit occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game. Then, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is entered after the end of the big win game, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big win occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in the second embodiment of the characteristic portion 116IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R Since the probability of the probability variable jackpot is 50%, once the high probability/low base state is reached, the high probability/low base state loops at a rate of 50%. Also, when a 6R probability variable big hit occurs in a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during a big win game, a high probability is reached after the end of the big win game. /Transition to a high base state (high probability/1st KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big win occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled.

In addition, in FIG. 12-1, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) has been described, but the second special symbol changes at a low rate It is also possible that a display is performed. In this case, when a 10R variable probability big hit or a 2R probability variable big win occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during a big win game, the transition to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is made. become. Further, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

Also, in FIG. 12-1, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. may be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display is completed, the low probability/high probability is reached. The base state will be maintained.

Also, in FIG. 12-1, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. may be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display is completed, the low probability/high probability is reached. The base state will be maintained.

Also, in FIG. 12-1, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. may be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display is completed, the low probability/high probability is reached. The base state will be maintained.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, in the second embodiment of the characteristic portion 116IW, in the low-probability/low-base state (normal state), the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a normal variable time. On the other hand, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in long variation. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a shorter variable time than the variable display of the second special symbol (or the ratio of execution is high). Therefore, in the second embodiment, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), the variable display of the first special symbol has a high rate of variable display with a shorter variation time than the variable display of the second special symbol. This is the first shortened state. In the second embodiment, in the low probability / low base state (normal state) which is the first shortened state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. The percentage displayed may be, for example, 100%, or may be lower than 100% but higher than at least the second shortened state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1, in the second embodiment of the characteristic portion 116IW, the low-probability/high base state (low-probability/1st KT state), the high-probability/high-base state (high-probability/1st KT state), and in the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the variation display of the first special symbol is performed in long variation, while the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in normal variation time be done. In other words, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a shorter variable time than the variable display of the first special symbol (or executed at a higher rate). Therefore, in the second embodiment, a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and a high probability/low base state (second KT State) is a second shortened state in which the variable display of the second special symbol has a high rate of variable display with a shorter variation time than the variable display of the first special symbol. In the second embodiment, the second shortened state is a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In the low base state (second KT state), the ratio of the variable display of the second special symbol to the variable display of a shorter variation time than the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be, for example, 100%. or it may be configured to be less than 100% but at least higher than the first shortened state.

In the second embodiment, when the relief time reduction is established in the normal state, as the relief time reduction control, the control to increase the probability of hitting the normal pattern, the control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, the variable winning ball device 6B (second In addition to the control related to normal symbols, which is to lengthen the opening time of the start winning opening), control is performed to shorten the variation time of the second special symbol (that is, the variation display of the second special symbol is greater than the variation display of the first special symbol. control to the second shortened state in which the ratio of the variable display of the shortest variable time is high), control related to the special symbol is performed. That is, it shifts to the low-probability/high base state (low-probability/first KT state) (corresponding to, for example, steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B in the first embodiment).

However, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is displayed. It is configured so as not to forcibly stop the variable display of the one special symbol even if the relief time saving is established by the execution of the variable display. In such a configuration, for example, in the normal state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the long variation, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed to establish the relief time reduction, and the relief time reduction ( high base state), the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is continued without being forcibly stopped, and the variable display of the second special symbol being executed (for example, variable time 10 minutes) Until is completed, the variable display of the second special symbol whose variable time is shortened (that is, the variable efficiency is improved) cannot be executed, and it is conceivable that the benefit of the relief time reduction cannot be received. In such a state, even if the game is controlled to shorten the relief time, progress of the game is greatly delayed and interest is reduced.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, as described above, in the variable display of the first special symbol, the display result is a small hit when the display result is other than the big hit and the time saving loss (or the small win rather than the loss (no time saving) high ratio). That is, in the variable display of the first special symbol, the display result is one of the big hit, the small hit and the time saving, and the display result is not lost (no time saving) (or it is a small hit rather than losing (no time saving). high percentage). Also in the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first and second special symbols, the other special symbol is displayed. When the small winning pattern is derived and displayed in the variable display, the winning pattern can be forcibly derived and displayed in the variable display of the one special symbol (for example, step 061IWS1126A in the first embodiment, (corresponds to the part that executes the processing of S1129A, S1126B, and S1129B).

By combining these configurations, in the second embodiment, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol (long variation), when the relief time reduction is established by executing the variable display of the first special symbol, As control of relief time reduction (high base state), control is performed to shorten the variation time of the second special symbol separately from the control related to the normal symbol (that is, the variation display of the second special symbol is more than the variation display of the first special symbol A special symbol-related control is performed, which is a second shortened state (in this example, controlled to a low-probability/high-base state (first KT state)) in which the rate of fluctuation display of a short fluctuation time is high. At this time, the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol that establishes the relief time saving is a big hit or a small hit if the time saving is not out of line. Then, based on the derivation display of the small winning symbol in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display (long variation) of the second special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped with a lost symbol. Therefore, without waiting for the long fluctuation fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) to expire, the fluctuation time is shortened (that is, the fluctuation efficiency is improved). It is possible to execute the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, You can take advantage of the short relief time. In addition, the game can be smoothly progressed when the relief time is shortened, and the interest can be improved.

(First special symbol normal process in modification 2)
FIGS. 12-2 to 12-5 are flow charts showing the first special symbol normal processing in Modification 2. FIG.

In modification 2, the processing of steps 061IWS50A-S56A is the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, in the modification 2, since the process of step 061IWS5601A shown in the first embodiment is not executed, the process of updating the relief time reduction number counter is executed even in the variable probability state (high probability state). be done. That is, not only in the case of non-variable state (low probability state), but also in the case of variable state (high probability state), so that the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is uniformly reduced when the variable display is executed is configured to Therefore, in the modification 2, when the value of the relief time saving number counter after the subtraction becomes "0", there is a case where the probability variation flag is set.

When the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction becomes "0", if the probability variable flag is set (Y of step 061IWS56061A), that is, if the relief time reduction is established in the probability variable state, go to step 061IWS5701A Transition.

Also, in Modification 2, the high base number counter is set to "100" after the probability variable jackpot, and the high base number counter is decremented by 1 by the processing of steps 061IWS5717A to S5719A every time the variable display is executed. Here, when the value of the high base number counter after subtraction becomes "0", if the probability variable flag is set, that is, even if the probability variable state after the big hit game by the probability variable big hit reaches 100 variation If not, the high base flag resetting process (step 061IWS5620A) is not executed. In this case, the high probability state and the high base state are maintained until the variable probability fall occurs.

On the other hand, when the value of the high base number counter after the subtraction becomes "0", if the probability variable flag is not set, that is, in the probability variable state after the big hit game due to the probability variable big hit, the probability variable falling is less than 100 variation and the probability variable When only the flag is reset (when the processing of steps 061IWS5705A and S5711A described later is executed), or when it is controlled to a low probability/high base state after the normal jackpot, the high base flag is reset (step 061IWS5620A). According to the process of step 061IWS56191A, in modification 2, in the probability variation state after the big hit game due to the probability variation jackpot, if the probability variation falls below 100 variations, the probability variation state (high probability state) immediately ends, but the time saving state (High base state) continues until 100 variation is reached.

Incidentally, in the modification 2, the processes of steps 061IWS5607A to S5611A, S5614A to S5616A, S5617A to S5619A, and S5620A to S5621A are the same as those shown in the first embodiment. In Modified Example 2, when step 061IWS5621A ends, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5702A.

In step 061IWS5701A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a relief time saving flag indicating that the relief time saving has been established in the variable probability state (step 061IWS5701A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 061IWS5702A), and if not set, proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

If the variable probability flag is set (Y in step 061IWS5702A), the game control microcomputer 100 stores the random number for the fall judgment stored in the random number buffer area. (061IWS5703A). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the random number for fall determination extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reservation storage buffer or the second reservation storage buffer, and determines the probability variable fall lottery. I do. The game control microcomputer 100 determines to end the variable probability state when the fall determination value is matched. It should be noted that, in the modification 2, in the process of step 061IWS5703A, for example, it is determined to end the variable probability state with a probability of 1/800.

If the probability variation does not drop (the probability variation state is not terminated) (N in 061IWS5704A), the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A. When it is determined to end the variable probability state (Y at step 061IWS5704A), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the variation is less than 100 after the big hit game (step 061IWS5705A). For example, by providing a counter capable of counting the number of variations in the variable probability state after the big win game, and checking the counter at step 061IWS5705A, it is possible to determine whether the variation is less than 100 after the big win game.

If the fluctuation is less than 100 after the jackpot game (Y of step 061IWS5705A), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the probability variation flag (step 061IWS5711A), and sets the fanning reach A flag indicating that the fanning reach A will be executed. set (step 061IWS5713A). After that, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

According to the process of step 061IWS5711A, in the modified example 2, only the probability variation flag is reset when the probability variation falls below 100 variation in the probability variation state after the big hit game by the probability variation big hit. In addition, by the processing of step 061IWS5713A, after suggesting whether the display result of the variable display being executed will be a big hit or the probability variable state will end with a probability variable fall, the fan reach A that informs that it will be a probability variable fall is executed. be.

If the variation is not less than 100 after the jackpot game (N of step 061IWS5705A), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the relief time saving flag is set (step 061IWS5706A). The variable probability flag and the high base flag are reset, and the variable probability state and the time saving state are ended (step 061IWS5712A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fanning reach A flag indicating that the fanning reach A will be executed (061IWS5713A).

In addition, in this example, it is configured to execute the same fanning reach A in the case of the probability variable fall below 100 fluctuation after the probability variable jackpot game and the case of the probability variable fall after 100 fluctuation. For example, when the probability variable fall occurs in less than 100 fluctuations after the probability variable big hit game, it may be notified that the time saving state is continued after notifying that the probability variable fall will occur. It is possible to prevent the player from being greatly discouraged due to the variable falling in a short period of time.

When the relief time saving flag is set (Y of step 061IWS5706A), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the relief time saving flag (step 061IWS5707A), and sets "800" to the high base frequency counter (step 061IWS5708A). . In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the variable probability flag (061IWS5709A). After that, the fan reach B flag indicating that the fan reach B is to be executed is set (061IWS5710A), and the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

If the relief time reduction is established after the definite variable fall, it is controlled to the time reduction state (high base state) due to the relief time reduction from the time the relief time reduction is established, and if the relief time reduction is established before the definite variable fall, it becomes a definite variable fall. If the configuration is such that the system is controlled to the normal state from the point of time when the relief time is shortened, the benefit received from the relief time reduction will be greatly different depending on the establishment timing, and there is a risk that the relief will be inadequate. Therefore, in the modification 2, by the processing of steps 061IWS5706A to S5708A, if the relief time saving is established in the probability variable state, it is configured to be controlled to the time saving state by the relief time saving when the probability variable fall occurs. there is Therefore, the counting of 800 times of time saving due to relief time saving is not started when the relief time saving is established, but after the transition to the time saving state due to the probability change fall. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately receive relief by shortening the relief time.

In addition, by the processing of step 061IWS5707A, the relief time saving flag is reset when it is controlled to the time saving state by the relief time saving when it becomes a probability variable fall. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information indicating that the relief time reduction has been established in the variable probability state.

Information indicating the state of the relief time saving flag is stored in the RAM 102, for example. Then, when the RAM clearing process is executed, the relief time saving flag and probability variation flag are reset. That is, when the RAM clear process is executed when the relief time reduction is established in the variable probability state, the game state becomes a normal state (low probability/low base state) in which the relief time reduction flag is not set. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information indicating that the relief time reduction has been established in the variable probability state.

It should be noted that, in the RAM clear process, the probability variation flag is reset, but the relief time-saving flag is maintained, and the probability variation flag is not set at the start of fluctuation, but the relief time-saving flag is set. , may be controlled to shorten the relief time (low probability/high base state). That is, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the relief time reduction is established probability variable state, the gaming state becomes a normal state (low probability / low base state), but when the variable display is started, the relief time reduction It may be controlled.

In addition, by the processing of step 061IWS5710A, after suggesting whether the display result of the variable display being executed will be a big hit or the probability variable fall and the probability variable state will end, it will be temporarily notified that it will be a probability variable fall, and then the relief time will be shortened. The fanning reach B that informs that it is controlled to the time saving state (high base state) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-5, in modification 2, when it is determined as a big hit by the execution of the big hit determination module, if the relief time saving flag is set, it is reset (step 061IWS631A). By the processing of step 061IWS631A, it is possible to appropriately manage the information indicating that the relief time reduction has been established in the variable probability state. Moreover, it is possible to prevent excessive relief from being performed.

In addition, in the modification 2, when it is determined to be a big hit by the execution of the big hit determination module, if the variable probability flag is set (Y in step 061IWS632A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fan reach C. Set the fan reach C flag indicating execution (061IWS633A).

By the processing of step 061 IWS632A to S633A, after suggesting whether the display result of the variable display being executed will result in a big win or a probability variable fall and the probability variable state will end, the fan reach C that informs that a big win will be executed. .

Incidentally, in the modification 2, the processes of steps 061IWS57A to S63A and S64A to S89A are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

In the first variation pattern setting process of modification 2, it is determined whether or not any of the fanning reach A to C is set, and if it is set, the variation pattern for executing the corresponding fanning reach is determined. do. Other processes are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

In modification 2, in the second special symbol normal process and the second variation pattern setting process, the same process as the first special symbol normal process and the first variation pattern setting process is executed. Therefore, in the modification 2, it is possible to execute the probability variable falling lottery or the fanning reach in both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, in the first variation pattern setting process and the second variation pattern setting process, one of the fanning reach A to C is set, and when the number of variations in the probability variable state after the big hit game exceeds 100 variations, the fanning Reach may be executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12-6, until the number of fluctuations in the probability variation state after the big hit game reaches 100 fluctuations, a common effect (for example, a common background image) may be executed. In other words, the player may not be able to recognize whether or not the 100th variation is the probability variable fall. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-6, it is also possible to execute a probability variable fall determination effect for notifying whether the probability variable fall is continued at the 100th variation.

For example, when the probability variable fall has already occurred, the probability variable fall determination effect of the aspect of pattern A for informing that the probability variable fall has occurred is executed. In addition, when the probability variable fall is already controlled in the relief time reduction, after informing that the probability variable fall is controlled in the relief time reduction, the probability change of the mode of the pattern B to notify that it is controlled in the relief time reduction A fall judgment effect is executed.
In addition, when a big hit is achieved at the 100th variation, the probability variation fall determination performance of pattern C for informing that a big win will be achieved is executed. Further, when the variable probability state continues, the variable probability fall determination effect of pattern D for informing that the variable probability state continues is executed.

With the configuration as shown in FIG. 12-6, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension in the period after the 100th variation in the variable probability state, thereby improving the interest.

In addition, in the modification 2, when the relief time saving is established in the probability variable state, it is configured to notify that the relief time saving will be after being notified that the probability variation fall is made, but this Not limited to such a configuration, for example, when the relief time saving is established in the probability variable state, even if it becomes a probability variable fall, it may not be notified at all. In other words, even if the probability variation falls, the effect may not be notified or the effect may not change, and the probability variation fall may occur without the player noticing it.

(Example of rendering in modified example 2)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode of the fanning reach in the modified example 2 will be described. FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the fanning Lee in Modification 2. As shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 12-7, the inflection reach A is in the order of (1) (2) (3-1), the inflection reach B is in the order of (1) (2) (3-2) (4), and the inflection reach C , the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3-3).

In the variable probability state, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (1), when it becomes a ready-to-reach state in which the left and right decorative patterns are aligned, as shown in FIG. Inciting Reach to battle is started.

Then, in the case of the inciting reach A, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (3-1), a probability variable fall image 014IW004a is displayed to notify that the friend character 014IW002 has lost the battle and becomes a probability variable fall. After that, it shifts to the normal state (low probability/low base state).

In the case of the fanning reach B, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (3-2), the ally character 014IW002 is defeated in the battle, and the probability variable fall image 014IW004a for notifying that the probability variable fall is displayed once. As shown in FIG. 12-7 (4), a character display of "chance mode entry" and a relief time reduction image 014IW004c for informing that the relief time reduction is controlled are displayed. It should be noted that it is not limited to the aspect shown in FIG. 12-7(4), and for example, the time-saving rush effect shown in FIG. 11-23 may be executed. After that, it shifts to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state).

In the case of the inciting reach C, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (3-3), a big win image 014IW004b is displayed to notify that the ally character 014IW002 has won the battle and will be a big win. After that, it shifts to a jackpot game state.

In the modified example 2, when the relief working hours are established in the variable probability state, the relief working hours establishment notification for notifying that effect is executed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-8 (1) and (2), when the relief time reduction is established at the start of the fluctuation, the “ch” icon 014IW003d indicating that the chance mode (relief time reduction) is controlled is displayed on the image display device 5. displayed as part of the In addition, the relief time reduction establishment notification as shown in FIG. 12-8 is, for example, when it is determined that the relief time reduction has been established on the main board 11 side, the production control command indicating that fact is transmitted to the production control board 12, When the effect control board 12 side receives the effect control command, it can be realized by performing control to display a "chi" icon 014IW003d on a part of the image display device 5. FIG. With such a configuration, the player can recognize that the time saving state is controlled after the variable probability state ends, and the player can be given a sense of security and enjoyment can be improved.

It should be noted that the relief time reduction notification as shown in FIG. 12-8 is not limited to the probability variable state, but also when the relief time reduction is established in the normal state, or when it is controlled to the time reduction state by the relief time reduction (or It may be done by lottery).

(Example of game state control in modified example 2)
Next, an example of control of the game state in Modification 2 will be described. FIG. 12-9 is a time chart for explaining a game state control example in Modification 2. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 12-9 (A), if the relief time reduction is not established in the probability variable state before the probability variation falls, when the probability variation falls (T1 timing), the probability variation flag and the high base flag is reset, and the game state shifts from the high probability/high base state to the low probability/low base state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-9 (B), if the relief time reduction is established in the probability variable state until the probability variation fall occurs, for example, the relief time reduction is established at the t1 timing of FIG. 12-9 (B) If it is, the relief time reduction flag is set at t1 timing. And when it becomes a probability variation fall (timing t2), the probability variation flag and the relief time saving flag are reset, and the high base flag is maintained. That is, the game state shifts from the high-probability/high-base state to the low-probability/high-base state.

The configuration shown in Modification 2 is applicable to both the first embodiment and the second embodiment. When applied to the configuration of the first embodiment, for example, a falling lottery is executed when it is in a high probability / high base state (second probability variable state), and if it is elected, it is in a normal state (low probability / low base state). Further, when applied to the configuration of the second embodiment, for example, when the high probability/high base state (first KT state), a drop lottery is executed, and if the winner is selected, the normal state (low probability/low base state).

In the above-described first embodiment and second embodiment, both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Not limited to such a configuration, a configuration in which the variable display of the special symbols is executed in the order of starting winning, or one of the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. The configuration shown in Modification 2 can also be applied to the configuration.

Moreover, although the characteristic portion 116IW and each modified example described above are applied to a game machine that controls a big hit game based on the variation display result, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a game machine configured to be able to execute a role game that controls a big win game based on the fact that a game ball wins a prize (V win) in a specific area (V prize area) in the accessory during a small win game, You may apply the structure controlled to the time-saving state via the relief time-saving shown by characteristic part 116IW and each modification shown above.

Further, in the characteristic portion 116IW and each modified example described above, the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is fixed at 800 times, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, switch the value to be set in the relief time reduction counter to "800" or "900" depending on whether it is during RAM clear processing execution or when the big hit occurs, or randomly set the value to be set in the relief time reduction counter You may switch to "800" or "900."

In addition, in the characteristic portion 116IW and each modified example described above, information that can specify the number of occurrences of the relief time reduction may be held. For example, the high-base flag to be set in the second relief time saving that has moved again and the high-base flag to be set in the first relief time saving may be different.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 116IW and each modification shown above, different effects are executed in the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief (for example, different background display may be displayed, or a different variation pattern (variation time) may be determined).

In addition, in the characteristic portion 116IW and each modification shown above, in controlling the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, the gaming machine in which variable probability control is performed until the next big hit occurs (or until the variable probability falls) Although the case where it applies to is shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, in controlling to the probability variation state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the upper limit number of special symbol games in which the probability variation control is performed (that is, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol) is set so-called ST On occasion, the configuration may be applied to control to the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in the characteristic portion 116IW and each modification shown above.

Specifically, as a so-called ST machine, the jackpot probability is about 1/100, and after the end of the jackpot game state, it is controlled to a probability variable state at a rate of 100%, and the probability variable control is performed. , 8 times) is set, the case where the configuration for controlling the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in the characteristic part 116IW and each modification shown above is applied. In addition, in the gaming machine of the ST machine, as a display result of the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, a plurality of types of jackpots (for example, 10R probability variable jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, etc.) are provided. , the jackpot with the highest degree of advantage (eg, 10R probability variable jackpot) at a predetermined ratio (eg, 5%) when the jackpot occurs. In addition, in the case of a jackpot with the highest degree of advantage, the upper limit number of times of the special game in which the variable probability state (high probability/high base state) is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state and the variable probability control is performed is 8 times. shall be set. And, when the big hit does not occur in the eight special games in which the variable probability control is performed, it is controlled to the time saving state (low probability / high base state), and as the upper limit number of special games in which the high base control is performed 249 times shall be set. In other words, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, if the next big hit does not occur, it is controlled to the probability variation state (high probability / high base state) of the probability variation number of times 8 times, and then the time reduction state of 249 times of the time reduction number (low probability / high base state).

In the game machine of the above ST machine, after turning on the power to the game machine or after the occurrence of a big hit, even if the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 250 times) in a non-variable state (low probability state), the next big hit will not occur. When it does not occur, it is possible to apply a configuration that is controlled to the time saving state (low probability/high base state) assuming that the relief time saving is established.

When such a configuration is applied, when the jackpot with the highest degree of advantage is reached, after the jackpot game state ends, first the probability variable state (high probability/high base state) of eight probability variable times is controlled. At this time, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is reset (eg, set to "250") due to the occurrence of a big hit. And since it is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the value of a relief time reduction counter is not updated.

When the variable probability state (high probability/high base state) of 8 times of probability variable times is completed without occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled to the time saving state (low probability/high base state) of 249 times of time saving times. At this time, since it is a non-probability variable state (low probability state), every time the special symbol game (that is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is changed. updated (eg, decremented by 1).

When the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) of 249 time-saving times is completed without occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state). However, at this time, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "1". Therefore, when the next special symbol game (variation display of the first special symbol or variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the relief time saving is established and the time saving state (low probability/high base state) is controlled. It will be. Here, if there is a reserved memory stored in the time saving state (low probability / high base state) with a time saving number of 249 times, a special symbol game based on the reserved memory (variation display of the first special symbol or second special symbol (variation display) is executed, the relief time saving is established and the time saving state (low probability/high base state) is controlled. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player unaware of the transition to the low base state (normal state), thereby improving the interest.

In addition, when the time saving state (low probability / high base state) ends and is once controlled to the low base state (normal state) before the relief time saving occurs, the background image corresponding to the high base state continues to be displayed. You may make it In this case, for example, the number of pending memories stored at the time the time saving state (low probability / high base state) ends is greater than the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time saving is established. , the background image corresponding to the high base state may be continuously displayed. Below, after the end of the time saving state of 249 times, the normal state that is controlled before the relief time saving is established A normal state in which a short-time relief is established during the period until it is done) is also called a special normal state to distinguish it from other normal states.

Also, for example, when the time saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the variable state (high probability/high base state) ends and is controlled to the time saving state (low probability/high base state) by the relief time saving Alternatively, a mode transition effect may be executed to indicate that control of a time saving state (low probability/high base state) by relief time saving is started. In this case, after the time saving state (low probability / high base state), the fluctuation display in the low base state (normal state) before the occurrence of the time saving state (for example, the fluctuation display immediately after the time saving state ends, or the relief time saving The mode transition performance may be executed during the execution of the variable display immediately before the establishment of the mode transition performance, or the mode transition performance may be executed during the execution of the variable display that causes the relief time reduction.

Further, for example, in the above-described ST machine gaming machine, when a jackpot with a low degree of advantage (for example, a 5R probability variable jackpot) among a plurality of types of jackpots is obtained, after the jackpot gaming state is completed, the next jackpot is played. If it does not occur, it is controlled to a probability variable state (high probability / high base state) with a probability variable number of times of 8 times, and then controlled to a time saving state (low probability / high base state) with a time saving number of 32 times. That is, if the advantage is a low jackpot, even if the time saving state (low probability / high base state) after the variable state (high probability / high base state) is over, for a short period of time (for example, in the time saving state It is assumed that the relief time reduction is not established during the period until the stored reserved memory is digested.

In this case, if the number of times of the time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled after the variable state (high probability / high base state) is 32 times (that is, if the relief time saving is not established in a short period of time) , after the final variation in the time-saving state is completed, the normal state (low probability / low base state) corresponding to the left-handed notification (for example, display of left-handed instruction display to instruct left-handed hitting in the image display device 5) while executing So, when the number of times of time saving is 249 times (that is, when the relief time saving is established in a short period of time), the same left-handed notification may not be executed after the final variation in the time saving state is completed. That is, it is possible not to execute left-handed hitting notification (for example, display of left-handed hitting instruction display for instructing left-handed hitting on the image display device 5) at the time of transition to the special normal state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the transition to the low base state (normal state) once when the relief time saving is established within a short period of time after the time saving state ends, Interest can be improved.

In addition, if the number of times of the time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled after the variable state (high probability / high base state) is 32 times (that is, if the relief time saving is not established in a short period of time) And when the number of times of time saving is 249 times (that is, when the relief time saving is established in a short period of time), for example, the background designation command sent from the main board 11 side, the jackpot start designation command, the jackpot end designation command, etc. By making the types of the production control commands different, the production control board 12 side distinguishes between these time saving states, and production control matching each time saving state (for example, the corresponding background image, character image, story image, etc. are displayed. , BGM output, etc.). The method of distinguishing the time saving state on the effect control board 12 side is not limited to this, and for example, the received display result designation command may specify the type of big win and the number of times of time saving after the big win game.

In addition, when the number of times of time saving is 249 times (that is, when the relief time saving is established in a short period of time), after the final variation in the time saving state is completed, the effect control board 12 side hits to the left (for example, image display device 5, the display of the left-handed instruction display for instructing the left-handed hit) is not executed, the main board 11 side will be able to confirm that the main board 11 side has once shifted to the normal state (that is, the left-handed hit from the right-handed state). (for example, turning off the right-handed hitting display 26, stopping the output of the right-handed hitting test signal output as a test signal, changing the firing position specifying signal, etc.) is executed. While temporarily shifting to the normal state (that is, the special normal state), on the main board 11 side, the external output of the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, two jackpot signals) may be temporarily stopped. , the external output may be continued. In addition, while continuing the external output of the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, two jackpot signals), the output of the firing position designation signal output as the test signal is changed (or the output of the right-handed test signal is stopped) ).

Also, for example, the effect to be executed may be different between the time saving state (or the time saving state with the number of time saving times being 249 times) and the normal state (or the normal state other than the special normal state). For example, the effect (for example, countdown effect) that suggests that the relief time reduction is established or the number of times until it is established can be executed in the normal state (or the normal state other than the special normal state), while the remaining time reduction It may not be executed in a time saving state where the number of times is indicated (or a time saving state where the number of time saving times is 249 times). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the rendering from becoming complicated.

In addition, the configuration in which the above effects are obtained is not limited to the configuration of the time saving number of times of the time saving state controlled after the variable probability state used in the above description, and the number of times of variation in which the relief time saving is established (non-probable variable state) . For example, the number of fluctuations in which relief time reduction is established (non-probable variable state) is greater than the number of time reductions in the time reduction state, and the number of time reductions in the time reduction state and the start winning mouth that became easier to enter in the time reduction state (for example, the second start It may be configured to be smaller (or the same) as the sum of the upper limit memory number (for example, 4) of the special game based on entering the winning opening). With such a configuration, after the end of the jackpot game state, even if it shifts to the low base state (normal state) through the probability variable state (high probability / high base state) and the time saving state (low probability / high base state) , Since the relief time reduction can be established without generating a new start winning in the low base state (normal state), the player is aware that the transition to the low base state (normal state) has occurred before the relief time reduction is established. It can be made not to let it be done, and interest can be improved.

Also, for example, if the number of fluctuations (non-probability variable state) in which the relief time reduction is established is smaller (or the same) than the number of time reductions in the time reduction state, the time reduction that is controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) Before the state (low-probability/high-base state) ends, it is possible to establish a relief working hours (that is, the number of times of working hours can be updated by establishment of a relief working hours).

In addition, in the gaming machine of the above-mentioned ST machine, when a big hit occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol and when a big hit occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol, after the big win game state The number of time-saving states (low probability / high-base state) controlled through the state (high probability / high-based state) is different (or the ratio of the number of times of time-savings that is advantageous among multiple types of time-saving times is different) can be configured to In this case, for example, when a big hit occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled through a variable state (high probability/high base state) ) is 32 times (or the number of times of time saving is 32 times, and the ratio of 32 times out of 249 times is high), and when a big hit occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol, after the big win game state is finished. , The number of time saving states (low probability / high base state) controlled through the variable state (high probability / high base state) is 249 times (or 32 times, 249 times out of 249 times) higher percentage).

In addition, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state differs between when a big hit occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol and when a big win occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol (or there are multiple types of round numbers). of which the number of advantageous rounds is different). For example, when a big hit occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of rounds in the big win game state is 5 rounds (or 5 rounds, 5 rounds out of 10 rounds are highly likely), and the 2nd special symbol. When a big hit is generated by the variable display of , the number of rounds in the big win game state may be 10 rounds (or 5 rounds, 10 rounds out of 10 rounds are highly likely). With such a configuration, the degree of advantage can be differentiated between the game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed and the game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, and the interest is improved. can be made

Also, in the above-mentioned ST machine game machine, the time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled after the variable probability state (high probability / high base state) and the time saving state due to relief time reduction (low probability / high base state ) may use different variation pattern tables. For example, in the time-saving state (low probability / high base state) due to the relief time reduction, the variable time is shorter than the time-saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled after the variable state (high probability / high base state). A variation pattern table with a high percentage determined to be a variation pattern (and a low percentage determined to be a variation pattern in which reach (or reach with particularly high expectations) is executed at the time of loss) may be used. . With such a configuration, when the relief time is shortened (that is, when the big hit does not occur for a long time), the period until the next big hit is controlled is shortened, so that the interest is reduced. can be suppressed. In addition, for example, when the relief time is shortened (that is, when no big hits occur for a long time), the rate of failure in reach (or reach with particularly high expectations) is low, so the decline in interest is suppressed. be able to.

Further, in the gaming machines of the characteristic portion 116IW and each modified example shown above, for example, as the jackpot type, after the jackpot game state ends, the variable probability state (high probability/high base state) is continued until the next jackpot occurs. Non-probable variable jackpot and non-probable variable jackpot A controlled in a time-saving state of 100 times (low probability / high base state) and non-controlled state of time-saving 249 times (low probability / high base state) A variable probability big hit B is provided, and when the next big win does not occur even after 250 times of variable display is completed in a non-variable state after turning on the power to the game machine or after the occurrence of the big win, the saving time is established. may be configured to That is, it is controlled to the time saving state until just before the relief time saving is established (specifically, the number of time saving times in the time saving state and the start winning opening that became easier to enter in the time saving state (for example, the second start winning opening) The sum of the upper limit memory number (for example, 4) of the special game based on the entry is larger (or the same) than the number of fluctuations (non-probability variable state) at which the relief time reduction is established. With such a configuration, a game state such that the time saving state after the big hit game is shifted to the time saving state by the relief time saving (in fact, it is once controlled to the normal state (that is, the special normal state) before the relief time saving is established). is performed, and interest can be improved.

As described above, the characterizing portion 116IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in the following (means 116-1-1) to (means 116-6).

(Means 116-1-1) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, a big hit A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player based on the derivation display of symbols), and that can update numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction number counter). Means (e.g., game control microcomputer 100 step 061IWS5603A, S5603B portion) and a special state (e.g., high base state) variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state (e.g., low probability / low base state) ) controllable special state control means (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284), and the update means is the first identification Numerical information is updated at the timing when the variable display of information is started and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information is started (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), In the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is performed. It is possible to control in a special state when a special condition is established by that (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A-S5607A, S5606B-S5607B), and the variable display where the special condition is established is executed. A notification effect execution means (for example, Effect control CPU 120 further includes a portion for executing step 108IWS806B. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify at an appropriate timing that the special condition will be controlled based on the establishment of the special condition, thereby improving interest.

(Means 116-1-2) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, a big hit A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player based on the derivation display of symbols), and that can update numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction number counter). Means (e.g., game control microcomputer 100 step 061IWS5603A, S5603B portion) and a special state (e.g., high base state) variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state (e.g., low probability / low base state) ) controllable special state control means (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284), and the update means is the first identification Numerical information is updated at the timing when the variable display of information is started and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information is started (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), In the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is performed. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is established by (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and just before the variable display where the special condition is established. A notification effect capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a time-saving rush effect shown in FIG. 11-24) for notifying that the special condition is controlled to a special state when the variable display is executed. It further comprises execution means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify at an appropriate timing that the special condition will be controlled based on the establishment of the special condition, thereby improving interest.

(Means 116-2) In means 116-1-1, including a special variable display pattern (for example, the first variation pattern #M (relief time short rush failure) and second variation pattern #L (relief time short rush failure)) Variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1717A and S1717B) is provided, and the variable display pattern determination means is provided with a special condition. When the special variable display pattern can be determined (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS17093A and S17093B), the special condition is not established before the special variable display pattern is determined, The notification effect execution means can execute the notification effect when the variable display by the special variable display pattern is being executed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS17093A, S17093B, the effect control (the portion where the CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS805 and S806B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player by the notification effect that the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition.

(Means 116-3) Variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns in means 116-1-2 (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1717A and S1717B) , and the variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the configuration of the modified example shown in FIGS. 11-24). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is established and before the special condition is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 116-4) In any one of means 116-1-1 to 116-3, the special state control means is in an advantageous state in either the special state or the non-special state (for example, low base state). Depending on whether it is controlled, it can be controlled to a special state with a different degree of advantage after the end of the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the processing of steps 061IWS2284, S2286 to S2287. During the normal state When the 6R jackpot A occurs in the (low base state) and is controlled to the time saving state (high base state), it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 times of the time saving count, and the 6R jackpot is generated during the time saving state (high base state). When A occurs and is controlled to the time saving state (high base state), it is controlled to the time saving state with the number of time saving times of 200. See FIG. 11-1), variable display result of variable display where special conditions are met is the specific display result, the advantage of the special state to be controlled after the end of the advantageous state is determined as being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 steps 061IWS59A, Execution of the jackpot determination module of S59B is executed after the update processing of the relief time reduction counter of steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A, S5602B to S5608B and the setting processing of the high base flag). According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 116-5) In any of means 116-1-1 to 116-4, a game medium is placed in the first path (for example, left-handed path) and the second path (for example, right-handed path). Launch promotion notification means (e.g., image display device 5 , a portion displaying a right-handed instruction display 100IW108 and a left-handed instruction display), and the launch promotion notification means indicates that the game medium should be shot toward the second path when the notification effect is executed. It is possible to execute the launch promotion notification (for example, when the time saving rush production is executed, the right hitting instruction display 100IW108 is displayed. See FIGS. 11-23 (B) and (C)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the launch promotion notification.

(Means 116-6) In any one of means 116-1-1 to 116-5, control to a special state is performed on the basis of the establishment of a special condition in response to the start of variable display for which the special condition is established. It is possible to output a signal (for example, 4 jackpot signals) that can specify that the possible signal output means (see eg FIGS. 11-19). According to such a configuration, it is possible to output to the outside at an appropriate timing a signal that can specify that the special condition is established based on the establishment of the special condition.

In addition, this characterizing portion 116IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in (means 117-1) to (means 117-5) shown below.

(Means 117-1) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is executed. is derived and displayed, the game machine is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player, and updating means ( For example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A, S5603B) and a special state (for example, in a high base state, Control to increase the probability of hitting the normal pattern, control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, and control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first start winning opening)) Special state control that can be controlled Means (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284) and the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel and a variable display execution means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S25A and S25B), and a variable display in which the variable display of the first identification information is shorter than the variable display of the second identification information A first shortened state with a high rate of variable display of the period (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a shorter variable time than the variable display of the second special symbol, low probability in the first embodiment / Low base state (normal state), low probability / high base state, and high probability / high base state (second probability variable state). A second shortened state in which the variable display of the identification information has a higher rate of variable display in a variable display period shorter than the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the variable display of the second special symbol is more variable than the first special symbol high probability/low base state (first probability variable state) in the first embodiment, which is executed in a short variable time (see FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4 and 11-19). Shortened state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 step 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284, S2514, S2206 portion), and the update means, Numerical information is updated when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A, S5603B Part ), the special state control means, the numerical information updated by the updating means is a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times of execution of the variable display (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0" ) can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by becoming (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and the variable display execution means is the second During execution of variable display of one of the identification information of the first identification information and the second identification information, based on the establishment of a special condition due to the execution of the variable display of the other identification information, the one identification information is changed. The display result of the display is not derived and displayed (for example, see FIG. 11-21 (A)), and the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display of the second identification information. Based on this, it is possible to derive and display a predetermined display result (for example, a lost pattern) different from the specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1125B and S1129B part), the shortened state control means can be controlled to the first shortened state when it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is step 061IWS5607A, The part that executes S5607B. When the saving time is established, the variable display of the first special symbol shifts to a low probability/high base state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a shorter variation time. 11-20). According to such a configuration, the game is controlled to the first shortened state after the special condition is satisfied, so that the game can be smoothly progressed and the interest can be improved.

(Means 117-2) In means 117-1, the variable display executing means generates a special display result different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display results of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. (For example, time-saving lost pattern) can be derived and displayed, and the special state control means can be controlled to a special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed (for example, game control microcomputer 100 steps 061IWS2032A, S2032B execution part), when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is established, it is possible to control to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, for game control The part where the microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2030A-S2031A, S2030B-S2031B (see FIG. 11-21(A)), the advantage of the special state controlled based on the derived display of the special display result The degree is lower than the advantage of the special state that is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, in the time saving state via the relief time saving, the number of time saving times is 800, whereas in the time saving state via the time saving loss, It is 100 times of time reduction (see Figure 11-1). According to such a configuration, even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is established, the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition, so that the degree of relief for the player can be enhanced. can be done.

(Means 117-3) In means 117-1 or 117-2, the special state control means variably displays one of the first identification information and the second identification information, resulting in a special display result. During execution of variable display of identification information, if a special condition is satisfied by execution of variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed, the special condition is satisfied. (For example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B), and even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one identification information, It does not control to the special state of advantage based on the derived display of the special display result (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS2030A-S2031A, S2030B-S2031B). According to such a configuration, in the configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the advantage of the special state based on the establishment of the special condition is ensured. It is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 117-4) In any one of means 117-1 to 117-3, the variable display execution means uses the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display results of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information A special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the display result can be derived and displayed, and during the execution of variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the other identification information Based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the one, it is possible to derive and display the predetermined display result in the variable display of the one identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is step 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B , the part that executes S1129B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the derivation display of the specific display result in the unintended variable display of the identification information, and it is possible to minimize the effect of the player's intentional strategy. .

(Means 117-5) In any one of means 117-1 to 117-4, the update means determines the timing at which variable display of the first identification information is started and the timing at which variable display of the second identification information is started. (For example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize updating of numerical information in a configuration in which variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed in parallel.

Further, the characterizing portion 116IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in (means 118-1) to (means 118-5) shown below.

(Means 118-1) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is executed. is derived and displayed, the game machine is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player, and updating means ( For example, the part that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment) and a special state (for example, in a high base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, low probability/low base state) Control to increase the probability of hitting the normal pattern, control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening)) Special state control that can be controlled means (for example, the part that executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, and S2284 in the first embodiment) and the variable display of the first identification information is shorter than the variable display of the second identification information A first shortened state in which the variable display period has a high rate of variable display (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a shorter variable time than the variable display of the second special symbol, in the second embodiment Low probability / low base state (normal state). See FIG. 12-1), and the second identification information has a high rate of variable display with a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the first identification information. Shortened state (for example, low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state ), high-probability/high base state (high-probability/first KT state), and high-probability/low base state (second KT state) (see FIG. 12-1). (corresponding to the part that executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284, S2514, and S2206 in the embodiment of 1), and the updating means performs variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, in the first embodiment, steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B are executed), and the special state control means updates Numerical information updated by means However, when the special condition is established by becoming a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times of variable display execution controllable (for example, steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A and S5606B to S5607B in the first embodiment), and the variable display execution means controls variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information. A special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result can be derived and displayed as a display result, and during execution of variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, Based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, it is possible to derive and display a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result in the variable display of the one identification information (for example, , steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, and S1129B in the first embodiment), the shortened state control means, when controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, enters the second shortened state (for example, controlled to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) in the second embodiment). According to such a configuration, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of the one identification information, the predetermined display in the variable display of the one identification information Since the display result is derived and displayed, and the second shortened state is controlled after the special condition is established, the game can be smoothly progressed and the interest can be improved.

(Means 118-2) In means 118-1, the variable display executing means generates a special display result different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display results of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. (For example, time-saving lost pattern) can be derived and displayed, and the special state control means can be controlled to a special state based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed (for example, step in the first embodiment 061IWS2032A and S2032B), and when a special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display that satisfies a special condition, it is possible to control to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, Steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2030A to S2031A, and S2030B to S2031B in the first embodiment), the advantage of the special state controlled based on the derived display of the special display result is Lower than the advantage of the special state that is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, in the time saving state via relief time saving, the number of time saving times is 800, whereas in the time saving state via time saving loss, the number of time saving times is 100 (see Figure 12-1). According to such a configuration, even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is established, the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition, so that the degree of relief for the player can be enhanced. can be done.

(Means 118-3) In means 118-1 or 118-2, the special state control means variably displays one of the first identification information and the second identification information, resulting in a special display result. During execution of variable display of identification information, if a special condition is satisfied by execution of variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed, the special condition is satisfied. (For example, it corresponds to the part that executes steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B in the first embodiment), and the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one identification information. However, it does not control to the special state of the advantage level based on the derived display of the special display result (for example, it corresponds to the portion of executing steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A and S2030B to S2031B in the first embodiment). According to such a configuration, in the configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the advantage of the special state based on the establishment of the special condition is ensured. It is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 118-4) In any one of means 118-1 to 118-3, the variable display execution means uses the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display results of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information A special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the display result can be derived and displayed, and during execution of variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the other identification information Based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of 1, it is possible to derive and display the predetermined display result in the variable display of the one identification information (for example, steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, and S1126B in the first embodiment). , S1129B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the derivation display of the specific display result in the unintended variable display of the identification information, and it is possible to minimize the effect of the player's intentional strategy. .

(Means 118-5) In any one of means 118-1 to 118-4, the update means determines the timing at which variable display of the first identification information is started and the timing at which variable display of the second identification information is started. (for example, it corresponds to the portion for executing steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment). According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize updating of numerical information in a configuration in which variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed in parallel.

Further, the characterizing portion 116IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in the following (means 119-1) to (means 119-6).

(Means 119-1) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is executed. is derived and displayed, the game machine is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player, and updating means ( For example, steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B are executed in the first embodiment) and a special state (for example, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than normal state (for example, low probability/low base state). Controllable special state control means (for example, the part that executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, and S2284 in the first embodiment) and a specific state that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the normal state Specific state control means (for example, the part that executes step 061IWS2206 in the first embodiment) that can be controlled (for example, high probability state), and the end that determines by lottery to end the specific state in the specific state Normal state control means (for example, step 061IWS5704A, S5712A in modification 2) that can be controlled to a normal state based on the determination by the determination means (for example, the part that executes step 061IWS5703A in modification 2) and the end determination means part), and in relation to the control of the specific state, a notification effect that can notify whether the specific state ends or the specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the inflection reach A to C shown in FIG. 12-7) (for example, the processing of steps 061IWS5710A, S5713A, and S633A in modification 2, and the processing of determining the variation pattern according to the state of the fan reach flags A to C). , the updating means updates the numerical information between when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, in the first embodiment, steps 061IWS5603A, Part that executes S5603B), the special state control means, the numerical information updated by the updating means is a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the number of times of relief time counter When the special condition is established by setting the value to "0"), it is possible to control to a special state. (For example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), when a special condition is established in a specific state, the specific state is terminated by the end determination means after the special condition is established. can be controlled to a special state after it is determined (for example, the part that executes steps 061IWS56061A, S5701A, S5704A, and S5701A to S5709A in Modification 2. (see FIG. 12-9), the notification effect execution means provides a notification effect (for example, FIG. 12-7 (3-2), (4) It is possible to notify by the fanning reach B) shown in . According to such a configuration, even when the specific state ends, the notification performance notifies that the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition, thereby giving the player a sense of security. While being able to give, interest can be improved.

(Means 119-2) In means 119-1, special information storage means (for example, RAM 102 ), and the special information is erased based on being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the part that executes step 061IWS631A in modification 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information indicating that the special condition has been established in the specific state.

(Means 119-3) In means 119-1 or 119-2, a special information storage capable of storing special information (for example, a relief time saving flag) indicating the establishment of the special condition when the special condition is established in a specific state. A means (for example, RAM 102) is provided, and the special information is erased based on being controlled to the special state after the end of the specific state (for example, the part that executes step 061IWS5707A in modification 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information indicating that the special condition has been established in the specific state.

(Means 119-4) In means 119-1 to 119-3, special information storage capable of storing special information (for example, relief time saving flag) indicating the establishment of the special condition when the special condition is established in a specific state. Means (for example, RAM102) is provided, and the specific state control means can end the control of the specific state by executing the initialization process (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) , the special information is erased by executing the initialization process. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information indicating that the special condition has been established in the specific state.

(Means 119-5) In means 119-1 to 119-4, a special condition fulfillment notification effect (for example, a chance mode as shown in FIG. ("Chi" icon 014IW003d indicating that it is controlled to (relief time reduction) is displayed on a part of the image display device 5) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize that the game will be controlled to the special state after the end of the specific state, thereby giving the player a sense of security and increasing interest.

(Means 119-6) In the means 119-1 to 119-5, the special state control means, when the specific state ends before the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the specific state In addition, it is possible to control the special state until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the part that executes steps 061IWS5705A, S5711A, and S5717A to S5720A in the second modification), and the notification effect execution means performs the predetermined number of times. When the variable display is executed exceeding the specified state, it is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether the specific state ends or the specific display result is displayed (for example, in the second modification, the processing of steps 061IWS5710A, S5713A, and S633A And, the part that is executed after the 100th variation after being controlled to the probability variation state, such as the process of determining the variation pattern depending on the state of the fanning reach flags A to C. See FIG. 12-6). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension and improve their interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 116IW and each modified example, the configuration of the game machine shown in (means 1A) to (means 8A) shown below may be applied.

(Means 1A) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), which is controllable to a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in a normal state, and a numerical value based on the execution of variable display. Updating means capable of updating information (for example, a relief time reduction counter), and the state control means causes the numerical information updated by the updating means to be a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed. Thus, when the special condition is satisfied, the updating means can be controlled to the special state, and the updating means provides numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed. is updated, and control of the special state is started based on a predetermined suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined suggestive effect (for example, advance notice effect) while the variable display is being executed, and the special condition being established. and a special notification effect execution means capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, a time-saving rush effect) for notifying that the is common (for example, the execution ratio of the notice effect does not change between the period when the remaining number of times until relief is 10 times or less and the period when it is 11 times or more). According to such a configuration, the sudden execution of the special notification effect can provide the player with a sense of surprise, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display that satisfies the special condition is started. This is a mode in which the effect display displayed before the start is made difficult to see (for example, it is blacked out at the start of the fluctuation). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and improve the interest.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A, an effect variable display executing means capable of executing variable display of the effect identification information (for example, decoration pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. In addition, the special notification effect execution means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display that satisfies the special condition ends. , blackout at the end of the fluctuation). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and improve the interest.

(Means 4A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is being executed, and the special notification effect is displayed. It is a mode of changing the background display in the means to the background display corresponding to the special state (for example, when the next variable display is executed, the background image corresponding to the time saving state by the relief time saving is displayed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and improve the interest. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 5A) In any of means 1A to 4A, it is provided with an explanation effect execution means capable of executing an explanation effect regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, an explanation about a relief time reduction (for example, a relief time reduction function and an explanation of the production in the relief time reduction)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) In any of means 1A to 5A, variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variation pattern setting process ), the variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied when the special condition is satisfied, and the special notification effect executing means is a variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied. After the non-specific display result (for example, lost pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the display, it is possible to execute a special notification effect (for example, in the variable display in which the relief time reduction is established, the variation pattern dedicated to the relief time reduction establishment is not used, and after the lost pattern is derived and displayed, it is notified that the relief time reduction has been established). According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special condition is being controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and to clearly notify the player of the change in the game state. It is possible to improve the interest when is established.

(Means 7A) In any one of means 1A to 6A, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition and the establishment of the starting condition; Reservation storage means (for example, a first reservation storage number buffer and a second reservation storage number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as reservation information when not established; A backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding information and pending information stored by the pending storage means, and an initialization process capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Initialization means (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8), and when power supply is started, numerical information updated by the update means based on the storage contents of the backup storage means and pending storage A recovery means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6) capable of executing a recovery process for recovering the pending information stored by the means is provided. According to such a configuration, while optimizing the control by the initialization process, power failure occurs in a situation where the pending memory corresponding to the special number of times of variable display is stored before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player when the game is played.

(Means 8A) In any one of means 1A to 6A, state storage means capable of storing special state information (for example, the state of a high base flag) capable of specifying that the special state is being controlled; Execution count storage means capable of storing execution count information (for example, the value of a time-saving counter) capable of specifying the number of times the variable display is executed, and special state information, execution count information, and numerical information even if the power supply is stopped and backup storage means (for example, RAM 102), and initialization means (for example, game control micro (a portion where the computer 100 executes step S8), and the initialization means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied and the special status information, the number of times of execution information, and the numerical information are held by the backup storage means, , In the initialization process, while initializing the special state information and the execution count information, the numerical information is not initialized (for example, while initializing the state of the high base flag and the value of the time saving counter, The value of the relief time reduction counter is not initialized (that is, the value before the power failure is set)). According to such a configuration, intentional initialization of the numerical information can be prevented, and the degree of relief for the player can be enhanced.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 116IW and each modified example, the configuration of the gaming machine shown in (means 1B) to (means 5B) shown below may be applied.

(Means 1B) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), which is controllable to a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in a normal state, and a numerical value based on the execution of variable display. updating means capable of updating information; and variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. (For example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process), and the state control means, the numerical information updated by the updating means corresponds to the special number of times as the number of times of executing the variable display When the special condition is satisfied by the specific value, the update means can be controlled to the special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed. and the variable display pattern determining means can determine the specific variable display pattern in both cases of the display result of the variable display being the specific display result and the case of not being the specific display result. Yes (for example, it is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern of reach (or reach with particularly high expectations) in both cases of a big hit and a loss), and when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result In addition, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, the reach (or the reach with particularly high expectation) fluctuation pattern has a high probability of being determined in the case of a big hit), and the special condition In the predetermined period before the is established, when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than the period before the predetermined period (for example, the relief time reduction Just before it becomes, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern of reach (or reach with particularly high expectations) at the time of loss is low). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed although the variable display by the specific variable display pattern is executed in the predetermined period before the special condition is established.

(Means 2B) In means 1B, a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a countdown effect or effect effect suggesting that a relief time reduction is established, or a telop display during customer waiting). and the suggestive effect executing means has a higher proportion of executing the suggestive effect in a predetermined period before the special condition is established than in the period before the predetermined period. According to such a configuration, the player can expect the establishment of the special condition, and the interest can be improved. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player due to the player ending the game just before the special condition is established.

(Means 3B) In means 1B or means 2B, a telop display including an explanation effect on a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, an explanation on a relief time saving function (for example, an explanation of a relief time saving function or a relief time saving effect)) perform) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) In any one of means 1B to 3B, execution of notice effect capable of executing notice effect (for example, timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed while variable display is being executed. means, wherein the advance notice effect execution means can execute the notice effect in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result, and the display result of the variable display can be executed When is a specific display result, the ratio of executing the notice effect is higher than when it is not a specific display result, and the predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less period) is lower than the period before the predetermined period, when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the proportion of executing the advance notice effect is lower. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed although the advance notice effect is executed in the predetermined period before the special condition is established.

(Means 5B) In any one of means 1B to 4B, execution of notice effect capable of executing notice effect (for example, timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed while variable display is being executed. means, wherein the advance notice effect executing means performs a specific mode (for example, the effect mode "red") and a predetermined the advance notice effect can be executed depending on the mode (for example, the effect mode "blue"), and when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the proportion of executing the notice effect in the specific mode is higher than in the predetermined mode, If the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result in the predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less) than the period before the predetermined period Secondly, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect by the specific mode is low. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed although the advance notice effect is executed in the specific mode during the predetermined period before the special condition is established.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 116IW and each modified example, the configuration of the game machine shown in (means 1C) to (means 8C) shown below may be applied.

(Means 1C) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), which is controllable to a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in a normal state, and a numerical value based on the execution of variable display. Updating means capable of updating information, and variable display pattern determination means (e.g., , a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process), and the state control means is such that the numerical information updated by the updating means is a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution of the variable display Therefore, when the special condition is satisfied, the update means can be controlled to the special state, and the updating means can perform the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. The numerical information is updated, and the variable display pattern determination means can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and before the special condition is satisfied, the special variable display pattern is not determined and the special variable display pattern is determined. Further provided is a specific notification effect executing means capable of executing a specific notification effect (for example, time saving rush effect) for notifying that the special state is controlled when the variable display by the display pattern is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the special condition is controlled to the special state by the establishment of the special condition, and to improve the interest when the special condition is established.

(Means 2C) In means 1C, the specific notification effect execution means executes a specific notification effect when a variable display satisfying a special condition is executed and a non-specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. When the variable display satisfying the special condition is executed, and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the specific display result is executed after the production in the same mode as the specific notification production is executed. A special notification effect executing means capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, a simulated effect of shortening the working hours) for notifying that is derived and displayed is provided. According to such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the special condition has been established, it is notified that the control is in an advantageous state. can be done.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or 2C, when a variable display that satisfies a special condition is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is not executed before the special condition is established. A predetermined notification effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined notification effect (for example, a full rotation effect) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed according to a mode is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and special feeling, and improve the interest.

(Means 4C) In means 1C or 2C, when the variable display that satisfies the special condition is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the mode is the same as before the special condition is met. A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect that notifies that a specific display result is derived and displayed by realized by being determined by the variation pattern). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is established and before the special condition is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any one of means 1C to 4C, the display period (for example, 20 seconds) of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied is the display result of the variable display before the special condition is satisfied. In the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is established, which is longer than the display period (for example, 0.5 seconds), a notification effect that notifies that the control of the special state is started (for example, relief time reduction A notification effect executing means capable of executing a mode transition effect for notifying that the control of the time saving state by is started) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure the period for executing the notification effect in the normal state, clarify the effect when switching the game state, and improve the interest.

(Means 6C) In any one of means 1C to 5C, at the start of the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied, a specific signal (for example, a fluctuation stop signal) corresponding to the start of the display period , and after outputting the specific signal, a signal output means for outputting a special signal (for example, 4 jackpot signals) corresponding to the control of the special state. According to such a configuration, when the specific signal and the special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside.

(Means 7C) In means 6C, the signal output means performs special processing (for example, extending the period until the next A special signal is output at the start of the next fluctuation postponement process for According to such a configuration, when the specific signal and the special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside.

(Means 8C) In any one of means 1C to 6C, a first passage area (for example, a first starting prize opening) provided at a position through which a game medium passing through a specific path (for example, a left-handed path) can pass ), a second passage area (for example, a second starting prize opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a special path (for example, a right-handed path) can pass, and a variable display of identification information, the second Variable display executing means capable of executing variable display of the first identification information based on the establishment of the first starting condition and variable display of the second identification information based on the establishment of the second starting condition; A special output that can specify that the game medium should be shot toward the and a special output means capable of executing a notification that the game is in a state where the The special output means is established based on the passage of the game medium through the second passage area, and the special output means executes special processing (e.g., next variation Special output can be executed at the start of the next fluctuation postponement process for extending the period until the start of According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special output capable of specifying that the game media should be shot toward the special path at an appropriate timing.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 116IW and each modified example, the configuration of the game machine shown in (means 1D) to (means 5D) shown below may be applied.

(Means 1D) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), which is controllable to a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in a normal state, and a numerical value based on the execution of variable display. An updating means capable of updating information, and a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process), The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of execution times of the variable display, and the updating means can , the numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determining means updates the special A determinable variable display pattern (e.g., first variation pattern #A) is determined even before the condition is established, and a non-specific display result (e.g., lost pattern) is derived as the display result of the variable display that satisfies the special condition. It further comprises a special notification effect executing means capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, display of a background image corresponding to a relief time saving) for notifying that control of the special state is started after being displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the change in the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest when the special condition is established. In addition, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is established and before the special condition is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 2D) In means 1D, variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112A) a reserve storage means (for example, a first reserve memory number buffer or a second reserve memory number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as reserve information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not met; A look-ahead forewarning effect that targets the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the means (for example, a stop display effect of a special decorative pattern (chance eye), or a hold change effect that changes the color and shape of the hold display) , a zone effect that performs a special background display, etc.); While it is possible to execute the pre-reading forewarning effect whose forewarning target is the variable display when the special condition is established, the execution of the fore-reading forewarning effect for which the variable display after the variable display where the special condition is established is the fore- notice target is restricted ( For example, the suspended memory stored before reaching the relief time-saving fluctuation, and the suspension memory corresponding to the variation that is performed after being controlled to the time-saving state via the relief time-saving is executed to restrict (prohibit) According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process, and it is possible to avoid contradiction in the presentation contents.

(Means 3D) In means 1D or 2D, the special notification effect execution means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is being executed. Is a mode of changing the background display on the display means to the background display corresponding to the special state (for example, when the next variable display is performed, the background image corresponding to the time saving state due to the relief time saving is displayed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness and improve interest, and prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) In any of means 1D to 3D, a suggestive production related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a countdown production or effect production suggesting that a relief time reduction is established, a telop display during customer waiting, etc.) An executable suggestive performance executing means is provided, and the suggestive performance executing means limits the execution of the suggestive performance in a prescribed period (for example, a period in which the number of remaining times until relief time reduction is 10 or less) before a special condition is established. According to such a configuration, since the special notification effect is suddenly executed, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness and improve interest.

(Means 5D) In any of means 1D to 4D, an explanation effect execution means capable of executing an explanation effect regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, explanation of a relief time saving function or a relief time saving effect) including telop display). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 116IW and each modified example, the configuration of the game machine shown in (means 1E) to (means 4E) shown below may be applied.

(Means 1E-1) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, The game machine is controllable to a jackpot game state), and is based on a state control means capable of being controlled to a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and variable display is executed. and a variable that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern having a variable display period shorter than the predetermined variable display pattern. Display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variation pattern setting process), and the state control means derives and displays a specific display result as a display result of the variable display. When the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display, and the special condition is met. The variable display pattern determination means is controllable to a special state, and the update means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. , the special state that is controlled when the special condition is established is more advantageous than the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. The rate of determining the pattern is high (for example, the time saving state via the relief time saving has a high rate of being determined to the variation pattern with the variation time shortened than the time saving state via the jackpot). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of variable display reaches a specific number, the rate of execution of variable display by the shortened variable display pattern increases, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled. is shortened, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(Means 1E-2) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, The game machine is controllable to a jackpot game state), and is based on a state control means capable of being controlled to a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and variable display is executed. and variable display pattern determination for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, the first variable pattern #C) corresponding to the execution of the ready-to-win effect. Means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variation pattern setting process), and the state control means is in an advantageous state based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display and the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display, and the special state is entered when the special condition is met. The updating means updates the numerical information when the first identification information is variably displayed and when the second identification information is variably displayed; The special state controlled when the condition is satisfied is determined as the specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, the time-saving state via relief time-saving is determined to be a variation pattern that becomes a reach (or a reach with particularly high expectations) when the display result is lost, rather than the time-saving state via a big hit. low percentage). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches the specific number of times, the ratio of the display result of the variable display according to the specific variable display pattern to the non-specific display result is low, thereby reducing interest. can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) In means 1E, background display means capable of displaying different background displays on the display means for the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is established. (For example, the background image is different between the time saving state via the big hit and the time saving state via the relief time saving). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the difference in the game state, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

(Means 3E) In means 1E or 2E, variable display executing means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112A and a pending memory means (for example, a first pending memory number buffer or a second pending memory number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as pending information when the starting condition is met but the start condition is not met. and a pre-reading notice execution means capable of executing a pre-reading notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) whose notice target is a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means, and a pre-reading notice execution means. The means is a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state that is controlled when the special condition is established, and the ratio of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and any of a plurality of types of pre-reading notice The ratio of whether to execute the production is different (for example, the ratio of executing the pre-reading notice production and the pre-reading notice production out of multiple types in the time saving state via the relief time saving and the time saving state via the jackpot) different from the ratio of According to such a configuration, the execution frequency and execution type of the foreseeing advance notice effect are determined in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is established. It can be different, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 4E) In any one of means 1E to 3E, variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the start condition, and Reserved storage means (for example, a first reserved storage number buffer and a second reserved storage number buffer) capable of storing information about variable display as reserved information when not established, and a variable corresponding to the reserved information stored in the reserved storage means Pre-reading notice effects that target display (for example, effects that stop displaying special decorative patterns (chance eyes), pending change effects that change the color and shape of pending display, zone effects that display special backgrounds, etc.) and a pre-reading notice executing means capable of executing the above, wherein the pre-reading notice executing means foretells variable display when the special condition is established among the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is established. While it is possible to execute the target pre-reading notice effect, limit the execution of the pre-reading notice effect that targets the variable display after the variable display where the special condition is established (for example, before reaching the relief time-saving fluctuation Limit (prohibit) the execution of the pre-reading notice performance for the notice object of the reserved memory which is the stored reserved memory and corresponds to the change performed after being controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving. According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process, and it is possible to avoid contradiction in the presentation contents.

It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately combine the configuration indicated by the characteristic portion 120IW with the constitution indicated by the characteristic portion 090IW, the characteristic portion 113IW, and the characteristic portion 116IW. For example, when applying the configuration shown in the characteristic portion 090IW to the configuration shown in the characteristic portion 120IW, if there is a small hit with V winning during the time saving state, the value of the small hit number counter is subtracted by 1 While the time saving state is terminated by doing so, the value of the small winning number counter may not be subtracted when a small win without V winning is made during the time saving state.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize winning port 11... Main board 12... Effect control board 13... Audio control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Start port Switch 23...Count switch 30...Battering operation handle 31A...Stick controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 100...Game control microcomputer 101, 121...ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information including first identification information and second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state for a player based on the derived display of a specific display result,
special state control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state;
updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of variable display;
The special state control means is capable of controlling to the special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times,
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the variable display of the second identification information is executed,
special state control means capable of controlling a special state different from the advantageous state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed;
special counting means for counting the number of times the special state occurs in the special state;
a special state termination means for terminating the special state,
The special state ending means can end the special state based on the number of times of the special state counted by the special counting means reaching a specific number of times,
When the special condition is established in the normal state and the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is established, the special display result is derived and displayed. is controllable to said special state during said special state based on
The special state control means can be controlled to a first special state after being controlled to the advantageous state in the normal state, and after being controlled to the advantageous state in the first special state, Controllable to a highly advantageous second special state,
The special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is established, and the advantageous state is based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area in the special state based on the derived display of the special display result. is controllable to the first special state after the advantageous state when controlled to
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images